Floor Heating Valsir PDF

QUALITY FOR PLUMBING
www.valsir.it
Technical manual
L02-242/1
Floor heating and cooling system
Energy saving
Elevated thermal well-being
Low operating temperature
Uniform temperature distribution
Characteristics, planning, dimensioning, laying and testing
1 CHARACTERISTICS OF FLOOR HEATING SYSTEMS 6
1.1 Hygienic conditions 6
1.2 Aesthetical advantages 6
1.3 Well-being 6
1.3.1 What is comfort or thermo-hygrometric well-being? 6
1.3.2 Measurement of comfort 6
1.3.3 Causes of discomfort 8
1.4 Energy saving 9
1.4.1 Why does floor heating reduce energy consumption? 9
1.4.2 Floor insulation 9
1.4.3 Operating temperature 10
1.4.4 Reduced stratification of the air temperature 11
1.4.5 System water at low temperature 11
2 COMPONENTS CATALOGUE 12
3 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE COMPONENTS 31
3.1 PEXAL and MIXAL pipe 31
3.1.1 General characteristics 31
3.1.2 Characteristics of crosslinked polyethylene PE-Xb 33
3.1.3 Characteristics of aluminium 33
3.1.4 Mechanical behaviour 33
3.1.5 Expansion 34
3.1.6 Resistance to abrasion, encrustation and corrosion 34
3.1.7 Barrier to oxygen and UV rays 34
3.1.8 Lightweight 35
3.1.9 Sound absorption 35
3.1.10 Long lasting 36
3.1.11 Heat conductivity 36
3.1.12 Comparison of heat outputs of different pipes 36
3.1.13 Pressure losses 39
3.1.14 Quality control 43
3.1.15 Pipe approvals 46
3.2 V-ESSE, V-ELLE, V-ZETA, V-ERRE and V-ENNE insulation panels 48
3.2.1 V-ESSE panel 48
3.2.2 V-ELLE panel 50
3.2.3. V-ZETA panel 52
3.2.4. V-ERRE panel 54
3.2.5. V-ENNE panel 56
3.2.6 Instructions for laying the V-ENNE eco-compatible system 58
3.3 V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat 60
3.3.1 Introduction 60
3.3.2 Technical characteristics 60
3.3.3 Soundproof insulation of foot-traffic noise with V-ACUSTIC 62
3.3.4 Rules for the installation of V-ACUSTIC 66
3.4 Distribution manifold 68
3.4.1 Manifold components 68
3.4.2 Practical method for adjusting and balancing of the manifold 70
3.4.3 Composition of the manifold (without mixing kit) 71
3.5 Valsir mixing kit 73
3.5.1 V-MIX02 fixed point mixing kit 73
3.5.2 V-MIX01 fixed point and variable point mixing kit 75
3.5.3 Theory: adjustment of the mixing kit 77
3.5.4 Practice: adjustment of the mixing kit 78
3.5.5 The assembled mixing kit 79
3.6 V-BOX modules 82
3.7 Mixing and distribution groups for heating plants 85
3.7.1 The distribution and mixing modules 86
3.7.2 Differential valve 94
3.7.3 Distribution manifolds 95
3.7.4 Hydraulic separator 97
3.7.5 Dimensioning of the mixing groups 107
3.8 V-DRYAIR isotherm dehumidifiers for cooling systems 112
3.8.1 Condensation and the dehumidification of air 112
3.8.2 V-DRYAIR 250V and V-DRYAIR 250H isotherm dehumidifiers 113
3.8.3 V-DRYAIR 450H isotherm dehumidifers 115
3.8.4 V-DRYAIR 900H isotherm dehumidifiers 116
3.9 Control systems 118
3.9.1 V-CLIMA system 118
3.9.2 Control units of the heating circuits 127
3.9.3 Some control schemes 138
3.10 Concrete fluidizer 144
3.10.1 Calculation of the quantity of fluidizer 144
4 VALSIR FLOOR HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEMS 146
4.1 System and system components 146
4.2 Guidelines for choosing the system and its components 156
5 DIMENSIONING OF FLOOR HEATING SYSTEMS IN COMPLIANCE WITH UNI EN 1264 162
5.1 Introduction 162
5.2 Dimensioning: theory 162
5.2.1 Layer composition of the floor 162
5.2.2 Required thermal flow 165
5.2.3 Characteristic curves 166
5.2.4 Thermal flow limit and maximum floor temperature 166
5.2.5 Limit curve 167
5.2.6 Supply temperature 167
5.2.7 Average floor temperature 168
5.2.8 Downward heat dispersion 168
5.2.9 Length of heating loops 169
5.2.10 Flow and temperature of heating fluid 169
5.2.11 Design limits in the choice of pipe spacing 170
5.2.12 Balancing of heating circuits 170
5.3 Dimensioning: practice 171
5.3.1 Floor layer composition 173
5.3.2 Required thermal flow 174
5.3.3 Thermal flow limit and maximum floor temperature 175
5.3.4 The characteristics curves and the limit curve 176
5.3.5 Supply temperature 177
5.3.6 Circuit dimensioning 178
5.3.7 Balancing of heating circuits 180
6 DIMENSIONING OF ANTI-SNOW AND ANTI-ICE SYSTEMS (SNOW-MELT) 187
6.1 Introduction 187
6.2 System types 188
6.3 System design 189
6.4 Dimensioning: theory 190
6.4.1 The required thermal output 190
6.4.2 Layer composition of the radiant panel 192
6.4.3 Calculation of temperatures 193
6.4.4 Downward specific heat output 193
6.4.5 Calculation of the number of loops 193
6.4.6 Calculation of the flow rates and the temperatures of the heating fluid 194
6.4.7 Typical snowmelt systems 195
6.5 Dimensioning: practice 196
6.5.1 Required heat output 196
6.5.2 Layer composition of the radiant panel 196
6.5.4 Downward specific thermal output 196
6.5.5 Calculation of circuit loops 197
6.5.6 Calculation of the flow and the temperature of the heating fluid 197
7 INSTALLATION 204
7.1 Preliminary procedures and verifications 204
7.2 Installation of the manifold and mixing kit 204
7.3 Laying of the edging strip 205
7.4 Laying of insulation panels 205
7.5 Laying the pipe 207
7.6 Creation of expansion joints 208
7.7 Creation of the settlement joints 209
7.8 System filling 210
7.9 System testing 210
7.10 Laying of the screed 210
7.11 System commissioning 210
8 APPENDIX 211
A Heat transfer 211
A.1 Heat transfer modes 211
A.1.1 Conduction 211
A.1.2 Convection 211
A.1.3 Radiation 212
A.2 Combined heat transfer processes 212
A.3 Heat transfer in heating systems 214
A.3.1 Radiator systems 214
A.3.2 Fan heater systems 214
A.3.3 Floor heating systems 214
B Climatic data for Italian regions and towns 215
C Thermal conductivity and resistance of materials 218
D Wood as a floor covering 220
E dimensioning of metal reinforcement in the floors 221
E.1 Dimensioning example of a metal reinforcement 222
F Antifreeze liquid in heating systems 223
G Calculation of quantity of concrete 224
H Insulation panels in floor heating 227
H.1 The influence of insulation panels on system performance 227
H.1.1 Mechanical function 227
H.1.2 Reduction of thermal mass 227
H.2 Numerical analysis of insulation 228
H.2.1 Calculation basis 228
H.2.2 Results 229
H.3 Conclusion 231
I Noise in the buildings 232
I.1 Introduction 232
I.2 Sound 232
I.3 Noise and its measurement 234
I.4 Noise in buildings and Italian legislation 236
I.5 Foot traffic noise 238
L Heat outputs 239
M Measurement units 240
N Standard and legislative references 243
O Technical specifications 244
1 CHARACTERISTICS OF FLOOR HEATING SYSTEMS
The first evidence of floor heating dates back to Roman times. The working principles were straightforward but ingenious; an underground
fire was made and the hot fumes were conveyed through ducts under the floor of the building. It was only after the war that the first floor
heating systems were installed with the use hot water that ran through pipes that were embedded in the floor; unfortunately the poor
insulation of the buildings, the high temperatures and the lack of adequate control systems caused this type of system to lose popularity for
quite some time. The energy crisis of the seventies, however, and the issuing of European laws on thermal insulation resulted in the return
of this type of heating. Floor heating is, today, certainly the most technically valid solution offered by the heating market for the residential,
commercial and industrial sector. The various solutions available allow maximum flexibility and adaptability to all types of building and
construction requirements. Furthermore, the use of a heat transfer fluid at low temperatures and the particular stratification of the heat in
the room results in significant energy saving.
In the following paragraphs we will analyse some of the characteristics that differentiate floor heating systems: hygienic conditions,
aesthetical advantages, well-being and energy conservation.
1.1 Hygienic conditions
Floor heating naturally rules out the formation of damp areas on the floor, conditions favouring dust mites and bacteria are therefore not
generated and there will also be no formation of mildew. Unlike traditional systems, there is no combustion of motes, which provoke a dry
and irritated throat and there are no convective currents, which favour the transport of dust in the room.
1.2 Aesthetical advantages
There are no limits of an architectural nature linked to the presence of heating units; therefore, there is total freedom in interior decorating.
By eliminating the problem of condensation and mildew, there will be no deterioration of wooden floors or windows and frames.
Traditional heating systems limit the space available for the distribution of furniture whereas floor heating systems allow all available space
to be utilised; it is also advantageous in buildings of an architectural and artistic importance where it is essential that the surroundings be
left unaltered.
1.3 Well-being
1.3.1 What is comfort or thermo-hygrometric well-being?
The objective definition defines thermo-hygrometric comfort as the state of thermal neutrality of the human body in which its thermal
accumulation is zero and in which the organism maintains its mechanisms of thermoregulation (absence of perspiration in hot rooms or
shivers in cold rooms) and vasomotor thermoregulation (absence of blood vessel dilation and contraction) almost inactive. The subjective
definition defines thermo-hygrometric comfort as the physical and psychological state of satisfaction that an individual feels because of the
conditions in which he finds himself (temperature, humidity, air velocity, etc.).
The human body produces thermal energy based on the activity being carried out. A person when sedentary produces 100 W whereas
under strain can produce 1000 W and this thermal energy must be dispersed to maintain the temperature under control and to avoid
situations of thermal stress (discomfort). The human body is therefore a thermo-dynamic machine that exchanges energy (heat and work)
with the atmosphere and in which the energy balance must be maintained, where the latent component of heat connected to evaporation
and breathing and the dormant component of heat exchanged by convection and radiation, intercede.
1.3.2 Measurement of comfort
Thermo-hygrometric well-being depends on several parameters:
the energetic metabolism M that depends on the activity carried out and is measured in W/m
2
(body surface) or in met (1 met = 58,2 W/m
2
),
the thermal resistance of clothing I
cl
expressed in m
2
K/W or in clo (1 clo = 0,155 m
2
K/W),
he air temperature T
a
measured around the person,
the average radiant temperature T
mr
caused by the room where the person is found,
relative air velocity v
a
,
relative air humidity UR.
One method of identifying the conditions of well-being is to express it by means of the PMV (Predicted Mean Vote) that is based on the
balance of thermal energy in the human body. Man is equilibrated when the thermal energy generated inside the body is equal to the
thermal energy dispersed into the room. The PMV is therefore a function of the six parameters described and expresses the average vote
of a sample of people in various climatic conditions.
C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
1
6
Table 1.1 Values of PMV.
Sensation Very hot Hot Slightly hot Neutral Slightly cold Cold Very cold
PMV +3 +2 +1 0 -1 -2 -3
The PMV therefore predicts the average vote of thermal sensation expressed by a considerable number of people. The PPD (Predicted
Percentage of Dissatisfied) is, on the other hand, an indicator that predicts the number of people that will be dissatisfied from a thermal
point of view for a certain PMV value.
Figure 1.1 Relationship between PMV and PPD.
-
3
,
0
-
2
,
8
-
2
,
6
-
2
,
4
-
2
,
2
-
2
,
0
-
1
,
8
-
1
,
6
-
1
,
4
-
1
,
2
-
1
,
0
-
0
,
8
-
0
,
6
-
0
,
4
-
0
,
2
0
,
0
0
,
2
0
,
4
0
,
6
0
,
8
1
,
0
1
,
2
1
,
4
1
,
6
1
,
8
2
,
0
2
,
2
2
,
4
2
,
6
2
,
8
3
,
0
PMV
P
P
D
SATISFIED
DISSATISFIED
80%
100%
90%
70%
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
10%
0%
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
According to this theory, climatic conditions are considered pleasant when they correspond to a percentage of satisfied people greater than
90% and therefore a percentage of dissatisfied people below 10%. Such conditions are summarized in the following table.
Table 1.2 Conditions considered pleasant.
Metabolism M 0,84 met
Clothing I
cl
02 clo
Air temperature T
a
1030C
Mean radiant temperature T
mr
1040C
Relative air velocity v
a
01 m/s
Relative air humidity UR 3070%
As an alternative to the PMV index it is possible to use other indicators such as, for example, the operating temperature. This represents
the uniform temperature of a room in which the subject exchanges the same energy by convection and radiation that effectively exchanges in
the real room in which the temperature is not distributed uniformly. The operating temperature is the weighed average if the air temperature
and the average radiant temperature, the weights of which are convective conductance (clothes-air) and radiative conductance (clothes-
surfaces of the room).
h
c
T
a
+ h
r
T
mr
h
c
+ h
r
T
op
=
This temperature is in reality also a function of the air velocity in that the coefficient of convective conductance is strongly linked to this
parameter. The Standard UNI EN ISO 7730 suggests a simplified formula for calculating the operating temperature:
T
op
= A T
a
+ (1-A) T
mr
where A is a function of the relative air velocity v
a
.
C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
1
7
Table 1.3 Coefficient A as a function of air velocity.
v
a
[m/s] <0,2 0,20,6 0,61,0
A 0,5 0,6 0,7
The operating temperature is also defined as the total dry temperature perceived; it is the combination of the two temperatures which
cannot take on infinite combinations but generally remain within the fields of values depending on the heating/cooling system as shown.
Table 1.4 Relation between the air temperature and the mean radiant temperature.
Winter conditions Radiant panels T
mr
> T
a
T = 13C
Summer conditions Radiant panels T
mr
< T
a
T = 12C
Winter conditions Radiators, fan-coils, ducts T
mr
< T
a
T = 36C
Summer conditions Radiators, fan-coils, ducts T
mr
> T
a
T = 46C
We immediately notice that with radiant panel technologies the difference between the temperature of the air and the temperature of the
surfaces is lower than the difference in temperature with traditional heating/cooling technologies. Furthermore, with an analysis of winter
conditions only, it can be noted that with radiant panel systems, the temperature of the air can be lower than the temperature of the surfaces
and this translates into interesting consequences for energy saving. By intersecting the field of acceptability of the PMV with the values of
operating temperature, in the case of sedentary activity M1.2 met, we find that the values that ensure comfort, are the following:
20C < T
op
< 24C in winter conditions (clothing 1 clo);
23C < T
op
< 26C in summer conditions (clothing 0.5 clo).
1.3.3 Causes of discomfort
The causes that can generate local discomfort are several and depend also on the type of heating/cooling system.
Figure 1.2 Causes of local discomfort.
T
f
T
a
v
m
T
r
T
r
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Vertical temperature differences are too high. A higher temperature at the height of the head compared to the temperature at the height
of the ankles generates a greater local discomfort that will increase with an increase in the temperature difference; the Standard UNI EN
ISO 7730 establishes a maximum temperature difference of 3C.
Floor too hot or too cold. The Standard UNI EN 1264 that regulates floor heating systems has in fact established the surface temperature
limits (see chapter on floor system dimensioning).
Mean radiant temperature distributed in an asymmetrical manner. There will be greater sensations of discomfort when the irregularity is
caused by a heated ceiling or by cold walls (windows).
Air drafts. The sensation of discomfort caused by the air velocity is linked to its temperature. An air draft in the presence of low temperatures
can generate sensations of discomfort while in the presence of elevated temperatures it is beneficial on a comfort level.
C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
1
8
1.4 Energy saving
1.4.1 Why does floor heating reduce energy consumption?
Systems with radiant panels, as compared with traditional heating systems, allow an average energy saving of more than 20% at equal
environmental temperatures. The reasons for this marked saving are due to the fact that the large exchange surface formed by the floor
allows the room to be heated with a heat transfer fluid that runs at low temperatures. For this reason, it is convenient to use heat sources
whose performance increases when run at low temperatures (heat pumps, condensation boilers, solar panels, heat recovery systems,
district heating systems).
The thermal gradient that is generated with a floor heating system is such that the heat losses are less as compared with a traditional
heating system. This is because, unlike traditional systems, it is possible to recover the heat that is usually wasted due to the effect of air
stratification that reaches higher temperatures at the ceiling; this heat recovery increases with the increase in the height of the room.
With a floor heating system the condition of well-being is reached with an average room temperature that is generally 1C lower as
compared with traditional heating systems and therefore, at equal comfort it is possible to reduce energy consumption. The employment of
insulation panels that are required to support the pipe but at the same time significantly reduce heat losses help increase the output of the
system; traditional heating systems do not require panels and therefore such panels are never employed.
1.4.2 Floor insulation
Floor heating systems are characterised by the presence (required by the European Standard UNI EN 1264) of a layer of insulation to 1)
support the loops. Pocketed or smooth panels can used to create the insulation layer that has a minimum thickness of approximately
20 mm.
The function of the insulation, besides acting as a mechanical support for the pipe is also to act as a thermal insulation for the rooms 2)
below and to reduce the thermal inertia of the system.
The presence of insulation panels in floor heating systems halves downward heat loss as compared with systems without insulation 3)
panels.
If we consider a room that lies directly over the ground, the dispersion in a system with insulation panels is about 19%, while in a system
that has no insulation panels, dispersion can be as high as 36%!
Figure 1.3 Insulation with V-ESSE pocketed panels.
C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
1
9
1.4.3 Operating temperature
The air temperature T
a
and the mean radiant temperature T
mr
of the structures determine the operating temperature T
op
. The latter indicates
the conditions of well-being of an individual.
In a floor heating system, the mean radiant temperature of the structures is greater than the temperature of the structures where a
traditional heating system has been installed and this allows a reduction in the temperature of the air. The thermal exchange with the
outside is directly proportionate to the difference in temperature between the room air temperature and the outside temperature.
In a traditional system (see Figure 1.4) the mean temperature of the air is higher with a consequently higher thermal outward flow compared
to a system with radiant panels where the mean temperature of the air is lower. In fact, in a system with panels the temperature in proximity
with, for example, the glassed surfaces is lower and this allows a reduction in the thermal flow lost to the outside environment (see Figure
1.5). With a floor heating system it is possible to maintain an average air temperature of 19C compared to a traditional system where the
average temperature is 20C, just one degree centigrade less can generate a saving in energy of approximately 7%.
T
op
= A T
a
+ (1-A) T
mr

Figure 1.4 Traditional system. Figure 1.5 Floor heating.
20
19
19
20
21
21
20 23
24
20
19
19
40
30
DISPERSION
DISPERSION
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The considerations made for floor heating systems, also apply to floor cooling systems. The temperature of cooling air can take on higher
values with important consequences on an energy conservation level without altering the conditions of well-being.
T
op
= A T
a
+ (1-A) T
mr

Figure 1.6 Traditional air-conditioning system. Figure 1.7 Floor cooling.
24
34
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
27
34
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
1
10
1.4.4 Reduced stratification of the air temperature
Another of the advantages of a system with radiant panels is the reduced stratification of the air temperature. In traditional systems, the
heating element significantly increases the temperature of the air (35C-40C) thus favouring the distribution of hot air in proximity to the
ceiling. The effect of this stratification of the air is amplified in rooms with very high ceilings where the differences in temperature between
the floor and ceiling can even reach 10C (see Figure 1.8 and Figure 1.9).
In floor heating systems temperature distribution is different, there is a temperature of about 22C near the floor and a temperature of 18C
near the ceiling (in a residential building). This temperature distribution means that thermal energy is consumed where it is needed and
that is, at the height of the room occupant. This significant difference in the distribution of temperatures introduces further advantages in
energy saving.
Figure 1.8 Ideal distribution. Figure 1.9 Real distribution.
18
18
18
18
8 m
22
28
26
18
8 m
DISPERSION DISPERSION
2008 Valsir S.p.A. 2008 Valsir S.p.A.
1.4.5 System water at low temperature
The elevated exchange surface formed by the radiant floor means that ample volumes can be heated with the heat transfer fluid in the
system running at low temperatures. For this reason it is convenient to use heat sources whose output increases when the required
temperature decreases such as heat pumps, condensation boilers and solar panels. The supply temperature to the circuits range on
average from 30C to 40C depending on the climatic conditions present; in a traditional system the supply temperature is on average
70C, this significant difference consents further saving in energy since it allows an increase in the distribution performance of the system.
The lower the temperatures of the heat transfer fluid the lower the energy losses in the distribution tract that runs from the boiler to the
manifolds.
C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
1
11
2 COMPONENTS CATALOGUE

MIXAL pipe
Di
s
De
Item De (mm) S (mm) Di (mm) COD. (m) (m)
MIXAL 14x2 14 2.0 10 VS0100135 100 6400
MIXAL 16x2 16 2.0 12 VS0100137 100 5600
MIXAL 16x2 16 2.0 12 VS0113005 120 6720
MIXAL 16x2 16 2.0 12 VS0113007 240 5760
MIXAL 16x2 16 2.0 12 VS0100141 500 3000
MIXAL 20x2 20 2.0 16 VS0100139 100 3200
MIXAL 20x2 20 2.0 16 VS0113009 120 3840
MIXAL 20x2 20 2.0 16 VS0113011 240 1440
MIXAL 26x3 26 3.0 20 VS0100143 50 1440
Multilayer pipe in crosslinked polyethylene with intermediate layer in aluminium.
Until stocks have nished quantity per pallet may be 4800 m.
V-ESSE insulating panel

s
L
s
1
P
H
Item S (mm) S
1
(mm) LxH (mm) P (cm) Class (kPa) Area (m
2
) COD. (m
2
)
V-ESSE20 50 20 1350x750 7.5 150 1.0125 VS0109000 12.15
V-ESSE30 60 30 1350x750 7.5 150 1.0125 VS0109001 10.12
Pocketed panel in expanded polystyrene with blue EPS film.
V-ZETA insulating panel

s
L
s
1
P
H
Item S (mm) S
1
2
) COD. (m
2
)
V-ZETA20 50 20 1200x750 7.5 200 0.9 VS0109016 10.8
Pocketed panel in expanded polystyrene.
V-ERRE insulating panel
s
L
s
1
P
H
Item S (mm) S
1
2
) COD. (m
2
)
V-ERRE10 32 10 1000x500 5 200 0.5 VS0109017 10.0
Pocketed panel in expanded polystyrene coupled to black, compact, impact-resistant, rigid PS film equipped with bosses for securing
the pipe.
12
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
V-ELLE insulating panel
H
s
P
Item S (mm) H (mm) P (cm) Class (kPa) Area (m
2
) COD. (m
2
)
V-ELLE20/200 20 1000 5 200 12 VS0109018 12.0
V-ELLE30/250 30 1000 5 250 10 VS0109019 10.0
Smooth panel in coils in expanded (V-ELLE 20/200) or extruded (V-ELLE 30/250) polystyrene with grey polyester aluminized film with
blue square for facilitating installation, class 200 kPa (V-ELLE 20/200) and class 250 kPa (V-ELLE 30/250).
V-ENNE biocompatible insulation panel
s
H
1
H
L
1
L
Item L (mm) H (mm) L
1
(mm) H
1
(mm) S (mm) Specific weight (kg/m
3
) COD. (pcs) (m
2
)
V-ELLE 1250 600 1265 615 30 240 VS0109020 5 3.75
Insulation panel made of conifer wood fibres and latex to make it impermeable to the absorption of water. It is equipped with an L-shaped
rebate for connecting the panels.
V-BAND edging strip
H
s
Item HxS (mm) COD. (m)
V-BAND 200x7 VS0109200 125
Insulating strip in white expanded polyethylene with adhesive on one side across the entire surface with protection film divided in two.
The strip is coupled with a transparent film in polyethylene with a thickness of 40 m to prevent cement seepage.
V-BAND/N biocompatible edging strip
H
s
Item L (mm) H (mm) S (mm) COD. (pcs) (m)
V-BAND/N 20 150 8 VS0109202 6 120
Biocompatible insulating strip in compact linen fibre felt. No other additional products are used in the production of the edging strip.
V-JOINT band for expansion joints
H
s
Item HxS (mm) COD. (m)
V-JOINT 200x7 VS0109201 125
Insulating strip in white expanded polyethylene with 20 mm of adhesive on one end to be used with V-JOINT/T support to be stuck to
the mushrooms on the V-ESSE panel.
Eco-friendly
Eco-friendly
13
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
V-JOINT/T profile for expansion joints

Item L (m) COD. (m)
V-JOINT/T 1.2 VS0109203 12
T-shaped profile with adhesive for securing the strip, for the V-JOINT expansion joints. Pack of 10 pieces.
V-CLIP anchor clips

Item De Pipe (mm) COD. (pcs)
V-CLIP01 14, 16, 20 VS0109400 100
Anchor clips for pipe diameters 14, 16, 20 mm to be used with V-ELLE panel.
V-CLIP anchor clips

Item De Pipe (mm) Grid wire (mm) COD. (pcs)
V-CLIP02 16, 20 35 VS0109403 25
V-CLIP03 26 35 VS0109405 25
Anchor clips for securing pipes to metal grid for use on insulating screed.
V-CLIP anchor clips

L
H
Item L (mm) H (mm) COD. (pcs)
V-CLIP04 88 28 VS0109406 100
Clips for securing anti-shrinkage metal grids to insulation panels.
V-RAIL fixing bars

P
H
I
Item De Pipe (mm) LxHxI (mm) P (cm) COD. (pcs) (m)
V-RAIL01 16 2000x25x38 5 VS0109410 32 64
V-RAIL02 20 2000x25x50 5 VS0109411 32 64
Fixing rails for pipe diameters 16 and 20 mm with adhesive strip for securing to smooth insulating panels.
14
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
Fixing screws for V-RAIL bar

L
1
L
Item L (mm) L
1
(mm) COD. (pcs)
Fixing screws for V-RAIL 29 14 VS0109409 100
Fixing screws for bars to secure V-RAIL01 and V-RAIL02 pipes to smooth panel.
V-FOIL anti-humidity film

H
L
Item H (m) L (m) COD. (m
2
)
V-FOIL 1.2 120 VS0109600 120
Anti-vapour polyethylene film, 0.2 mm thick, with 25 mm of adhesive on the end.
V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat

H
L
2
)
V-ACUSTIC 1 10 VS0109601 10
V-ACUSTIC allows foot-traffic noise to be reduced by 28 dB (in compliance with EN 12354-2) thanks to a dynamic rigidity of 21 MN/m
3
.
It is a multilayer mat that also acts as a barrier to humidity with a thickness of 8 mm that, after been laid, falls to 6 mm. The bottom layer
is made of white felt, which, thanks to the Velcro effect, prevents movement during installation. The mat must be laid with the use of
the special waterproof strip.
V-ACUSTIC/N biocompatible soundproof mat

H
L
2
)
V-ACUSTIC/N 1 30 VS0109602 30
V-ACUSTIC/N allows a reduction in foot-traffic noise of approximately 14-17 dB with a dynamic rigidity of about 55 MN/m
3
. This mat is
made of compact linen fibre felt with a thickness of 5 mm. No other products are employed in the production of this mat. The linen fibre
creates a Velcro effect with the underlying rough floor that prevents it moving during installation.
Adhesive tape for V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat
H (mm) L (mm) COD. (pcs)
50 50 VS0109900 1
Water proof gaffer tape for installation of V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat.
L
W
= 28 dB(A)
Eco-friendly
15
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
V-FLUID concrete fluidizer

Item COD. (kg)
V-FLUID VS0109800 10
This additive permits improved concrete flow with less water. Optimises the covering of loops during installation.
Distribution manifold

d
D
D
L
I
Outlets D (inch) d (inchxmm) I (mm) L (mm) COD. (pcs)
2 G11/4 G3/4x18 214 190 VS0110102 1
3 G11/4 G3/4x18 214 240 VS0110103 1
4 G11/4 G3/4x18 214 290 VS0110104 1
5 G11/4 G3/4x18 214 340 VS0110105 1
6 G11/4 G3/4x18 214 390 VS0110106 1
7 G11/4 G3/4x18 214 440 VS0110107 1
8 G11/4 G3/4x18 214 490 VS0110108 1
9 G11/4 G3/4x18 214 540 VS0110109 1
10 G11/4 G3/4x18 214 590 VS0110110 1
11 G11/4 G3/4x18 214 640 VS0110111 1
12 G11/4 G3/4x18 214 690 VS0110112 1
Pre-assembled manifold for radiant panel systems complete with lockshield valves, valves with motor option (by means of thermoelectric
heads supplied separately), flow meters (0.5-3.0 l/min), 11/4 tailpieces, compact terminal sets with thermometer, adjustment hexagonal
key and fixing brackets for encased cabinet.
Kit for increasing manifold outlets

D D
D D
LL
d
Outlets D (inch) d (inchxmm) L (mm) COD. (pcs)
2 G11/4 G3/4x18 168 VS0110022 1
The package contains a supply manifold and a return manifold.
Pre-assembled kit for adding two extra outlets to a manifold for radiant panel systems. The kit includes two 2-outlet manifolds with
lockshield valves on the supply, valves with motor option (by means of thermoelectric heads supplied separately) on the return, flow
meters (0.5-3.0 l/min), 11/4 tailpieces, and 11/4 nipples for connection to the existing manifold, adjustment hexagonal key and two
11/4 flat seals.
16
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
Distribution manifold
for high temperature circuits

D
L
D
L
H
d
Outlets D (inch) d (inchxmm) H (mm) L (mm) kg COD. (pcs)
2 G3/4 G3/4x18 87 155 1.95 VS0110020 1
3 G3/4 G3/4x18 87 205 2.59 VS0110021 1
The package contains a supply manifold and a return manifold.
Distribution manifold for high-temperature circuits. Used for supplying bathroom radiators or additional radiators in a floor heating
system. (To be used with mixing kit).
Pair of compact terminal sets
for distribution manifold

L
D
M
e
d
D (inch) L (mm) M (mm) e (mm) d (mm) COD. (pcs)
G11/4 64.2 61 7 14.5 VS0110026 1 pair
The package contains two compact terminal sets complete with drainage valves, manual air vent and thermometers.
Pair of straight interception valves

L
H
D
2
D
1
A
D
1
(inch) D
2
(inch) A (mm) L (mm) H (mm) COD. (pcs)
G11/4 G11/4 71 65 55.7 VS0110034 1 pair
The package contains two straight valves: a red one for the supply and a blue one for the return.
Pair of elbow interception valves

D
2
D
1
L
H A
D
1
(inch) D
2
(inch) A (mm) L (mm) H (mm) COD. (pcs)
G11/4 G11/4 36 65 55.7 VS0110033 1 pair
The package contains two elbow valves: a red one for supply and a blue one for return.
17
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
Nut-ring-insert for distribution manifold

D (inchxmm) Pipe (mmxmm) COD. (pcs)
G3/4x18 14x2 VS0110035 10
G3/4x18 16x2 VS0110036 10
G3/4x18 20x2 VS0110037 10
Fitting for connection of MIXAL pipes to distribution manifolds.
Plug for distribution manifold

D (inchxmm) COD. (pcs)
G3/4x18 VS0110040 10
Plug for distribution manifold outlets.
Pair of tailpieces for distribution manifold
L
D
2
D
1
D
1
(inch) D
2
(inch) L (mm) COD. (pcs)
G11/4 G11/4 47 VS0110041 1 pair
The package contains two tailpieces complete with flat seal for coupling with compact valves code VS0110033 and VS0110034 and
the distribution manifold.
Pair of adaptors for distribution manifold
D
1
D
2
L
D
1
(inch) D
2
(inch) L (mm) COD. (pcs)
G11/4 G11/4 39 VS0110042 1 pair
The package contains two adaptors complete with o-ring for coupling of two distribution manifold.
Flow meter for distribution manifold

D (inch x mm) Flow rate (l/m) COD. (pcs)
G3/4x18 0.53.0 VS0110049 10
Flow meter to be connected to distribution manifold (return side).
18
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
Mixing kit V-MIX01/PF and V-MIX01/PV
Model Adjustment D
1
(inch) D
2
(inch) L (mm) H (mm) I (mm) COD. (pcs)
V-MIX01/PF Fixed point G1 11/4 345 335 214 VS0110301 1
V-MIX01/PV Variable point G1 11/4 335 350 214 VS0110302 1
V-MIX01/PF: fixed point mixing kit with three-speed pump (head of 4 m, 5 m, 6 m), three-way valve, by-pass with adjustable differential valve, supply and return thermometer, safety thermostat and
thermostatic head with liquid sensor.
V-MIX01/PV: variable point mixing kit with three-speed pump (head of 4 m, 5 m, 6 m), three-way valve, by-pass with adjustable differential valve, supply and return thermometer, safety thermostat
and thermostatic head with liquid sensor.
V-MIX02 fixed point mixing kit
D
1
(inch) D
2
(inch) L (mm) H (mm) I (mm) COD. (pcs)
G3/4 11/4 280 344 214 VS0110303 1
Fixed point mixing kit complete with thermostatic head equipped with three-speed pump (head of 4 m, 5 m, 6 m), thermometer on supply and return, lockshield valve on outlet of primary circuit,
pre-adjusted safety by-pass and no-return valve.
In-wall V-BOX distribution and mixing modules
for constant temperatur

D
1
(inch) D
2
(inch) HxLxP (mmxmmxmm) Exit 1 Exit 2 Exit 3 Adjustment COD. (pcs)
G3/4 G3/4 690x595x190 High temperature Low temperature - Fixed point VS0110311 1
G3/4 G3/4 690x595x190 High temperature Low temperature Low temperature Fixed point VS0110331 1
G3/4 G3/4 690x595x190 Low temperature Low temperature Low temperature Fixed point VS0110352 1
Compact distribution module, encased version, for high and low temperature circuits with fixed point mixing valve. Available for supplying two or three zones one of which is high temperature for
supplying radiators. They are supplied complete with a painted steel cabinet, expanded polypropylene insulation, manifold with hydraulic compensator incorporated, three-speed circulators with 5 m
head, compact interception valves, adjustment thermostatic heads and safety thermostat. The module has three different possibilities of connection to the boiler.
Article not in stock, must be ordered specially.
D
2
D
1
D
1
L
I
D
2
H
D
2
L
D
1
I
H
D
2
D
1
H
L
D
1
D
2
PF PV
19
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
In-wall V-BOX distribution and mixing modules
for variable temperature

D
1
(inch) D
2
G3/4 G3/4 690x595x190 High temperature Low temperature - Variable point VS0110321 1
G3/4 G3/4 595x690x190 High temperature Low temperature Low temperature Variable point VS0110341 1
G3/4 G3/4 690x595x190 Low temperature Low temperature Low temperature Variable point VS0110353 1
Compact distribution module, encased version, for high and low temperature circuits, with variable point valve with motor option . Available for supplying two or three zones one of which is high
temperature for supplying radiators. Supplied complete with painted steel cabinet, expanded polypropylene insulation, manifold with hydraulic compensator incorporated, three-speed circulators with
5 m head, compact interception valves, adjustment thermostatic heads and safety thermostat. The module has three different possibilities of connection to the boiler.
The motor to be applied to the mixing valve (not included) is code VS0110701.
Wall-hanging V-BOX distribution and mixing
modules for constant temperature

D
1
(inch) D
2
G3/4 G3/4 590x490x190 High temperature Low temperature - Fixed point VS0110312 1
G3/4 G3/4 590x490x190 High temperature Low temperature Low temperature Fixed point VS0110332 1
G3/4 G3/4 590x490x190 Low temperature Low temperature Low temperature Fixed point VS0110355 1
Compact distribution module, wall-hung version, for high and low temperature circuits with fixed point mixing valve. Available for supplying two or three zones one of which is high temperature for
supplying radiators. Supplied complete with painted steel cabinet, expanded polypropylene insulation , manifold with hydraulic compensator incorporated, three-speed circulators with head of up to
5 m, compact interception valves, adjustment thermostatic heads and safety thermostat. Complete with protective cover in painted steel.
Wall-hanging V-BOX distribution and mixing
modules for variable temperature

D
1
(inch) D
2
G3/4 G3/4 590x490x190 High temperature Low temperature - Variable point VS0110322 1
G3/4 G3/4 590x490x190 High temperature Low temperature Low temperature Variable point VS0110342 1
Compact distribution module, encased version for high and low temperature circuits with variable point valve with motor option. Available for supplying two or three zones one of which is high
temperature for supplying radiators. Supplied complete with painted steel cabinet, expanded polypropylene insulation, manifold with hydraulic compensator incorporated, three-speed circulators with
5 m head, compact interception valves, adjustment thermostatic heads and safety thermostat. The module has three different possibilities of connection to the boiler.
The motor to be applied to the mixing valve (not included) is code VS0110701.
H
L
D
1
D
2
H
L
D
1
D
2
H
L
D
1
D
2
20
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
Mixing sets for fixed point
central heating systems

DN D
1
(inch) D
2
(inch) HxLxP (mmxmmxmm) COD. (pcs)
25 11/2 1 394x250x188 VS0110802 1
Set with fixed point mixing valve with thermostatic option* with by-pass on secondary and primary circuit. The set is complete with three-speed circulator with maximum head of 6 m, insulation in
expanded polypropylene, interception valves with integrated thermometer on supply and return and thermostatic head with liquid sensor (code VS0110405). Possibility of changing supply from right
to left with possibility of installation of a differential pressure group.
Thermal power plants mixing groups
with variable temperature

DN D
1
(inch) D
2
(inch) HxLxP (mmxmmxmm) COD. (pcs)
25 G1 G11/2 394x250x188 VS0110803 1
32 G11/4 G2 483x265x120 VS0110809 1
40 G11/2 DN 40 615x320x200 VS0110815 1
Flange DN 40 PN 6 with 4 holes.
Group with variable point mixing valve with motor capacity with a by-pass on the secondary and primary. The group is complete with three speed circulator with maximum predominance 6 m,
insulation in expanded polypropylene, interception valves with thermometer integrated on the supply and return. Possibility of changing supply from right to left with possibility of installing a differential
pressure group.
The motor to apply to the mixing valve (not included) is code number VS0110701.
High temperature groups
for thermal power plants

DN D
1
(inch) D
2
(inch) HxLxP (mmxmmxmm) COD.
(pcs)
25 G1 G11/2 394x250x188 VS0110801 1
32 G11/4 G2 483x265x120 VS0110807 1
40 G11/2 DN 40 615x320x200 VS0110813 1
Group for high temperature circuits complete with three speed circulator with maximum predominance 6 m, insulation in expanded polypropylene, interception valves wit thermometer integrated on
the supply and return.
P
L
D
2
D
1
H
H
p
L
D
2
D
1
H
p
L
D
2
D
1
21
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
Distribution manifold for thermal power plants
DN D
1
(inch) D
2
(inch) Exits HxLxP (mmxmmxmm) COD. (pcs)
25 G11/2 G11/2 2 120x505x120 VS0110821 1
25 G11/2 G11/2 3 120x755x120 VS0110823 1
25 G11/2 G11/2 4 120x1005x120 VS0110824 1
25 G11/2 G11/2 5 120x1255x120 VS0110825 1
32 G11/2 G2 2 150x530x150 VS0110831 1
32 G11/2 G2 3 150x795x150 VS0110833 1
32 G11/2 G2 4 150x1060x150 VS0110834 1
32 G11/2 G2 5 150x1325x150 VS0110835 1
40 DN 65 DN 65 3 220x1020x220 VS0110843 1
40 DN 65 DN 65 4 220x1340x220 VS0110845 1
Without compact interception valves (code VS0110869).
Distribution manifolds for heat centres complete with insulation in expanded polypropylene with compact interception valves on the supply and return connections to the mixing and distribution
group.
Compact interception valves kit
with nut DN 32
DN D
1
(inch) D
2
(inch) COD. (pcs)
32 G11/2 G2 VS0110869 1
Hydraulic separator for distribution manifold
DN D (inch) D
1
(inch) D
2
(inch) HxLxP (mmxmmxmm) COD.
(pcs)
25 G11/2 G1/2 G3/4 520x120x120 VS0110851 1
32 G11/2 G1/2 G11/4 970x150x150 VS0110853 1
40 DN 65 G1/2 G11/4 970x220x220 VS0110855 1
Hydraulic separator complete with insulation in expanded polypropylene with threaded attachments for air vent groups and for system drainage.
D
2
D
1
H
L
D
1
D
D
D
D
1
D
2
H
L
22
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
Manifold/hydraulic separator connection kit
DN Manifold exits COD. (pcs)
25 2 VS0110871 1
25 3 VS0110873 1
25 4 VS0110874 1
25 5 VS0110875 1
32 2 VS0110881 1
32 3 VS0110883 1
32 4 VS0110884 1
32 5 VS0110885 1
40 34 VS0110891 1
Supply/return pipes insulated for connection of the distribution manifold to the vertical hydraulic separator.
Support kit for manifold

DN COD. (pcs)
25-32 VS0112021 1
40 VS0112023 1
The kit contains a pair of supports for fixing the manifold to the wall. The kit DN 40 is composed of small support feet, adjustable in
height.
Differential pressure group

DN COD. (pz)
25 VS0110861 1
32 VS0110863 1
Differential group composed of 3/4 valve with measurement field of 2 to 6.5 m.w.c. (maximum operating pressure 8 bar), fittings and seals.
Servo motors for mixing valve
Nominal voltage Power consumption Torque Running time COD. (pz)
230 Vac 2.5 W 5 Nm 140 s VS0110701 1
24 Vdc 1.5 W 5 Nm 140 s VS0110703 1
Servo motors with 3 point regulation system and 220V supply. It is complete with graded scale for the identification of the position and selector for changing the automatic/manual function. It is
mounted by means of a blocking screw and a anti-rotation reference rod.
Servo motors 010 V complete with graded scale for the identification of the position and selector for changing the automatic/manual function. It is mounted by means of a blocking screw and
a anti-rotation reference rod.
23
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
V-DRYAIR 250V isotherm dehumidifier for wall installation

Item Nominal flow Water flow Voltage HxLxP (mmxmmxmm) COD. (pcs)
V-DRYAIR 250V 250 m
3
/h 170 l/h 230 729x705x212 VS0110901 1
Isotherm in-wall recessed dehumidifier. V-DRYAIR 250V is used for the dehumidification in the summer of rooms that are cooled wit the use of radiant panels. The load-bearing structure is in
galvanized sheet metal and the ventilation part is made up of a centrifugal ventilator and a motor with the choice of three speeds that guarantees efficiency and a silent operation. Air treatment is
ensured by a refrigeration circuit composed of pre-treatment and post-treatment batteries in copper pipes and aluminium fins, an alternative compressor mounted on anti-vibration supports or springs,
expansion capillary and dehydrator filter.
For in-wall installation it must be combined with the housing cabinet and wooden panel cod. VSO110911.
V-DRYAIR 250H isotherm dehumidifier for ceiling installation
with possibility of ducting

V-DRYAIR 250H 250 m
3
/h 170 l/h 230 250x593x800 VS0110903 1
Isotherm dehumidifier for ceiling installation with possibility of ducting for air delivery and return. V-DRYAIR 250H is used for the dehumidification in the summer of rooms that are cooled wit the use
of radiant panels. The load-bearing structure is in galvanized sheet metal and the ventilation part is made up of a centrifugal ventilator and a motor with the choice of three speeds that guarantees
efficiency and a silent operation. Air treatment is ensured by a refrigeration circuit composed of pre-treatment and post-treatment batteries in copper pipes and aluminium fins, an alternative
compressor mounted on anti-vibration supports or springs, expansion capillary and dehydrator filter.
V-DRYAIR 450H isotherm dehumidifiers for ceiling installation

V-DRYAIR 450H 450 m
3
/h 350 l/h 230 405x875x655 VS0110905 1
Can be combined with renewal and recovery unit cod. VS0110913 and plenum chamber cod. VS01109015.
24
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
V-DRYAIR 900H isotherm dehumidifiers for ceiling installation

V-DRYAIR 900H 900 m
3
/h 600 l/h 230 405x875x805 VS0110907 1
Can be connected to the renewal and recovery unit cod. VS0110917 and plenum chamber cod. VS01109019.
CHousing cabinet and wooden covering panel for
V-DRYAIR 250V

HxLxP (mmxmmxmm) COD. (pcs)
740x750x230 VS0110911 1
The housing cabinet is installed in the wall recess and houses the V-DRYAIR 250 V dehumidifier (cod. VS0110901); the base of the cabinet is perforated to allow passage of supply and return pipes,
of pipes for the discharge of condensation and the electrical wires. The covering panel is made of white lacquered wood with air delivery and inhalation grid.
Renewal and recovery unit for V-DRYAIR 450H
isotherm dehumidifiers

Maximum input current Maximum input power Voltage HxLxP (mmxmmxmm) COD. (pcs)
0.7 A 60 W 230 Vca 405x750x655 VS0110913 1
The renewal and recovery unit guarantees a fresh air exchange inside the building by recovering the heat being discharged which is then exchanged with fresh air from the outside; this process is
created by intersecting the air flows, so that the process air is preheated/pre-cooled, thus increasing the efficiency of the unit and reducing energy consumption.
25
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
Plenum chamber for V-DRYAIR 450H isotherm dehumidifier

405x220x655 VS0110915 1
The plenum chamber is hooked up to the main recovery duct of the V-DRYAIR 450H isotherm dehumidifier and allows an increase in the ducts of up to maximum number of three, contemporarily.
It has been designed so that all the panels can be dismantled in order to create the most suitable configuration for the system.
Renewal and recovery modules for V-DRYAIR 900H
isotherm dehumidifier

Maximum input current Maximum input power Voltage HxLxP (mmxmmxmm) COD. (pcs)
1.5 A 150 W 230 Vca 405x1050x805 VS0110917 1
The renewal and recovery unit guarantees a fresh air exchange inside the building by recovering the heat being discharged which is then exchanged with fresh air from the outside; this process is
created by intersecting the air flows, so that the process air is preheated/pre-cooled, thus increasing the efficiency of the unit and reducing energy consumption.
Plenum chamber for V-DRYAIR 450H isotherm dehumidifier

405x220x655 VS0110919 1
The plenum chamber is hooked up to the main recovery duct of the V-DRYAIR 900H isotherm dehumidifier and allows an increase in the ducts of up to a maximum number of three, contemporarily.
It has been designed so that all the panels can be dismantled in order to create the most suitable configuration for the system.
Thermo-electric head
D (mmxmm) Measuring fields A (mm) B (mm) L (mm) d (mm) COD. (pcs)
M28x1.5 3050 C 52 81.5 160 11 VS0110405 1
Thermostatic head with immersion sensor for mixing kit.
A
B
L
d
26
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
Thermo-electric head

Working frequency no. connections COD. (pcs)
24 V 2 wires VS0110430 1
220 V 4 wires VS0110432 1
On/off thermoelectric heads with adaptor for distribution manifold. They regulate the flow in floor heating circuits. They are applied to
the distribution manifolds (return side).
Can be used only with the control unit code VS0110600 and VS0110605.
Can be used with a direct connection to the zone thermostats (on/off signal) and to the electric line 220 V.
Circuit control unit

Zones Max circuits Working frequency COD. (pcs)
1 4 24 V VS0110600 1
6 14 24 V VS0110605 1
Control unit of heating circuits. It is the command box of the thermo-electric heads, which operates depending on the temperature
picked up by the thermostats.
Mixing kit pump control module

Zones Working frequency COD. (pcs)
2 24 V VS0110610 1
Module for increasing the number of zones controlled per control unit cod. VS0110600 and cod. VS0110605.
Working frequency COD. (pcs)
24 V VS0110620 1
Module turns off the circulator pump when all the circuits are closed, to avoid activating the safety by-pass of the mixing kit.
Regulators for mixing groups for central heating systems

Working frequency No. of inlets No. of relay outlets COD. (pcs)
24-220 V 2 2 VS0111101 1
Electronic control that can be mounted with a DIN guide capable of managing 1 three-way valve. Regulates the opening of the valve in
order to supply water to the system based on the programmed set point. 2 inlets for NTC probes for detecting the temperature (code
VS0110057) are available, as well as 2 relay outlets for controlling the servomotor 220 V (code VS0110701).
27
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
V-CLIMA master adjustment kit
Function Working frequency Working conditions Dimensions of master control unit COD. (pz)
Heating and cooling
20/60 Vdc and 24 Vac
(5060 Hz)
-10C60C/U.R. < 90% 140x60x110 VS0111001 1
Heating only
(5060 Hz)
-10C60C/U.R. < 90% 140x60x110 VS0111011 1
The V-CLIMA master adjustment kit is capable of adjusting the supply temperature of a floor heating system for one zone in relation to the variations in the external temperature. With the kit code
VS0111001 the adjustment is made both in the winter mode (heating) and the summer mode (cooling), with the kit code VS0111011 the adjustment occurs in the winter mode. Possibility of
management of up to 6 adjustment zones by means of the addition of expansion kit. The V-CLIMA master adjustment kit is complete with master unit with built-in terminal, connection kit, timer, supply
probe, room temperature/humidity probe (or just temperature probe) and external temperature probe.
V-CLIMA expansion
Function Working frequency Working conditions Dimensions of expansion (mm) COD. (pz)
Heating and cooling
(5060 Hz)
-10C60C/U.R. < 90% 70x60x110 VS0111003 1
Heating only
(5060 Hz)
-10C60C/U.R. < 90% 70x60x110 VS0111013 1
Expansion module capable of adjusting the supply temperature of a floor heating system for one zone in relation to the variations in the external temperature. With the kit code VS0111003 adjustment
is made both in the winter mode (heating) and the summer mode (cooling), with the kit code VS0111013 adjustment occurs in the winter mode only. The V-CLIMA expansion kit is composed of an
expansion unit to be connected to the master module, a connection kit, supply probe and temperature/humidity room probe (or just temperature probe).
V-CLIMA winter/summer converter
Working frequency Working conditions Dimensions of converter (mm) COD. (pcs)
24 Vac (5-60 Hz) 0-50 C / U.R. < 90% 87x36x60 VS0111065 1
Transforming module that when connected to the V-CLIMA system is capable of activating the flow deviation valves on the supply of the floor heating system, opening the boiler circuit or the chilling
circuit.
28
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
V-CLIMA remote adjustment terminal
Working frequency Working conditions Dimensions of terminal (mm) COD. (pcs)
Supply through master unit or else by
means of an external supplier 18/30 Vdc
-20C60C/U.R. < 90% 156x82x30 VS0111051 1
The remote terminal with LCD display allows the user to carry out all of the system adjustments and the maintenance technician to verify, test and set the operation parameters of the system.
It is equipped with the function time bands, the passage from day mode to night mode of the heating system.
Supply probe for the V-CLIMA system
Function Working range Bulb dimensions (mm) COD. (pcs)
Temperature probe -50C105C 60x40 VS0111057 1
Supply probe (NTC type) to interface with V-CLIMA system for the measurement of the supply temperature to the system.
Room probe for V-CLIMA system
Function Working range Supply voltage COD. (pcs)
Temperature/humidity probe 0C50C/U.R. 0100% 9/30 Vdc and 12/24 Vac VS0111058 1
Temperature probe 0C50C 9/30 Vdc and 12/24 Vac VS0111060 1
Temperature detection probe (NTC type) and room humidity probe (0-1 V type convertible 4-20 mA).
External probe for V-CLIMA system
Function Working range Supply voltage COD. (pcs)
Temperature probe -30C50C/U.R. 0100% 9/30 Vdc and 12/24 Vac VS0111059 1
External temperature detection probe (NTC type).
29
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
Fixer for clips
COD. (pcs)
VS0112000 1
Fixer for clips cod. VS0109400 for anchoring MIXAL pipe to V-ELLE panel.
Pipe unwinder

COD. (pcs)
VS0112002 1
Antishrinkage net
LxHxm (mmxmmxmm) Wire (mm) COD. (m
2
)
2000x1000x50 2 VS0109700 400
Anti-shrinkage grid in sheets, in galvanised steel for impact-resistant reinforced structures.
Polypropylene anti-shrinkage grid
LxHxm (mxmmxmm) COD. (m
2
)
50x1000x50 VS0109701 2
Anti-shrinkage grid in rolls, in high-resistant polypropylene for impact-resistant reinforced structures.
In-wall metal cabinet for distribution manifold

L (mm) H (mm) S (mm) COD. (pcs)
400 700820 80130 VS0112007 1
600 700820 80130 VS0112008 1
800 700820 80130 VS0112009 1
1000 700820 80130 VS0112010 1
1200 700820 80130 VS0112011 1
In-wall cabinet for mixing kit and distribution manifold, adjustable in height and depth. In powder coated steel and complete with
support feet.
L
H
m
H
p
30
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
2
3 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE COMPONENTS
3.1 PEXAL and MIXAL pipe
3.1.1 General characteristics
Valsir has chosen to use the PEXAL and MIXAL pipes for floor heating systems due to their excellent thermo-mechanical properties.
The PEXAL and MIXAL pipes are characterised by a particular multilayer structure which distinguishes itself from other pipes used in floor
heating systems in that it possesses an inner layer in aluminium which is completely wrapped around the pipe and makes it perfectly
oxygen proof. The multilayer pipe offers all the typical advantages of a metal pipe as well as those of a plastic pipe and at the same time,
the qualities of one material compensate for the inadequacies of the other. The negative aspects of metal, such as corrosion, toxicity,
encrustations, rigidity, weight and elevated pressure loss, are neutralised by the crosslinked polyethylene, which is in contact with the fluid
transported in the pipe. The negative aspects of plastic, such as the passage of gas, the sensitivity to UV rays, and the elevated thermal
expansion are all overcome thanks to the layer in aluminium.
The MIXAL pipe is the most suitable solution for the creation of floor heating systems both in civil and industrial applications.
Its structure is composed of:
an outer layer in high-density polyethylene HDPE, white in colour, RAL 9003,
an intermediate layer of aluminium alloy, butt-welded in an axial direction,
two binding layers of adhesive, which unite the intermediate metal layers to the outer and inner layers of plastic,
an inner layer of crosslinked polyethylene PE-Xb.
Figure 3.1.1 Multilayer structure of MIXAL pipe.
31
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
The PEXAL pipe is mainly employed in water supply applications and for the creation of heating plants thanks to its structure composition:
an outer layer of crosslinked polyethylene PE-Xb, white in colour, RAL 9003,
an intermediate layer of aluminium alloy, butt-welded in an axial direction,
two binding layers of adhesive unite the intermediate metal layer to the outer and inner layers of plastic,
an inner layer of crosslinked polyethylene PE-Xb.
Figure 3.1.2 Multilayer structure of PEXAL pipe.
The dimensional characteristics are indicated in the following table.

Table 3.1.1 Characteristics of the MIXAL pipe for floor heating systems.
Characteristic MIXAL
External diameter mm 14 16 20 26
Total thickness mm 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0
Thickness of aluminium layer mm 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.3
Weight g/m 100 105 140 50
Water capacity l/m 0.077 0.113 0.201 0.314
Operating temperature C 080 080 080 080
Maximum operating temperature C 95 95 95 95
Maximum operating pressure at 95C bar 10 10 10 10
Thermal expansion coefficient mm/mK 0.026 0.026 0.026 0.026
Internal heat conductivity W/mK 0.42 0.43 0.43 0.42
Internal roughness mm 0.007 0.007 0.007 0.007
Oxygen diffusion mg/l 0 0 0 0
Bending radius without pipe bender mm 70 80 100 140
Bending radius with pipe bender mm 35 50 80 100
32
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.1.2 Characteristics of crosslinked polyethylene PE-Xb
Crosslinked polyethylene PE-Xb has excellent mechanical characteristics in comparison with normal high-density polyethylene. The elevated
stability of its mechanical properties, even at high temperatures, make it an absolutely ideal material for use in heating applications where
the fluid conveyed can reach elevated temperatures. These characteristics are generated by the crosslinking process during which the
material undergoes a structural modification, which improves its mechanical resistance, its resistance to abrasion and its resistance to
chemical agents.
Table 3.1.2 Some characteristics of crosslinked polyethylene PE-Xb.
Characteristic Measurement unit Value
Density kg/m
3
950
Minimum degree of crosslinking % 65
Softening temperature C 135
Tensile strength at 23C MPa 23
Tensile strength at 100C MPa 9
Thermal conductivity coefficient W/mK 0.38
Specific heat at 23C kJ/kgK 1.92
Coefficient of linear expansion mm/mK 0.2
3.1.3 Characteristics of aluminium
The aluminium used in the production of the PEXAL and MIXAL multilayer pipes is composed of sheets of aluminium alloy. The sheet is
formed around the layer of PE-X and the two extremities, which run along the length of the pipe, are butt welded with a TIG welding process
(Tungsten Inert Gas).
This technology enables the production of multilayer pipes with an aluminium thickness of 0.2 mm to 2.5 mm and, therefore, also large
diameter pipes with an elevated aluminium thickness. The principal characteristics of the aluminium alloy utilised in the production of the
multilayer pipe are good welding, elevated yield point, storage in dry areas to guarantee the perfect conservation of the aluminium.
Figure 3.1.3 Aluminium layer in PEXAL and MIXAL pipes.
3.1.4 Mechanical behaviour
The mechanical characteristics of the multilayer pipe make it ideal for use in floor heating systems. There is no spring-back, that is, once
the pipe has been bent it maintains the circular section in proximity to the bend and remains in the desired position like a metal pipe; in this
way, the applications of fixing clips that are normally used with all-plastic pipes, is considerably reduced.
33
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.1.5 Expansion
The heat expansion of PEXAL and MIXAL multilayer pipes is 0.026 mm/mK; this value is comparable to the heat expansion of metal pipes.
The table below shows how all-plastic pipes have much higher expansion coefficients and, in particular, PE-X has an expansion coefficient
of 0.20 mm/mK.
Table 3.1.3 Comparison of heat expansion with other materials.
Type of material Heat expansion mm/mK
PEXAL/MIXAL 0.026
Galvanised steel 0.012
Stainless steel 0.016
Copper 0.016
Plastic material (PE-X, PE-HD, PB, PPR, PE-RT) 0.1200.200
3.1.6 Resistance to abrasion, encrustation and corrosion
PE-X does not corrode and its smooth surface does not favour the formation of encrustation. As it is not subject to corrosion, there is no
build-up of rust particles resulting from galvanic corrosion. Furthermore, PE-X is particularly resistant to abrasion; this is an extremely
important characteristic in the proximity of bends where the abrasive effect of fluids and the particles contained in the fluid, tends to be
greater.
3.1.7 Barrier to oxygen and UV rays
The inner layer of aluminium makes for a perfect barrier to the passage of gaseous molecules, thus avoiding every danger of corrosion
caused by the infiltration of oxygen and damages caused by exposure to UV rays. In the following table, a comparison is made between the
coefficients of oxygen transmission (Oxygen Transmission Rate) of aluminium, of the material used for the oxygen barrier (EVOH) in PE-X
pipes with EVOH, and of crosslinked polyethylene.
Figure 3.1.4 Impermeability to oxygen of the multilayer pipe and permeability of all-plastic pipes.
O
2
O
2
O
2
O
2
O
2
O
2
O
2
O
2
O
2
O
2
O
2
O
2
O
2
O
2
O
2
Table 3.1.4 Coefficient of oxygen transmission OTR.
Pipe OTR a 25C and 0% UR [cm
3
/20mmm
2
giornobar]
Aluminium 0
Barrier EVOH 0,21
PE-X 12000
The oxygen diffusion value in PEXAL and MIXAL pipes is zero thanks to the presence of the internal layer of aluminium across
the entire range of diameters and regardless of room temperature and humidity.
34
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
In PE-X pipes with barriers, the oxygen transmission coefficient OTR increases as the temperature and relative humidity rises (Figure
3.1.5 and Figure 3.1.6). Even at a temperature of 45C and with a relative humidity of 65%, the EVOH barrier has an oxygen transmission
coefficient of almost 3.0 cm
3
/20mm
2
daybar.
Many of the PEX pipes distributed today on the market, possess an oxygen barrier that is generally positioned on the outside on the pipe.
Such a layer is, therefore, significantly exposed not only to the danger of being scraped and cut but is also exposed to the negative effect
of humidity which drastically reduces the barrier.
Figure 3.1.5 Coefficient of oxygen transmission of EVOH in relation to temperature.
O
T
R

t
o

6
5
%

U
R
4.0
Temperature [C]
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
20 25 30 35 40 45 50
3.5
3.0
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 3.1.6 Coefficient of oxygen transmission of EVOH in relation to relative humidity.
80
100
60
40
20
10
8
6
4
0.1
O
T
R

t
o

2
0
C
Relative humidity UR [%]
0 20 40 60 80 100
2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
3.1.8 Lightweight
The specific weights of the materials that make up the pipe are low. A coil of 100 metres of MIXAL 16x2 weighs approximately 10.5 kg.
3.1.9 Sound absorption
The soundproof properties of the pipe are very good. The internal and external layers in polyethylene reduce noises, which are normally not
absorbed by metal pipes.
35
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.1.10 Long lasting
The PEXAL and MIXAL pipes are designed to resist a pressure of up to 10 bar with working temperatures of 95C. The crosslinked
polyethylene possesses, in fact, a very high ageing resistance. Artificial ageing tests carried out in laboratories guarantee the pipe a life of
over 50 years. At operating temperatures below 95C, the pipe can support pressures of over 10 bar without any damage being caused; at
20C it can be used at a pressure as high as 25 bar. The technical characteristics of the PEXAL and MIXAL multilayer pipes are therefore
of an elevated level, especially if they are compared with the real operating conditions of floor heating systems which, on average, operate
at temperatures of 45C and pressures which do not exceed 2-2.5 bar.
The safety margin of floor heating applications with PEXAL and MIXAL multilayer pipes is very high. With a temperature of 95C
and a safety margin of 1.5, the pipe can be used at a pressure of 10 bar. At the same temperature, therefore, if used at a
pressure of 2.5 bar, the safety coefficient increases to 6 and, obviously, increases even more if the temperature is reduced to
45C.
3.1.11 Heat conductivity
The heat conductivity of the MIXAL pipe depends on the multilayer structure of the pipe, and in particular, on the thickness and the position
of the aluminium layer. Whereas the value for PE-X pipes is 0.38 W/mK, the conductivity of the MIXAL pipes ranges from 0.42 W/mK to
0.43 W/mK (see Table 3.1.1). This difference clearly favours the use of PEXAL and MIXAL pipes for floor heating systems in that it is possible
to create systems with an optimum heat output.
3.1.12 Comparison of heat outputs of different pipes
As seen in the previous paragraph, the presence of the aluminium layer, its thickness and its particular position allow the achievement of
excellent heat conductivity properties. With the MIXAL pipe, it is possible to create floor heating systems with higher heat outputs, in fact,
the higher conductivity generates higher temperatures on the surface of the pipe than PEX pipes (see Figure 3.1.7) and this advantage is
reflected, for example, in the possibility of using relatively lower supply temperatures (see Figure 3.1.8).
Figure 3.1.7 External surface temperature of the pipe (example).
T
m
= 40C T
m
= 40C
T
de
= 36.4C T
de
= 35.7C
MIXAL Plastic pipe
Figure 3.1.8 Supply temperature (example).
T
f
= 27.3C
T
a
= 20C
T
m
= 39.3C
MIXAL Plastic pipe
concrete
T
m
= 40C
T
f
= 27.3C
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
36
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
The greater performance of the MIXAL pipe as compared with PEX pipes is evident in Figure 3.1.9 where, with equal system conditions,
greater thermal output is achieved. In the case examined, there is a increase of 2.2% in the thermal output, both with a pipe spacing of
15 cm and a pipe spacing of 22.5 cm
Figure 3.1.9 Comparison of outputs of MIXAL 16x2 pipe and PEX 16x2 pipe.
MIXAL 16x2
Thermal output 12 W/m
+2.56%
MIXAL 16x2
Thermal output 18 W/m
+2.22%
Spacing 15 cm
Spacing 22.5 cm
PEX 16x2
PEX 16x2
Thermal output 11.7 W/m
Thermal output 17.6 W/m
T
m
= 46C
v=0.11 m/s
T = 19C
T
m
= 46C
v=0.11 m/s
T = 19C
T
m
= 46C
v=0.15 m/s
T = 14.4C
T
m
= 46C
v=0.15 m/s
T = 14.4C
The considerations examined above allow us to reach a conclusion of significant importance, and that is, the possibility of using smaller
diameters than those used with all-plastic pipes. To simplify the concept, let us imagine that we need to install a floor heating circuit for a
10 m
2
room that requires a specific heat output of 80 W/m
2
. The floor is composed of a Valsir V-ESSE20 insulation panel, the layer of
concrete above the pipes is 40 mm thick and for simplicity sake, we will not take any type of floor covering into account. In the following
two tables, a comparison is made between the values of two circuits installed with a 17x2 diameter PEX pipe and a 16x2 MIXAL pipe with
two different pipe spacing values and a supply temperature of 45C.
It is evident that the flow and speed of the circuits are more or less the same and therefore, that the 16x2 diameter MIXAL pipe
can be used instead of the 17x2 diameter PEX pipe.
37
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Table 3.1.5 Comparison between PEX and MIXAL with pipe spacing of 15 cm.
Characteristics PEX 17x2 MIXAL 16x2
Pipe spacing [cm] 15 15
Supply temperature [C] 45 45
Loop lengths [m] 66.7 66.7
Temperature difference T [C] 18.6 18.8
Flow [l/h] 46.6 46.1
Velocity [m/s] 0.10 0.11
Table 3.1.6 Comparison between PEX and MIXAL pipes with a pipe spacing of 22.5 cm.
Characteristics PEX 17x2 MIXAL 16x2
Pipe spacing [cm] 22.5 22.5
Supply temperature [C] 45 45
Loop lengths [m] 44.4 44.4
Temperature difference T [C] 14.5 14.1
Flow [l/h] 61.4 60.0
Velocity [m/s] 0.13 0.15
Figure 3.1.10 Thermal output PEX 17x2 and MIXAL 16x2.
MIXAL 16x2
MIXAL 16x2
Same thermal output 12 W/m
Spacing 15 cm
Same thermal output 18 W/m
Spacing 22.5 cm
PEX 16x2
PEX 16x2
T
m
= 45C
v=0.11 m/s
T = 18.8C
T
m
= 45C
v=0.10 m/s
T = 18.6C
T
m
= 45C
v=0.15 m/s
T = 14.5C
T
m
= 45C
v=0.13 m/s
T = 14.1C
38
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.1.13 Pressure losses
The internal layer of the pipe has an extremely smooth surface with a roughness of 0.007 mm. This surface does not favour the formation
of incrustations or rust, which means that pressure loss is very low and does not alter over time. With the use of the diagrams in Figure
3.1.14, Figure 3.1.15 and Figure 3.1.16 it is possible to determine the pressure loss and flow speed in the PEXAL and MIXAL multilayer pipes
in relation to the flow rate and the temperature of the water at 10C, 30C and 50C respectively.
When dimensioning a floor heating circuit, localised pressure losses due to the continuous changes in direction of the radiant
loops must also be accounted for.
The linear pressure losses (calculated in the diagrams shown) must be increased by a percentage point, indicated in Table 3.1.7, which
depends on the type of pipe layout adopted in the system.
Table 3.1.7 Percentage increase in pressure losses in relation to the type of piping layout pattern.
Type of layout pattern Percentage increase Typical application
Simple single serpentine 17%
Industrial systems, snowmelt systems
(Figura 3.1.11)
Simple double serpentine 17%
Industrial systems, heating systems for rooms with elevated
surface areas, gymnasiums, warehouses, etc. (Figura 3.1.12)
Counterflow spiral 13% Residential systems (Figura 3.1.13)
Figure 3.1.11 Simple single serpentine. Figure 3.1.12 Simple double serpentine.
Figure 3.1.13 Counter-flow spiral.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
39
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Figure 3.1.14 Pressure losses with water at 10C.
W
a
t
e
r

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
:

1
0
C
W
a
t
e
r

f
l
o
w

r
a
t
e

[
l
/
s
]
Pressure losses [mbar/m]
0
.
1
0
.
0
8
0
.
0
6
0
.
0
4
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.01
0.008
0.006
0.004
0
.
2
0
.
4
0
.
6
0
.
8
1
2468
1
0
2
0
4
0
6
0
8
0
1
0
0
2
0
0
2
1
1
4
x
2
1
6
x
2
1
8
x
2
2
0
x
2
2
6
x
3
4
.
5
4
.
0
3
.
5
3
.
0
2
.
5
2
.
0
1
.
8
1
.
6
1
.
4
1
.
2
1
.
0
0
.
9
0
.
8
0
.
7
0
.
6
0
.
5
0
.
4
0
.
3
5
0
.
3
0
.
2
5
0
.
2
0
.
1
8
0
.
1
6
0
.
1
4
0
.
1
2
0
.
1
0
0
.
0
9
0
.
0
8
0
.
0
7
0
.
0
6
0
.
0
5
Water velocity [m/s]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
40
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
W
a
t
e
r

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
:

3
0
C
W
a
t
e
r

f
l
o
w

r
a
t
e

[
l
/
s
]
0
.
1
0
.
0
8
0
.
0
6
0
.
0
4
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.01
0.008
0.006
0.004
0
.
2
0
.
4
0
.
6
0
.
8
1
2468
1
0
2
0
4
0
6
0
8
0
1
0
0
2
0
0
2
1
1
4
x
2
1
6
x
2
1
8
x
2
2
0
x
2
2
6
x
3
4
.
5
4
.
0
3
.
5
3
.
0
2
.
5
2
.
0
1
.
8
1
.
6
1
.
4
1
.
2
1
.
0
0
.
9
0
.
8
0
.
7
0
.
6
0
.
5
0
.
4
0
.
3
5
0
.
3
0
.
2
5
0
.
2
0
,
1
8
0
.
1
6
0
.
1
4
0
.
1
2
0
.
1
0
0
.
0
9
0
.
0
8
0
.
0
7
0
.
0
6
0
.
0
5
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
41
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
W
a
t
e
r

f
l
o
w

r
a
t
e

[
l
/
s
]
2
0
.
1
0
.
0
8
0
.
0
6
0
.
0
4
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.01
0.008
0.006
0.004
0
.
2
0
.
4
0
.
6
0
.
812468
1
0
2
0
4
0
6
0
8
0
1
0
0
2
0
0
W
a
t
e
r

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
:

5
0
C
1
4
x
2
1
6
x
2
1
8
x
2
2
0
x
2
2
6
x
3
4
.
5
4
.
0
3
.
5
3
.
0
2
.
5
2
.
0
1
.
8
1
.
6
1
.
4
1
.
2
1
.
0
0
.
9
0
.
8
0
.
7
0
.
6
0
.
5
0
.
4
0
.
3
5
0
.
3
0
.
2
5
0
.
2
0
.
1
8
0
.
1
6
0
.
1
4
0
.
1
2
0
.
1
0
0
.
0
9
0
.
0
8
0
.
0
7
0
.
0
6
0
.
0
5
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
42
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.1.14 Quality control
In the Valsir factories, the entire production process of the multilayer pipe undergoes continuous and strict quality controls. As well as the
numerous tests requested by the protocols published by the most important international certification institutes, Valsir also carries out
important tests of a high qualitative value on its products. The following paragraphs illustrate some of the tests carried out on the PEXAL
and MIXAL multilayer pipes.
1. Dimensional aspect
The principle test performed on the multilayer pipe by the Valsir quality control team
is to measure the diameters and the thickness of the individual layers; this test is
performed in the laboratory with the help of the most technologically advanced optical
measurement equipment, complete with software capable of automatically carrying out
the dimensional tests (the dimensions of the pipe are tested in the process using laser
detectors). The sophisticated optical projector also enables the weld cross-section to be
checked and therefore to verify that the weld has been correctly performed.
2. Separation test
Of equal importance is the separation test; this is performed using a computerised
dynamometer capable of assessing the force required to separate the aluminium layer
from the internal pipe (glued together). As a result, the test provides a graph describing
the value of the force (at every point on the pipes circumference) to be applied to
separate the layers. The adhesion between the PEX and the aluminium is fundamental
for the seal of a multilayer pipe under pressure: the greater the adhesive strength, the
greater the pressure the product can undergo.
3. Bending test
The 90 bending test is one of the mechanical tests performed on the PEXAL pipe.
This test is performed using a dynamometer that records the force required for bending.
The test is passed if no squeezing or wrinkling of the external layer occurs on the test
specimen.
4. Estimation of the degree of crosslinking
The finished PEXAL and MIXAL multilayer pipe (which has already completed the
crosslinking process) is subjected to a test that measures the degree of cross-linking
achieved by the polymeric materials. The testing procedures are defined by international
standards and are strictly followed by the operators assigned to perform the test; the
degree of crosslinking of the polymers is used to assess the aggregation of the materials
molecules and it is therefore important for assessing the increase in the mechanical and
chemical resistance of the polyethylene.
5. Pressure test
Samples of the pipe are taken (at pre-established intervals) during the daily production of
the PEXAL product. The samples are used to perform hydraulic tests at different pressures
and at different temperatures. The tests are designed to determine whether the product
is suitable for sale and to assess the products hydraulic, mechanical and structural
characteristics. The tests are performed in suitable tanks or ovens at an electronically
controlled temperature. The pressure values set at the entry of each individual test specimen
and the test conditions are controlled and recorded at every moment by a computerised
system and have been established during the certification phase of the product.
43
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
6. Long duration tests
The long duration tests are carried out to confirm the reliability of the product over time.
In fact, they are carried out for 1000 hours both at 95C in special tanks, and at 110C
in special ovens.
7. Cone test
Samples of PEXAL and MIXAL pipe taken during the production phase at regular intervals
undergo the cone test; this test is performed in compliance with international standards,
and is carried out on-line by the production operators and in the laboratory by the Quality
operators (in this case the test is performed using a computerised dynamometer); this
test is designed to assess the seal of the weld and the sealing strength of the glue
applied between the various layers, after having expanded the pipe by more than 13%
of its nominal diameter.
8. Dimensional test during production
The diameters of the pipe are constantly monitored by laser instruments during the
production of the PEXAL and MIXAL pipes, supported by a computerised system in the
successive phases of the manufacturing process. In this way the production operators
are able to observe the trend graphs of the individual diameters on the line monitors at
every moment. Appropriate alarms are activated when the values are outside the pre-
established range.
9. Tensile test
The fundamental raw material for the production of the PEXAL and MIXAL pipes is
aluminium; in order to avoid defects in the supply of this material (even with top quality
suppliers) Valsir carries out tests on each consignment by measuring the dimensions
and mechanical characteristics; the mechanical properties are verified by carrying out
tensile tests (established by international standards) on samples of material randomly
selected from the batch that has been delivered; the tests are carried out with the use
of sophisticated computerised dynamometrical instruments.
10. Analysis of melt flow index
All of the polymerical raw materials utilised in the manufacture of the multilayer pipe
are controlled on arrival in order to verify their principal characterisitcs; this allows
Valsir to produce with the certainty of employing materials suitable for manufacturing.
The instruments utilised for the controls are the most technogically advanced: for
example, the melt flow index measurement is taken with the use of the most up-to-date
automatic appliances.
44
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
11. Heat resistance test
The controls carried out by the Valsir quality control laboratories on the polymerical
materials employed in the production of the PEXAL and MIXAL pipes, do not end with
the controls carried out on in-coming materials, but continue after the production phase.
The shrinkage and sliding test are carried out on the finished product on the various
layers of polyethylene; pieces of pipe undergo artificial ageing tests and thermal stress
tests in thermostatic cells.
12. Suitability of internal diameter (marble test)
Along the production line every coil of PEXAL and MIXAL multilayer product is tested by
inserting a steel marble into the pipe that is then pushed into the same with the use of
compressed air. This operation ensures that there are no collapses or obstacles within
the pipe.
13. Pipe hammer
At each production start-up of the PEXAL and MIXAL multilayer pipes and the plastic
fittings in PPSU (Polyphenyl Sulfone) a pressure cycle test is performed at 23C.
This consists of creating sudden pressure changes (frequency = 30 cycles per minute)
inside the test specimen ranging from the lowest value (0.5 bar) to the highest value (25
bar) for 10,000 times with the aim of verifying the mechanical stability of the product
and consequently the complete absence of leaks.
14. Vibration test
At each production start-up of the multilayer pipe a vibration test is performed: this
consists of subjecting a 2 m long specimen, obtained by combining two 1 m long
pipes each with an intermediate fitting, to a combination of static pressure (15 bar)
and vertical mechanical stress of misalignment ( 10 mm) with the aim of verifying
the pipe-fitting compatibility or more precisely the absence of withdrawing. Each pipe-
fitting combination is subjected to a total of 330 cycles each lasting 80 seconds that are
made up of 20 seconds of vibrations with a pause of 60 seconds. The test is considered
positive if there are no leaks or ruptures.
15. Thermal cycle test
In order to guarantee the reliability of the PEXAL multilayer system and its relative fittings,
in brass and in PPSU, over time, fatigue tests are carried out in Valsir. There are several
fatigue tests that can be carried out, however, the most requested one is the Thermal
Cycling Test commonly abbreviated to TCT. The test consists of first of all assembling
a circuit by uniting the pipes and fittings in accordance with a pattern established by
the European Standard UNI EN 12293. The circuit then undergoes a 5000 cycle thermal
test with hot and cold water. This test is undertaken to verify the suitability and the
compatibility of the multilayer pipe and its fittings.
45
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.1.15 Pipe approvals
IIP-UNI: certificate of conformity of the PEXAL multilayer pipe systems to convey hot
and cold water in domestic water an space heating systems.
RINA: approval, which guarantees the use of the PEXAL multilayer system on board
ships for domestic water, heating and air-conditioning systems.
IIS: Qualification certificate of the aluminium welding procedure adopted in the
production of the PEXAL multilayer pipe, in accordance with specifications EN 288-8:
1997 Annexes No. 12.
AS 4176 SPEC. 438 LN IP083: certificate of conformity of the PEXAL system to
convey hot and cold drinking water under pressure.
AS/NZS 4020
(PEXAL):
Certificate of suitability of the PEXAL multilayer pipe to convey cold and hot water (up
to 85C) in domestic water systems. ANALYSIS REPORT: MAT/ASN 018D.
AS/NZS 4020
(PPSU):
Certificate of suitability of the PPSU fittings to convey cold and hot water (up to 85C)
in domestic water systems. ANALYSIS REPORT: MAT/ASN 019D.
MC - GOST: certificate of conformity of the PEXAL system to be used to transport hot
and cold drinking water in domestic water and heating systems.
Polish certificate of suitability for the installation of PEXAL piping for heating, the
supply of hot and cold water for domestic use.
Polish certificate of suitability of the PEXAL system for the supply of drinking water.
Approval that guarantees the suitability of the PEXAL multilayer pipe for use in
conveying hot water to heating systems.
OVGW: system certification inherent to the PEXAL product to be used in water supply
systems in domestic water and space heating systems. The certification places particular
attention on the quality aspect but also on the environmental aspect (e.g.: Emissions
during production and the recycling of each single component during use).
Approval that guarantees the use of the PEXAL system for transporting hot water in
space heating systems.
46
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Approval that guarantees the suitability of the PEXAL multilayer pipe to be used for
transporting hot water in space heating systems.
Approval that guarantees the suitability of the PEXAL system to be used for domestic
water systems.
Product certification inherent to the suitability of the PEXAL multilayer system to be
used in space heating systems.
Product certification inherent to the suitability of the PEXAL multilayer system to be
used in domestic water systems.
BS 6920
(PEXAL):
Certificate of the suitability of the PEXAL multilayer pipe to convey cold and hot
drinking water in domestic water systems with temperatures as high as 85C.
ANALYSIS REPORT: MAT/LAB 636L.
BS 6920
(PPSU):
Certificate of suitability of the PEXAL multilayer pipe to convey cold and hot drinking
water in domestic water systems with temperatures as high as 85C.
ANALYSIS REPORT: MAT/LAB 637L.
Approval that guarantees the use of the PEXAL multilayer system on board ships, for
domestic water systems and space heating.
Approval that guarantees the suitability of the PEXAL multilayer pipe and fittings
both in plastic (Pexal Easy) and in metal (compression and crimp) to be used for the
transport of hot and cold water in domestic water and space heating systems.
Approval that guarantees the use of the PEXAL multilayer system for transporting cold
and hot water in domestic water and space heating systems.
Product approval inherent to the suitability of the PEXAL system to be used for
transporting hot and cold water in domestic water, space heating and air conditioning
systems.
Product approval inherent to the suitability of the PEXAL and MIXAL multilayer pipe to
be used in space heating systems.
Product approval inherent to the suitability of the PEXAL multilayer pipe to be used in
space heating systems.
Certificate of conformity of the brass and PPSU fittings for transporting hot and cold
drinking water in domestic water systems.
Product certification inherent to the suitability of the PEXAL multilayer pipe to be used
in domestic water systems.
Approval that guarantees the sutiability of the PEXAL multilayer pipe to be used for
transporting hot water in space heating systems.
47
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.2 V-ESSE, V-ELLE, V-ZETA, V-ERRE and V-ENNE insulation panels
3.2.1 V-ESSE panel
The V-ESSE panel is a pocketed, expanded polystyrene panel with a blue EPS film, which gives it a good surface resistance to stamping.
It has been studied and designed for residential systems, commercial areas or warehouses where the floor load is not very high. In fact the
panel has a density of 30 kg/cm
3
with a compressive strength of 150 kPa.
Spacing is 75 mm and the panel is available in two thicknesses. V-ESSE20 has a base thickness of 20 mm with a total thickness of 50 mm,
V-ESSE30 has a base thickness of 30 mm and a total thickness of 60 mm. The V-ESSE panel is characterised by an L-profile joint, which
allows a stable connection. The laying of the pipe is facilitated by alternated incisions on the bosses; this allows long lengths of pipe to be
laid by following the bosses with the same incision (see Figure 3.2.1 and Figure 3.2.2).
Figure 3.2.1 V-ESSE panel.

Figure 3.2.2 Dimensions of the V-ESSE panel.
s
L
s
1
P
H
48
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Table 3.2.1 Characteristics of the V-ESSE panels.
Panel characteristics Measurement unit V-ESSE20 V-ESSE30
Reference
standard
Resistance - Class 150 Class 150 UNI EN ISO 13163
Application
Residential systems and commercial areas
such as offices and shops or warehoused
with average density floor loads.
Panel material -
Expanded polystyrene
with blue EPS film.
Expanded polystyrene
with blue EPS film.
-
Surface type - Pre-formed Pre-formed -
Panel working dimensions HxL mmxmm 1350x750 1350x750 -
Total dimensions of panel H
1
xL
1
mmxmm 1370x770 1370x770 -
Panel surface m
2
1.012 1.012 -
Minimum pipe spacing p mm 75 75 -
Insulation thickness s
1
mm 20 30 -
Total thickness s mm 50 60 -
Density kg/m
3
30 30 UNI EN ISO 845
Compressive strength kPa 150 150 UNI EN ISO 13163
Flexural strength kPa 250 250 UNI EN ISO 13163
Fire resistance - Euroclass E Euroclass E EN 13501-1
Dimensional stability at 70C for 48 h % 0.5 0.5 UNI EN ISO 13163
Thermal conductivity W/mK 0.034 0.034 UNI EN ISO 13163
Thermal resistivity m
2
K/W 0.8 1.1 -
Type of packaging - Cardboard box Cardboard box -
Number of panels per package - 12 10 -
Surface area per package m
2
12.14 10.12 -
Mark
49
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.2.2 V-ELLE panel
The V-ELLE insulation panel is a smooth panel in coils of expanded polystyrene with a grey aluminzied film in polyester with red squares
with a spacing of 50 mm to facilitate installation.
It is supplied in coils, which are laid with extreme facility by simply unrolling the panel onto the floor. It is supplied in two versions that
differ in thickness and compressive strength; these structural differences make them suitable for different applications. The V-ELLE20/200
panel has a thickness of 20 mm, a density of 30 kg/cm
3
and a compressive strength of 200 kPa. These characteristics make it suitable for
residential or commercial heating systems but especially for areas where the available height for the installation is limited (less than 100
mm). The V-ELLE30/250 panel has a thickness of 30 mm and a density of 40 kg/cm
3
. Given its elevated compressive strength of 250 kPa,
it can be utilised both in residential and industrial jobs, wherever the surface load is very high. It is also ideal for snowmelt and de-icing
systems (entrance ramps, car parks, squares, etc.).
Figure 3.2.3 V-ELLE panel.
Figure 3.2.4 Dimensions of the V-ELLE panel.
H
s
L
50
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
51
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Table 3.2.2 Characteristics of the V-ELLE panels.
Panel characteristics Measurement unit V-ELLE20/200 V-ELLE30/250
Reference
standard
Resistance - Class 200 Class 250 UNI EN ISO 13163
Application
Residential systems
or commercial areas
such as offices and
shops or warehouse
with medium intensity
floor loads. Specially
designed for systems
where installation
height is limited or
else in renovations
jobs.
Residential systems
or commercial areas
but above all it is
suitable for industrial
systems due to its
elevated compressive
strength. It is suitable
for snowmelt and de-
icing systems.
Panel material
Expanded polystyrene with multilayer grey
aluminized film with blue squares with a 50
mm spacing and 30 mm adhesive border.
Surface type - Smooth Smooth -
Panel dimensions LxH mmxm 1000x12 1000x12 -
Panel surface m
2
12 12 -
Total thickness s mm 20 30 -
Density kg/m
3
30 40 UNI EN ISO 845
Compressive strength kPa 200 250 UNI EN ISO 13163
Flexural strength kPa 250 350 UNI EN ISO 13163
Fire resistance - Euroclass E* Euroclass E* EN 13501-1
Dimensional stability at 70 for 48 h % 0.5 <1 UNI EN ISO 13163
Thermal conductivity W/mK 0.033 0.033 UNI EN ISO 13163
2
K/W 0.6 0.90 UNI EN ISO
Type of packaging - Polyethylene bag Polyethylene bag -
Number of panels per package - 1 1
Mark

* This characteristic refers to the base of the panel made of expanded polystyrene.
52
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.2.3. V-ZETA panel
The V-ZETA panel is an economical solution for Valsir floor heating and cooling systems destined for use in industrial buildings, but also civil
and commercial applications. V-ZETA is a pocketed panel in expanded polystyrene with a compressive strength of 200 kPa with slots for
securing the pipe. Rabbets have been produced on the sides for the coupling of one panel to the next. The V-ZETA panel is in compliance
with the standard UNI EN ISO 13163 and carries the EC approval mark. Its working dimensions are 1200x750 mm and it has a base
thickness of 20 mm with a total thickness of 50 mm; pipe spacing is 75 mm.
Figure 3.2.5 V-ZETA panel.
Figure 3.2.6 Dimensions of the V-ZETA panel.
s
L
s
1
P
H
Table 3.2.3 Characteristics of the V-ZETA panel.
Panel characteristics Measurement unit V-ZETA
Reference
standard
Resistance - Class 200 UNI EN ISO 13163
Application -
Residential systems or
commercial areas such as
offices and shops and industrial
systems.
-
Panel material - White expanded polystyrene. -
Surface type - Pre-formed -
Panel working dimensions HxL mmxmm 1200x750 -
1
xL
1
mmxmm 1220x770 -
Panel working surface m
2
0.9 -
Minimum pipe spacing p mm 75 -
1
mm 20 -
Total height s mm 50 -
Density kg/m
3
30 -
Compressive strength kPa 200 EN 826
Flexural strength kPa 250 EN 12089
Fire resistance - Euroclass E EN 13501-1
Thermal conductivity W/mK 0.035 UNI EN ISO 13163
2
K/W 0.8 -
Type of packaging - Cardboard box -
Number of panels per package - 12 -
2
10.8 -
Mark
53
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.2.4. V-ERRE panel
The V-ERRE panel is the ideal solution for buildings where installation space is reduced to a minimum but the owners do not wish to forego
the advantages of a Valsir floor heating and cooling systems. This panel has excellent mechanical characteristics and is ideal for any type
of renovation work where available thickness is below 70 mm.
The V-ERRE pocketed insulation panel is made by coupling a preformed sheet of expanded polystyrene with a base thickness of 10 mm to
a rigid sheet of black PS equipped with bosses for securing the pipe, the total height is 32 mm.
The panel is produced in compliance with the European Standard UNI EN ISO 13163 and is marked in accordance with EC European
Directives. It allows a minimum pipe spacing of 50 mm and is characterised by a compressive strength of 200 kPa.
Figure 3.2.7 V-ERRE panel.
Figure 3.2.8 Dimensions of V-ERRE panel.
s
L
s
1
P
H
54
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Table 3.2.4 Characteristics of the V-ERRE panels.
Panel characteristics Measurement unit V-ERRE10
Reference
standard
Resistance - Class 200 UNI EN ISO 13163
Application -
commercial areas such as
offices and shops.
-
Panel material -
Expanded polystyrene film in
black ps.
-
Surface type - Pre-formed -
1
xL
1
mmxmm 1050x550 -
2
0.5 -
Minimum pipe spacing p mm 50 -
1
mm 10 -
Total height s mm 32 -
Density kg/m
3
30 -
Flexural strength kPa 250 EN 12089
Thermal conductivity W/mK 0.035 UNI EN ISO 13163
2
K/W 0.45 -
Type of packaging - Cardboard box -
2
10 -
Mark
55
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.2.5. V-ENNE panel
The V-ENNE panel is an eco-compatible solution for Valsir floor heating and cooling systems destined for use in green building applications.
This panel is made of conifer wood fibres with paraffin in a percentage of 0.7% and latex in a percentage of 5% to make it impermeable
to the absorption of water. The compressive strength is 200 kPa and it is equipped with an L-shaped side rabbet for coupling the panels.
The V-ENNE panel is in compliance with the European Standard UNI EN 13171 and it carries the EC mark. Its working dimensions are
1200x1250 mm and it has a base thickness of 30 mm. When used with the V-RAIL01 pipe fixing bar it is possible to obtain minimum centre
distances of 50 mm.
Figure 3.2.9 V-ENNE panel.
Eco-friendly
Figure 3.2.10 Dimensions of the V-ENNE panel.
s
H
1
H
L
1
L
56
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Table 3.2.5 Characteristics of the V-ENNE panel.
Panel characteristics Measurement unit V-ENNE
Reference
standard
Resistance - Classe 200 UNI EN ISO 13171
Application -
commercial area such as offices
and shops for green buildings
applications.
-
Panel material -
Conifer wood fibres
(max. 94.3%)
Latex (max. 5%)
Parafin (max. 0,7%) -
Surface type - Smooth -
1
xL
1
mmxmm 1265x615 -
2
0.75 -
1
mm 30 -
Density kg/m
3
270 -
Thermal conductivity W/mK 0.049 UNI EN 13171
2
K/W 0.64 -
Type of packaging - Heat shrink film -
2
3.75 -
57
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.2.6 Instructions for laying the V-ENNE eco-compatible system
2008 Valsir S.p.A. Step 1
Before the system can be laid, make sure that the floor slab is clean, level and free
of debris. If the system is to be installed in a building directly over the ground then
the floor surface must be made waterproof with the V-FOIL anti-humidity film
Apply the V-BAND/N edging strip on all of the vertical surfaces (walls, pillars, the
first step of the stairs, etc). The edging strip has the task of absorbing expansions
in the screed that are generated in a perfectly natural manner due to temperature
fluctuations.
The insulation panels should be laid out starting from the corner of the room.
Lay each panel so that the L-shaped rabbets coincide with each. In this way they are
easily connected and the formation of thermal bridges is avoided when the concrete
is poured.
Apply the U-shaped fixing bars at a distance of about 1.5 m from each other.
The bi-adhesive film on the bars facilitates positioning and the special screws
(applied every 50 cm) allows them to be secured to the panel. It is recommended
to position the fixing bars parallel to the short side of the room. The screws can be
applied with an automatic screwdriver.
58
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
The MIXAL 16x2 pipe must be laid according to the loop layout pattern in the project.
For this system we suggest a double serpentine layout pattern as it guarantees
uniform temperature distribution thanks to the alternation of the flow circuit with the
return circuit and it adapts perfectly to the installation with U-shaped fixing bars.
After creating the circuits lay the polypropylene grid over the entire surface.
Pour the concrete keeping the loops under pressure as indicated in the European
Standard EN 1264. When the concrete has dried out completely and the floor has
been applied, the excess edging strip can be removed with the use of a cutter.
Apply the skirting board to cover the gap between the flooring and the wall.
59
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.3 V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat
3.3.1 Introduction
The V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat allows floating floors to be created, reducing the transmission of noise and offering maximum freedom in
the selection of flooring materials. V-ACUSTIC is an insulating product with elevated characteristics that satisfy the acoustic requirements
established for foot-traffic noise that, in Italy, have been published in the Ministerial Decree D.P.C.M dated 05/12/1997, implementing
decree of the outline law on noise pollution 447/1995. The V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat is highly resistant to traffic on the installation
site and to perforation; it is made up of elastic synthetic fibres that do not squash or break unlike products made with mineral fibres.
Thanks to the layer of non-woven material and its Velcro effect, it does not move during installation, thus avoiding the involuntary
formation of acoustic bridges. V-ACUSTIC must be laid on all floors directly under the insulation panel; all Valsir insulation panels are
compatible with the V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat that can, therefore, be used in different types of applications. Thanks to the elevated
impermeability to water, V-ACUSTIC replaces the V-FOIL anti-humidity film.
Figure 3.3.1 Layer composition with V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat.
V-ACUSTIC
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
3.3.2 Technical characteristics
Figure 3.3.2 V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat. Figure 3.3.3 V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat - detail.

60
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Table 3.3.1 Characteristics of the V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat.
Panel characteristics Measurement unit V-ACUSTIC
Reference
standard
Total thickness before installation mm 8.0 -
Thickness of the soundproof sheet
before installation
mm 1.5 -
Thickness of the non-woven layer
before installation
mm 6.5 -
Width of overlapping border mm 50 -
Roll dimensions HxL mmxm 1050x10 -
Specific weight kg/m
2
1.6 -
Impermeability to water - Impermeable -
Coefficient of diffusion of water
vapour (soundproof sheet)
100,000 -
Improvement of foot-traffic noise
insulation I
r
(1)
dB 33.5 ISO 717/82, UNI 8270/7
Improvement of foot-traffic noise
insulation L
w
(2)
dB 28.0 EN 12354-2
Thermal conductivity of the
soundproof sheet
W/mK 0.170
Thermal conductivity of the non-
woven material
W/mK 0.045
Dynamic rigidity with load of 200
kg/m
2
MN/m
3
21 EN 29052
Apparent dynamic rigidity with load
of 200 kg/m
2
MN/m
3
4 EN 29052
Compression of thickness under
load of 200 kg/m
2
mm 1 EN 1606
Compressibility of thickness mm 2 (CP2) EN 12431
Fire reaction rating - Class 1
(1) The improvement of the foot-traffic noise insulation is at 500 Hz comparing a bare slab with a thickness 240 mm (I = 74.0 dB) with a slab with floating floor (I
i
= 40.5 dB).
(2) The improvement of the soundproof insulation is obtained using the prediction methods established in the European Standard EN 12354-2.
61
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.3.3 Soundproof insulation of foot-traffic noise with V-ACUSTIC
The so-called impact noises caused by objects falling on the floor or the foot-steps of people are noises that are transmitted essentially
through structures and involve the structure of the floor- slab. The acoustic requirement that characterises the behaviour of these building
components concerning impact noises is the level of foot-traffic noise.
The law (D.P.C.M. 5/12/1997) establishes that the levels of foot-traffic noise be measured in-situ when construction has been completed;
this means that the results obtained do not depend solely on the materials employed but also on the quality of the installation.
The achievement of acoustic requirements cannot depend solely on the acoustic insulation but is also the result of the correct functioning
of the whole system defined as mass-spring-mass. It is also clear that not all insulating materials are suitable for such a function and
must therefore be chosen based on several specific characteristics, such as dynamic rigidity and the viscous creep under compression (see
details ahead). Considering that the level of acoustic insulation of floors must be measured in-situ, it is possible to predict it with sufficient
precision by using the European Standard EN 12354-2 that proposes two calculation models, the detailed model and the simplified
model.
The simplified model in the second part of standard EN 12354-2 allows an estimate of the evaluation index of normalised foot-traffic
noise on the basis of the evaluation index of the building elements determined in compliance with the standard EN ISO 717-2:1996.
The simplified model is limited to overlying rooms of a conventional size for dwellings and it is applicable only to homogeneous constructions
(brick walls and/or concrete) with floating floors.
Figure 3.3.4 Sound transmission between overlying rooms.
Foot-traffic noise
Direct transmission
Flanking transmission
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The calculation model does not consider the quality of laying or workmanship and any possible defects since these cannot be
quantified. It is presumed that the installation has been carried out in compliance with regulations, without acoustic bridges
and with a floating floor free of constraints. Accuracy of the simplified model. The European Standard EN 12354-2 highlights
that 60% of the predictions present an error of 2 dB as compared with the measured values, whereas 100% of the predictions
present an error of 4 dB as compared with measured values.
The evaluation index of normalised foot-traffic noise is calculated by using the following equation:
L
n,w
= L
n,w,eq
+ K - L
w
[3.3.1]
62
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
The evaluation index of normalised foot-traffic noise is calculated by using the following equation
L
n,w,eq
is the evaluation index of normalised foot-trafc noise of a homogenous oor without acoustic insulation (nude oor) depending on
the mass per unit area m expressed in kg/m
2
. Homogenous oors are oors in full concrete poured when laying, in full cellular concrete,
made with perforated bricks, made with joists, slabs in concrete or with joists in concrete. This index is calculated with the following
equation valid for oors with a mass per unit area from 100 kg/m
2
to 600 kg/m
2
:
L
n,w,eq
= 164 - 35 log(m) [3.3.2]
The values of are indicated in the following table.
Table 3.3.1 Determination of the evaluation index of normalised foot-traffic noise.
Relation between mass of unit area of nude floor and evaluation index of normalised foot-traffic noise
m
[kg/m
2
]
100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
L
n,w,eq
[dB]
94.0 87.8 83.5 80.1 77.3 75.0 72.9 71.1 69.5 68.1 66.8
Correction factor for the flanking transmission of foot-traffic noise
K is the correction factor for the flanking transmission of foot-traffic noise that is added to the direct transmissions. This correction factor
depends on the mass for unit area of the nude floor and the mean mass per unit area of the walls of the disturbed room without any type
of acoustic insulation; the latter is calculated as the average of the superficial masses estimated according to the dimensions of the single
walls. The K values are indicated in the following table.
Table 3.3.2 Determination of the correction factor K.
Correction factor K [dB]
Mass per average area of the flanking wals [kg/m
2
]
100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
M
a
s
s

p
e
r

u
n
i
t

a
r
e
a

o
f

t
h
e

n
u
d
e

s
l
a
b

[
k
g
/
m
2
]
150 2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
200 2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
250 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
300 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
350 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
400 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
450 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1
500 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1
550 4 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2
600 4 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2
63
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Evaluation index of the reduction of foot-traffic noise
is the evaluation index of the reduction of foot-traffic noise caused by the presence of a floating floor and it depends on the mass per
unit area m of the floating floor (concrete screed created over the soundproof mat) and the dynamic rigidity s of the soundproof mat.
This relation is represented graphically in Figure 3.3.5.
L
w
= 30log 3.125 + 3
m
s
[3.3.3]
Figure 3.3.5 Evaluation index of the reduction of foot-traffic noise.
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
4 6 8 10 20 30 40 50
I
n
d
e
x

o
f

t
h
e

r
e
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

l
e
v
e
l

o
f

f
o
o
t
-
t
r
a
f
f
i
c

n
o
i
s
e

L
w

[
d
B
]

Dynamic rigidity of the soundproof mat [MN/m
3
]
M
a
s
s

o
f

f
l
o
a
t
i
n
g

f
l
o
o
r

[
k
g
/
m
2
]
60
80
100
120
140
160
28
V-ACUSTIC
Dynamic rigidity
21 MN/m
3
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The dynamic rigidity s, expressed in MN/m
3
, is measured in compliance with EN 29052-1 and describes the capacity of the material,
if correctly installed, to elastically deform itself under the action of the distributed load of screed by converting the acoustic energy into
mechanical energy (movement).
V-ACUSTIC thanks to its excellent dynamic rigidity of s=21 MN/m
3
allows foot-traffic noise to be reduced by 28 dB.
There are practical correlations that are worth remembering between dynamic rigidity, the mat thickness and the acoustic characteristics:
the greater the thickness of the soundproof mat the lower the dynamic rigidity;
the lower the dynamic rigidity the better the soundproof characteristics;
elevated dynamic rigidity means the material has a reduced capacity to deform and therefore means low acoustic performance.
An excessively low dynamic rigidity, however, can mean the soundproof mat deforms too much; if the thickness of the mat reduces
excessively following installation or over time (up to 1-3 mm), the acoustic performance of the product will be considerably reduced.
When comparing soundproof products not only the dynamic rigidity values must be considered but also the compressibility of the product
and its capacity to maintain its performance over time. It is evident that if the soundproof mat is excessively compressed under the screed
weight and other heavy weights then it will no longer be capable of carrying out its function. The standards that allows these characteristics
to be evaluated are the European Standard EN 12431, that allows determination of the thickness of the insulation under compression after
a series of compression cycles, and standard EN 1606, that allows determination of the compression viscose creep when subjected to a
constant load for a period of 122 days.
Property Value
Reference
standard
Compressibility following a series of cycles 2 mm (Level CP2) EN 12431
Squashing with a load of 200 kg/m
2
over a
period of 122 days
0.25 mm EN 1606
64
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Considering, therefore, a compressibility during installation of 2 mm and a temporary squashing that reaches 0.25 mm, during the installation
phase, a total reduction in thickness of the V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat of about 2.25 mm must be considered.
3.3.3.1 Calculation example
Consider a slab of concrete and masonry 20+4 that has a 1.5 cm layer of plaster underneath with trellis beams at a distance of 50 cm with
a mass per unit area of 340 kg/m
2
. The walls of the shell have a mass per unit area of 150 kg/m
2
. The floating screed has a weight per unit
area of 100 kg/m
2
.
Figure 3.3.6 Structure considered in the example.
Floating screed
100 kg/m
2
Flanking wall
150 kg/m
2
Flanking wall
150 kg/m
2
Slab
340 kg/m
2
Edging stripe
V-BAND
Soundproof mat
V-ACUSTIC
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The evaluation index of the normalized foot-traffic noise of the nude slab is:
L
n,w,eq
= 164 - 35 log(m) = 164 - 35 log(340) = 75 dB,
the corrective factor for the lateral transmission of the foot-traffic noise taken from the table is:
K = 2 dB,
The evaluation index of the reduction of foot-traffic noise given by the V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat with a screed slab with a mass per unit
area of 100 kg/ m
2
is:
L
w
= 28 dB.
Thereforem the evaluation index of he normalised foot-traffic noise of the insulated slab is:
L
n,w
= L
n,w,eq
+ K - L
w
= 75 + 2 - 28 = 49 dB.
The value is below the 63 dB specified by the Italian Ministerial Decree D.P.C.M. 5/12/1997 for residential buildings. Take into account that
the margin between the calculated value and the maximum value allowed by the Decree, that is quite high, is often reduced by defects
in installation, acoustic bridges generated by the contact with the skirting board or cross-over of the pipes supplying the floor heating
systems.
65
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.3.4 Rules for the installation of V-ACUSTIC
It is fundamental that some simple installation rules are followed to ensure good levels of foot-traffic acoustic insulation and to avoid
acoustic bridges that would lead to the noise limits imposed by the Decree being exceeded. The installation phases involve the preparation
of the floor slab, the installation of V-ACUSTIC and the creation of the floating screed.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Step 1
It is fundamental that some simple installation rules are followed to ensure good
levels of foot-traffic acoustic insulation and to avoid acoustic bridges that would
lead to the noise limits imposed by the Decree being exceeded. The installation
phases involve the preparation of the floor slab, the installation of V-ACUSTIC and
the creation of the floating screed.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Step 2
Lay out the V-ACUSTIC rolls with the blue side facing upward, correctly raising the
single strips thus making use of the connection borders.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Step 3
Seal the connections of the single strips using only the tape supplied by Valsir (do
not use burners). The absence of the tape could cause harmful acoustic bridges and
reduce the anti-humidity function of the mat.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Step 4
Apply the V-BAND edging strip along all of the vertical surfaces and run it along
the surface of the soundproof mat. The absence of the edging strip would cause a
significant lateral acoustic bridge.
66
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Step 5
Apply the V-BAND edging strip along all of the vertical surfaces and run it along
the surface of the soundproof mat. The absence of the edging strip would cause a
significant lateral acoustic bridge
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Step 6
Cut the V-BAND edging strip only after the screed covering has been laid.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Step 7
To avoid acoustic bridges install skirting boards and maintaining a distance from the
floor with the use of cardboard strips to be removed following installation.
67
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.4 Distribution manifold
Figure 3.4.1 Valsir distribution manifold.
The pre-assembled Valsir manifold is obtained from a drawn brass bar with flow-check valves on the supply manifold and thermostatic
valves on the return manifold and it is supplied with mounting brackets for anchoring it inside the cabinet. It is equipped with flow-check
valves with a memory, that is, once the system has been balanced, the maximum opening of the valves can be blocked (by means of a
special tool) so that they can be used as stop flow valves in the circuit.
This is a special system, in that the flow-check valve can be re-opened and it automatically brings itself to the number of turns corresponding
to the balancing value. Another important aspect, is that the Valsir manifolds are equipped with an automatic air vent on both the supply
and return manifolds with a system drainage valve. Finally, independently of the number of outlets, it was chosen to make manifolds with
a 11/4 diameter to improve the flow characteristics as compared to the manifolds available today on the market.
3.4.1 Manifold components
Figure 3.4.2 Valsir manifold components.
H
D
D
I
P d
L
L
1
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

68
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Supply manifold.
Return manifold.
Flow-check valves. The flow-check valves on the supply manifold all have the memory function in order to block the maximum
opening position. This function is particularly useful should the manifold be tampered with as it avoids having to balance the system
once more.
Valves with thermostatic capacity. It is possible to apply a thermoelectric head to the valves with thermostatic capacity connected to
the thermostat in the room to be heated. Once the set temperature has been reached, the thermoelectric head actuates the valve by
progressively closing the circuit and therefore reducing the flow of heating fluid.
System air vent and drain cock set. All of the Valsir manifolds are equipped with this set both on the supply and the return. The set
is made up of a manual air vent that enables elimination of air from the system; the vent and drain cock set is equipped with a 60C
thermometer and drain cock with insert for draining the system.
Fixing brackets for securing the manifold to the cabinet.
Hexagonal 6 mm spanner with sleeve for adjusting the flow-check valves.
The dimensions of the manifold are indicated in the following table:
Table 3.4.1 Dimensions of the Valsir manifold.
No. outlets D [inch] d [inchxmm] P [mm] I [mm] H [mm] L [mm] L
1
[mm]
2 11/4 3/4x18 50 214 350 190 215
3 11/4 3/4x18 50 214 350 240 265
4 11/4 3/4x18 50 214 350 290 315
5 11/4 3/4x18 50 214 350 340 365
6 11/4 3/4x18 50 214 350 390 415
7 11/4 3/4x18 50 214 350 440 465
8 11/4 3/4x18 50 214 350 490 515
9 11/4 3/4x18 50 214 350 540 565
10 11/4 3/4x18 50 214 350 590 615
11 11/4 3/4x18 50 214 350 640 665
12 11/4 3/4x18 50 214 350 690 715
Figure 3.4.3 Characteristic curve of the flow-check valves on supply.
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

l
o
s
s

p

[
m
b
a
r
]

80
100
200
600
1000
60
8
0
40
Water flow [l/h]
1
0
0
2
0
0
4
0
0
6
0
0
8
0
0
1
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
400
800
20
10
6
0
4
0
2
0
1
0
K
v

(
F
l
o
w
-
c
h
e
c
k

v
a
l
v
e

t
u
r
n
s
)
0
.
1

(
0
.
2
5
)
0
.
2
6

(
0
.
5
)
0
.
3
7

(
0
.
7
5
)
0
.
5
7

(
1
)
0
.
9

(
1
,
5
)
1
.
2

(
2
)
1
.
4
5

(
3
)
K V
B
1
.
5
2

(
4
.
2
)

t
.
a
.
8
6
4
2
1
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
69
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Figure 3.4.4 Characteristic curve of the valves with motor capacity on return.
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

l
o
s
s

p

[
m
b
a
r
]
80
100
200
600
1000
60
8
0
40
Water flow [l/h]
1
0
0
2
0
0
4
0
0
6
0
0
8
0
0
1
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
400
800
20
10
6
0
4
0
2
0
1
0
8
6
4
2
1
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
3.4.2 Practical method for adjusting and balancing of the manifold
The theoretical method of determining the flow rate and balancing the circuits is dealt with in the chapter pertinent to Dimensioning of floor
heating systems in accordance with the standard UNI EN 1264. The adjustment and balancing, as well as blockage of the valve opening
(memory) are carried out by following the instructions shown below and outlined in Figure 3.4.5.
Figure 3.4.5 Adjustment of flow-check valves for balancing the circuits.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

Insert the spanner with sleeve into the flow-check valve and close the actuator a) by using exclusively the 6 mm hexagonal spanner .
Turn the sleeve b) in a clock-wise direction to fully lift the compass without moving the 6 mm hexagonal spanner.
Adjust the actuator c) with the hexagonal spanner to the number of turns obtained by the characteristic curve of the valve, turning
the hexagonal spanner in an anti-clockwise direction.
Close the sleeve d) turning it in an anti-clockwise direction, making the compass descend fully (against the actuator).
70
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.4.3 Composition of the manifold (without mixing kit)
The components to employ for distribution systems with manifolds without mixing kits are indicated in the table. Keep in mind that
depending on the type of pipe that is employed, suitable connection fittings will have to be chosen and depending on the type of circuit
management system, thermoelectric heads will have to be chosen, if necessary.
Table 3.4.2 Composition of manifold without mixing kit.
No.
outlets
Manifold dimensions
[mm]
Minimum
width
suggested
by the
manifold
(a)

[mm]
Product codes (ref. chapter 2)
B
[mm]
With
valve
A
[mm]
Without
valve
A-x
[mm]
Manifold
Metal
cabinet
(a)
Flow meters
(b)
Terminal
group
Fittings
(c)
Thermoelectric
head
(d)
2 350 305 215 400 VS0110002 VS0112007
VS0110049 VS0110026
VS0110035
or
VS0110036
or
VS0110037
VS0110430
or
VS0110432
3 350 355 265 600 VS0110003
VS0112008
4 350 405 315 600 VS0110004
5 350 455 365 600 VS0110005
6 350 505 415 600 VS0110006
7 350 555 465 800 VS0110007
VS0112008
8 350 605 515 800 VS0110008
9 350 655 565 800 VS0110009
10 350 705 615 800 VS0110010
11 350 755 665 1000 VS0110011
VS0112010
12 350 805 715 1000 VS0110012
(a) The size of the cabinet and the relative code are suggested taking into consideration a free space of 60 mm around the manifold complete with valves.
(b) The quantity of flowmeters, if required, must be equal to the number of manifold outlets.
(c) The code depends on the pipe diameter used. The quantity of fittings is equal to twice the number of outlets.
(d) The use of thermoelecrtric heads depends on the type of circuit management system to be installed. The quantity of thermoelectric heads, if required, is to be equal to
the number of manifold outlets.
Figure 3.4.6 Manifold with elbow interception valves (without mixing kit).
A
B
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
71
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Table 3.4.3 Composition of the manifold with straight interception valves (without mixing kit).
No.
outlets
Manifold dimensions
[mm]
Minimum
width
suggested
by the
manifold
(a)

[mm]
With
valve
B
[mm]
Without
valve
B-y
[mm]
With
valve
A
[mm]
Without
valve
A-x
[mm]
Manifold
Metal
cabinet
(a)
Flow meters
(b)
Terminal
group
Fittings
(c)
Thermoelectric
head
(d)
2 365 355 285 215 400 VS0110002
VS0112007
VS0110049 VS0110026
VS0110035
or
VS0110036
or
VS0110037
VS0110430
or
VS0110432
3 365 355 335 265 400 VS0110003
4 365 355 385 315 400 VS0110004
5 365 355 435 365 600 VS0110005
VS0112008
6 365 355 485 415 600 VS0110006
7 365 355 535 465 600 VS0110007
8 365 355 585 515 600 VS0110008
9 365 355 635 565 800 VS0110009
VS0112009
10 365 355 685 615 800 VS0110010
11 365 355 735 665 800 VS0110011
12 365 355 785 715 800 VS0110012
Figure 3.4.7 Manifold with straight interception valves (without mixing kit).
A
B
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
72
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.5 Valsir mixing kit
The function of the mixing kit is to mix the hot water coming from the boiler with the return water from the circuits in order to have a
constant supply temperature. The kit is supplied with a three-speed circulation pump for the secondary circuit, thus making the Valsir
mixing kit very versatile and applicable to all types of systems, be they small or big. The kit is fixed point but it can be converted to variable
point by motorizing the three-way valve.
3.5.1 V-MIX02 fixed point mixing kit
Figure 3.5.1 V-MIX02 fixed point mixing kit.
Figure 3.5.2 Components of V-MIX02 fixed point mixing kit.
D
2
D
1
L
D
2
D
1
I
H
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

The V-MIX02 fixed point mixing kit is the most compact solution equipped with essential components only.
Thermostatic valve for adjustment of flow on inlet to the mixing kit.
Thermostatic head with liquid sensor. The temperature probe is inserted in the special pocket and actuates the head which regulates
the inlet flow to the system in relation to the temperature set by means of the graduated knob.
Circulation pump. Three-speed circulation pump corresponding to three different heads of 4 m, 5 m, and 6 m. It is this characteristics
that makes the mixing kit suitable for all systems sizes.
Pocket for probe of the thermostatic head.
Thermometer on flow side to the circuits.
Pre-calibrated safety by-pass. The by-pass keeps the fluid in circulation even when all the heating circuits are closed (e.g. when the
rooms have reached the set temperature.
No-return valve, this valve prevents an undesired return of flow in particular employment conditions.
Flow-check valve on outlet of mixing kit.
73
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
The characteristic curves of the V-MIX02 mixing kit are indicated in the following diagrams; they are determined considering an operating
temperature of the radiant system between 30C and 45C with a temperature difference of 8C and feed temperatures from the boiler of
70C, 60C and 50C.
Figure 3.5.3 Characteristic curves of the V-MIX02 mixing kit with temperature from the boiler at 70C.
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
0
Water flow [l/h]
R
e
s
i
d
u
a
l

h
e
a
d

[
m
b
a
r
]
Velocity 1
Velocity 2
Velocity 3
Temperature boiler side 70C
Temperature system side 3045C
Temperature difference on system side 8C
500 1000 1500 2000
V-MIX02 mixer with circulator
Wilo RS 15/6-3
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 3.5.4 Characteristics of the V-MIX02 mixing kit with feed temperature from the boiler at 60C.
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
0
Water flow [l/h]
R
e
s
i
d
u
a
l

h
e
a
d

[
m
b
a
r
]
Velocity 1
Velocity 2
Velocity 3
500 1000 1500 2000
Wilo RS 15/6-3
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 3.5.5 Characteristic curves of the V-MIX02 mixing kit with feed temperature from the boiler at 50C.
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
0
Water flow [l/h]
R
e
s
i
d
u
a
l

h
e
a
d

[
m
b
a
r
]
Velocity 1
Velocity 2
Velocity 3
500 1000 1500 2000
Wilo RS 15/6-3
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
74
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.5.2 V-MIX01 fixed point and variable point mixing kit
Figure 3.5.6 V-MIX01 mixing kit in fixed point version. Figure 3.5.7 V-MIX01 mixing kit in variable point version.

Figure 3.5.8 Components of the V-MIX01 mixing kit.
D
1
D
2
D
2
D
1
L
I
H
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The V-MIX01 mixing kit can be supplied in the fixed point version or else as variable point for combination with a climatic control unit.
This is a kit complete with all the necessary accessories such as safety thermostat, adjustable by-pass and thermometers on the flow and
on the return.
3-way valve. This device mixes the flow water with the return water from the system. It can be controlled by a thermostatic head to
create a fixed point system or by an electric motor to create a variable point system.
Thermostatic head with liquid sensor for the creation of a fixed point system (V-MIX01/PF). The temperature probe is inserted in a
pocket and actuates the head that regulates the inlet flow to the system in relation to the temperature set with the graduated knob.
Electric motor, instead of the thermostatic head for the creation of a variable point system (V-MIX01/PV).
Circulation pump. It is a three-speed circulation pump correpsonding to three different heads of 4 m, 5 m, and 6 m. It is this characteristic
that makes the mixing kit suitable for all systems sizes.
Pocket for the probe of the thermostatic head.
Safety thermostat. The safety thermostat actuates the pump motor and stops it when the temperature detected on the supply circuit is
greater than the limit set.
Thermometer both on the flow to the circuits and on the return.
Adjustable safety by-pass. The by-pass keeps the fluid in circulation even when all the heating circuits are closed (e.g. when the rooms
have reached the set temperature).
No-return valve, this valve prevents an undesired return of flow in particular employment conditions.
75
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
The characteristic curves of the V-MIX01 mixing kit are indicated in the following diagrams; they are determined by considering an operating
temperature of the radiant system between 30C and 45C with a temperature difference of 8C and feed temperatures from the boiler of
70C, 60C and 50C.
Figure 3.5.9 Characteristic curves of the V-MIX01 mixing valve with temperature from the boiler at 70C.
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
0 500 1000 1500 2500 2000
Water flow [l/h]
R
e
s
i
d
u
a
l

h
e
a
d

[
m
b
a
r
]
Velocity 1
Velocity 2
Velocity 3
Wilo RS 15/6-3
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
0
Water flow [l/h]
R
e
s
i
d
u
a
l

h
e
a
d

[
m
b
a
r
]
Velocity 1
Velocity 2
Velocity 3
500 1000 1500 2500 2000
Wilo RS 15/6-3
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
0
Water flow [l/h]
R
e
s
i
d
u
a
l

h
e
a
d

[
m
b
a
r
]
Velocity 1
Velocity 2
Velocity 3
500 1000 1500 2500 2000
Wilo RS 15/6-3
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
76
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.5.3 Theory: adjustment of the mixing kit
In the layout in Figure 3.5.12 the following are indicated with:
m
s
the flow in the secondary circuit,
m
p
the flow in the primary circuit,
m
x
the recirculation flow in the secondary circuit,
T
p,m
the temperature of the supply fluid in the primary circuit,
T
s,m
the temperature of the supply fluid in the secondary circuit,
T
r
the return temperature, that is the same in the primary and the secondary circuit and is given by:
Figure 3.5.12 Flow in the Valsir mixing kit.
m
p
, T
p,m
m
p
, T
r
m
s
, T
r
m
s
, T
s,m
m
s
, T
s,m
m
x
T
r
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
T
r
=
n
n
i=1
i=1
m
i
T
r,i
T
r,i
[3.5.1]
pondered average based on the flow of the return temperatures of the heating circuits n.
By applying the mass balance to the three-way valve, we have:
m
x
= m
s
- m
p
[3.5.2]
Whereas the energy balance applied to the three-way valve is:
c
p
m
s
(T
s,m
- T
o
) - c
p
m
p
(T
p,m
- T
o
) - c
p
m
x
(T
r
- T
o
) = 0 [3.5.3]
By simplifying the two relations we obtain:
m
s
T
s,m
- m
p
T
p,m
+ m
s
T
r
- m
p
T
r
= 0 [3.5.4]
m
s
(T
s,m
- T
r
) = m
p
(T
p,m
- T
r
) [3.5.5]
and hence
(T
s,m
- T
r
)
(T
p,m
- T
r
)
m
p
= m
s
[3.5.6]
With this last formula we can calculate the flow the boiler must supply the heating system with and using the diagram shown in Figure 3.5.3
it is possible to determine the correct positioning of the three-way valve.
77
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.5.4 Practice: adjustment of the mixing kit
In order to further clarify the use of the formulas shown previously, reference is made to the example in the chapter Dimensioning of floor
heating systems in accordance with the standard UNI EN 1264, the results of which are shown in the following table.
Table 3.5.1 Data of a floor heating system example.
N. Room Spacing p [cm] T
m
T
r
m
[C] [C] [l/s]
1 Bedroom 15 46 29.5 0.0154
2 Living room 22.5 46 33.5 0.0277
3 Kitchen 15 46 28.0 0.0121
4 Bathroom 15 46 35.0 0.0137
0.0689
In the example, the calculation of the average return temperature gives:
0.0154 29.5 + 0.0277 33.5 + 0.0121 28.0 + 0.0137 35
T
r
=
0. 0689
= 31.9C
Consider a supply temperature from the boiler of T
p,m
= 70C
In the secondary circuit T
s,m
= 46C and m
s
= 0.0689 l/s the flow in the primary circuit is calculated:
(T
s,m
- T
r
) (46 - 31.9)
(70 - 31.9) (T
p,m
- T
r
)
m
p
= m
s
= 0.0689 = 0.0255 l/s
The in-coming flow percentage to the mixing valve is given by the following:
m
s
0. 0255
0.0689
= = 0.37
m
p
= 37%
From the diagram in Figure 3.5.3 we can see, therefore, that the three-way valve must be set approximately to the value 4. Whereas, from
Figure 3.5.4 we can see the position of the thermostatic head which must also be set to a value of approximately 4.
78
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.5.5 The assembled mixing kit
The Valsir mixing system is created by assembling the basic components in relation to the type of system to be created.
To aid in the selection of the components the code numbers of the products that make up the mixing kit have been grouped together in the
following table. The dimensions of the assembled system are also given in the table and the code number of the metal cabinet for installing
the system is also given.
Table 3.5.2 Composition of the mixing kit complete with manifold for high temperature (ref. Figure 3.5.13).
No.
outlets
Manifold dimensions
[mm]
Minimum
width
suggested
by the
manifold
(a)

[mm]
With
valve
B
[mm]
Without
valve
B-y
[mm]
With
valve
A
[mm]
Without
valve
A-x
[mm]
Mixer Manifold
Metal
cabinet
(a)
Flow
meters
(b)
Terminal
group
Fittings
(c)
Thermoelectric
head
(d)
2 365 355 595 535 600
VS0110301
VS0110002 VS0112008
VS0110049 VS0110026
VS0110035
or
VS0110036
or
VS0110037
VS0110340
or
VS0110432
3 365 355 645 585 800 VS0110003
VS0112009
4 365 355 695 635 800 VS0110004
5 365 355 745 685 800 VS0110005
6 365 355 795 735 800 VS0110006
7 365 355 845 785 1000 VS0110007
VS0112010
8 365 355 895 835 1000 VS0110008
9 365 355 945 885 1000 VS0110009
10 365 355 995 935 1000 VS0110010
11 365 355 1045 985 1200 VS0110011
VS0112011
12 365 355 1095 1035 1200 VS0110012
Figure 3.5.13 Manifold complete with V-MIX01/PF fixed point mixing kit.
A
B
x
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
79
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Table 3.5.3 Composition of the mixing kit complete with manifold for high temperature (ref. Figure 3.5.14).
No.
outlets
Manifold dimensions
[mm]
Minimum
width
suggested
by the
manifold
(a)

[mm]
Codici prodotto (rif. capitolo 2)
With
valve
B
[mm]
Without
valve
B-y
[mm]
With
valve
A
[mm]
Without
valve
A-x
[mm]
Mixer Manifold
Metal
cabinet
(a)
Flow
meters
(b)
Terminal
group
Fittings
(c)
Thermoelectric
head
(d)
2 365 355 585 525 600
VS0110302
VS0110002 VS0112008
VS0110049 VS0110026
VS0110035
or
VS0110036
or
VS0110037
VS0110340
or
VS0110432
3 365 355 635 575 800 VS0110003
VS0112009
4 365 355 685 625 800 VS0110004
5 365 355 735 675 800 VS0110005
6 365 355 785 725 800 VS0110006
7 365 355 835 775 1000 VS0110007
VS0112010
8 365 355 885 825 1000 VS0110008
9 365 355 935 875 1000 VS0110009
10 365 355 985 925 1000 VS0110010
11 365 355 1035 975 1200 VS0110011
VS0112011
12 365 355 1085 1025 1200 VS0110012
Figure 3.5.14 Manifold complete with V-MIX01/PV variable point mixing kit.
A
B
x
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
80
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Table 3.5.4 Composition of the manifold complete with V-MIX02 fixed point mixing kit.
No.
outlets
Manifold dimensions
[mm]
Minimum
width
suggested
by the
manifold
(a)

[mm]
With
valve
B
[mm]
Without
valve
B-y
[mm]
With
valve
A
[mm]
Without
valve
A-x
[mm]
Mixer Manifold
Metal
cabinet
(a)
Flow
meters
(b)
Terminal
group
Fittings
(c)
Thermoelectric
head
(d)
2 375 365 530 470 600
VS0110303
VS0110002 VS0112008
VS0110049 VS0110026
VS0110035
or
VS0110036
or
VS0110037
VS0110340
or
VS0110432
3 375 365 580 520 600 VS0110003
VS0112009
4 375 365 630 570 800 VS0110004
5 375 365 680 620 800 VS0110005
6 375 365 730 670 800 VS0110006
7 375 365 780 720 800 VS0110007
VS0112010
8 375 365 830 770 1000 VS0110008
9 375 365 880 820 1000 VS0110009
10 375 365 930 870 1000 VS0110010
11 375 365 980 920 1000 VS0110011
VS0112011
12 375 365 1030 970 1200 VS0110012
Figure 3.5.15 Manifold complete with V-MIX02 fixed point mixing kit.
A
B
x
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
81
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.6 V-BOX modules
V-BOX are compact and pre-fitted distribution modules for zone heating systems. They are made up of low temperature mixing groups and/
or high temperature distribution groups; the different alternatives available allow the installation of different types of systems. The mixing
groups are easily connected to the supply manifolds of the floor heating system whereas the high temperature distribution groups allow
the integration of the heating system with radiators and towel drying radiators. The V-BOX modules are located in the vicinity of the boiler
(traditional or condensation) and electric circuit, when climatic control units and motorised valves are employed, it is concentrated in the
same zone, thus consenting a reduction in the expense of creating the electric circuit.
The advantages of the V-BOX modules are therefore significant:
reduced dimensions of the module with consequent ease of installation directly under the boile.
System distribution arrangement concentrated in one zone only.
Possibility of reducing the dimensions of the manifold cabinets installed in the apartment due to the absence of the integrated mixing kit.
Ease of production and management of the control system with climatic control unit when variable point distribution groups are being
utilised.
Table 3.6.1 Technical data.
Characteristic Value
Maximum operating temperature 120C
Maximum operating pressure 6 bar
Temperature range of fixed point adjustment 20C50C
Voltage of pumps 230V 50 Hz
Boiler connection 3/4 F
Connection to utilities 3/4 M
Figure 3.6.1 Characteristic diagram.
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0
500
1000 1500 2000 2500
R
e
s
i
d
u
a
l

h
e
a
d

P

[
k
P
a
]
Flow Q [l/h]
High temperature unit
Fixed point low
temperature unit
Variable point low
temperature unit
Curves created at maximum pump speed
Wilo RS 15/6
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
82
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Figure 3.6.2 Connection of V-BOX.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The V-BOX modules are available in two versions, a recessed version and a wall-hung version with painted case.
Figure 3.6.3 Recessed V-BOX model. Figure 3.6.4 Wall-hung V-BOX model.

The construction characteristics:
thermally insulated manifold with expanded polypropylene with hydraulic compensator with possibility of exclusion.
Mixing valve with motor option (variable point option) or thermostatic option (fixed point version).
Safety thermostat.
Three-speed pumps.
Extremely simple installation and maintenance thanks to the simplified hydraulic connections.
83
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
The standard versions available are indicated in the table.
Table 3.6.2 Table of configurations.
Code Description Outlet 1 Outlet 2 Outlet 3 Regulation Installation Dimensions
VS0110311
Encased V-BOX module,
2 zones
high temp. low temp. - fixed point recessed 595x690x190
VS110312
Wall-hung V-BOX module,
2 zones
high temp. low temp. - fixed point external 490x590x190
VS0110321
2 zones
high temp. low temp. - variable point recessed 595x690x190
VS0110322
2 zones
high temp. low temp. - variable point external 490x590x190
VS0110331
2 zones
high temp. low temp. low temp. fixed point recessed 595x690x190
VS0110332
2 zones
high temp. low temp. low temp. fixed point external 490x590x190
VS0110341
2 zones
high temp. low temp. low temp. variable point recessed 595x690x190
VS0110342
2 zones
high temp. low temp. low temp. variable point external 490x590x190
Figure 3.6.5 Connection of recessed V-BOX module. Figure 3.6.6 Connection of wall-hung V-BOX module.
360
595
6
9
0
190
3/4"F
3/4"M
0
1
5
0
60
90 90 90
60
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

190
360
490
3/4"F
5
9
0
3/4"M
60
90 90 90
60
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
84
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.7 Mixing and distribution groups for heating plants
The Valsir distribution and mixing groups have been designed and created for the creation of heating/cooling systems for buildings such as
villas, schools and industries. The groups can be composed according to the different system requirements and they are made up of mixing
or distribution modules that can be connected to distribution manifolds supplied in kits. The groups can therefore be installed directly in
the heating plant near the boiler.
Figure 3.7.1 Outline of the connection of the distribution /mixing group.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The modules can be assembled to form different configurations of distribution/mixing groups connected to the boiler composed of basic
elements such as:
mixing modules for feeling low temperature circuits and for variable point operation .
Distribution modules for feeding high temperature circuits .
Differential pressure control valves.
Distribution manifold and support brackets .
Hydraulic separator and pipes for connection to manifold .
The assembled groups can feed heating systems with outputs that reach 280 kW, for details refer to the following table.
Table 3.7.1 Hydraulic characteristics of the complete groups.
Dimension Distribution type
Maximum flow
[kg/s]
Maximum output*
[kW]
DN 25
2-way 0.4 33
3-way 0.6 50
4-way 0.8 68
5-way 1 85
DN 32
2-way 0.6 50
3-way 0.9 72
4-way 1.2 97
5-way 1.5 122
DN 40
3-way 2.5 210
4-way 3.4 280
* The maximum output is approximate and is calculated with a temperature difference between supply and return of 20C.
85
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.7.1 The distribution and mixing modules
The modules are available in two versions. The first is for supplying low temperature circuits, equipped with 3-way mixing valves with motor
option. The second version is for supplying high temperature circuits such as radiators and towel drying radiators.
Figure 3.7.2 Mixing module for low temperature circuits. Figure 3.7.3 Distribution module for high temperature circuits.

The modules are composed of:
thermal insulation in expanded polypropylene,
three-speed pump (not included with DN 40 modules),
mixing valve with by-pass both on the boiler side and on the system side (mixing module),
supply valve complete with thermometer and check valve,
no-return valve complete with thermometer,
differential pressure control valve (optional).
The modules are supplied in sizes DN 25, DN 32 and DN 40 and the characteristics are indicated in the following table.
Table 3.7.2 Technical details
Characteristic DN 25 DN 32 DN 40
Maximum operating pressure 8 bar 8 bar 8 bar
Maximum operating temperature 120C 120C 120C
Boiler connections 11/2 M 2 M DN 40, 4 holes
Utility connections 1 F 11/4 F 11/2 F
Valve material OT 58 OT 58 OT 58
Seal material Viton/EPDM Viton/EPDM Centellen
86
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Figure 3.7.4 Dimensions for mixing and high temperature DN 25 groups.
188
G11/2
G1
394
250
G11/2
G1
394
250
188

2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir

S
.
p
.
A
.

2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir

S
.
p
.
A
.
120
265 265
4
8
2
4
8
3
G2
120
G2
G11/4 G11/4

2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir

S
.
p
.
A
.

2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir

S
.
p
.
A
.
200
320 320
6
1
5
6
1
5
DN40
200
DN40
G11/2 G11/4

2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir

S
.
p
.
A
.

2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir

S
.
p
.
A
.
87
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Figure 3.7.7 Characteristic diagram for DN 25 variable point mixing module.
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
c
e

P

[
k
P
a
]

FlowQ [l/h]
P
P1 P2
Curves created at maximum pump velocity
Grunfos UPS 25/60 e Wilo RS 25/6-3 (low temperature)
Residual head of module
Pressure loss of module
Head of pump
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 3.7.8 Characteristic diagram of fixed point DN 25 mixing module.
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800
Flow Q [l/h]
Grundfos UPS 25/60 e Wilo RS 25/6-3

Head of pump
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
c
e

P

[
k
P
a
]
P
P2 P1
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figura 3.7.9 Characteristic diagram of DN 32 mixing module.
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000
P
P1 P2
(low temperature)
Flow Q [l/h]
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
c
e

P

[
k
P
a
]
Head of pump
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
88
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Figure 3.7.10 Characteristic diagram of DN 40 mixing module.
0
5
10
15
20
0 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000
25
P
6000 4000 2000
P1 P2
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
c
e

P

[
k
P
a
]
Flow Q [l/h]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 3.7.11 Characteristic diagram of DN 25 distribution module.
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3200
P
P1 P2
(high temperature)
Flow Q [l/h]
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
c
e

P

[
k
P
a
]
Head of pump
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 3.7.12 Characteristic diagram of DN 32 distribution module
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
P
P1 P2
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
c
e

P

[
k
P
a
]
Flow Q [l/h]
Grundfos UPS 32/60 e Wilo RS 25 (high temperature)
Head of pump
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
89
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Figure 3.7.13 Characteristic diagram of DN 40 distribution module.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
0
5
10
15
20
0 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000
45
6000 4000 2000
P
P1 P2
25
30
35
40
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
c
e

P

[
k
P
a
]
Flow Q [l/h]
Figure 3.7.14 Characteristic diagram of pumps for DN 40 modules.
0
60
80
100
40
70
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 20000
90
18000 16000 14000 12000 10000
50
30
20
10
Wilo Top S 40/4 (230 V)
Wilo Top S 40/4 (400 V)
Wilo Top E 40/1-4 (230 V)
Wilo Top S 40/7 (230 V)
Wilo Top S 40/7 (400 V)
Wilo Top S 40/10 (400 V)
Wilo Top E 40/1-10 (230 V)
Flow Q [l/h]
H
e
a
d

H

[
k
P
a
]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
90
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.7.1.1 Operating principle of mixing module
The module mixes the return water from the system with the supply water from the generator, by adjusting the valve (3 way mixer) the
circuits of the heating system (terminals) are supplied with water at the desired temperature. The mixing modules can be fixed point or
variable point. In the fixed point modules (thermostatic) the supply temperature to the system is maintained constant through the action of
a thermostatic head that is adjusted during the start-up phase of the system.
In variable point modules the supply temperature can be varied through the action of a climatic control unit that increases the supply
temperature to the system when the external temperature falls, and vice versa it reduces it when the external climatic conditions are more
favourable. In this way it is possible to increase the efficiency of the system while achieving reasonable energy savings.
In this case the mixing valve is activated by a servomotor that is controlled directly by a climatic control unit.
Figure 3.7.15 Variable point mixing module.
Generator
Terminals
M
i
x
i
n
g

m
o
d
u
l
e

2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The effect of the mixing valve differs according to its position. When the valve is completely open, which is equal to the request for
maximum thermal output, within the terminal circuits all of the flow distributed by the generator is present. In this case the pump must
overcome the pressure losses of the terminal circuits and those of the generator.
Figure 3.7.16 Mixing module with valve open.
Generator
Terminals
M
i
x
i
n
g

m
o
d
u
l
e

2008 Valsir S.p.A.
91
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
When the valve is completely closed, that is when the thermal output requirement is null, within the terminal circuits all of the return water
from the same circuits circulates. In this case the pump must overcome the pressure losses exclusively in the terminal circuits.
Figure 3.7.17 Mixing module with valve closed.
Generator
Terminals
M
i
x
i
n
g

m
o
d
u
l
e

2008 Valsir S.p.A.
La regolazione dei moduli di miscelazione pu essere realizzata in due modi diversi, agendo con modalit differenti sulla valvola
miscelatrice.
Fixed point adjustment: the supply temperature to the system (above the mixing valve) is maintained constant.
The adjustment system opens and closes the valve in such a way as to keep the supply temperature to the system constant. This is
completely independent of the external climatic conditions.
Figure 3.7.18 Characteristic diagram of a fixed point system.
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
External temperature [C]
10
20
30
40
50
60
S
u
p
p
l
y

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

[
C
]
0
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
This type of adjustment is usually created with thermostatic heads or with electronic regulating devices (for mixers with large dimensions)
that actuate the opening and closure of the valve itself thus varying the ratio of the flow of high temperature fluid from the source (for
example a boiler) and the return fluid. In this way the supply temperature to the system can be kept constant and at the same temperature
set. Fixed point systems are easy to manage, however, they do not allow the system to adapt itself to the external climatic conditions and
to benefit from energy savings that, on the other hand, a variable point system is capable of obtaining.
92
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Variable point adjustment (or sliding temperature): the temperature of the water supplied to the system (above the mixing valve)
is adjusted in relation to the external temperature. The relationship between the supply temperature to the system and the external
temperature is called climatic curve.
Figure 3.7.19 Characteristic diagram of a variable point system.
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
10
20
30
40
50
60
0
S
u
p
p
l
y

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

[
C
]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
This type of adjustment is normally carried out with electronic systems (V-CLIMA) that measure both the supply temperature and the
external temperature. With the use of a servomotor, these systems open or close the valve itself, thus varying the flow ratio between the
heating fluid coming from the boiler, and the return fluid, in such as way as to modify the supply temperature in relation to the external
temperature, according to the climatic curve established. Variable point systems require a very precise regulation, setting the climatic curve
that allows the system to adapt itself to the external climatic conditions, thus increasing comfort and reducing energy consumption in the
management of the system.
3.7.1.2 Calculation of flows
The energy balance carried out on the mixer allows the flow to be determined on the utilities side m
u
and the boiler side m
c
once the values
are known such as: the output of the system Q, the supply temperature to the heating circuit T
Mu
, the temperature of the water returning
from the heating circuit T
Ru
and the temperature of the water leaving the boiler T
Mc
.
Figure 3.7.20 Mixing module, approximate values.
T
Mu
T
Ru
T
Mc
T
Rc
m
u
m
c
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Q = c
p
m
u
(T
Mu
- T
Ru
) [3.7.1]
Q = c
p
m
c
(T
Mc
- T
Rc
)
[3.7.2]
T
Rc
= T
Ru
[3.7.3]
where c
p
is the specific heat of the water equal to 4190 J/Ckg.
93
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.7.2 Differential valve
The differential valve is employed in systems where the regulation valves or the zone valves are closed thus causing variations in the
flow and a build-up of pressure in the circuits. The valve can be calibrated in relation to the type of system in such as way as to limit the
maximum pressure value generated by the pump and therefore avoid it operating outside the optimum operating field.
Figure 3.7.21 Differential pressure control valve. Figure 3.7.22 Installation of the pressure valve.

Installation is very simple and can also be carried out after installation of the mixing/distribution group has been completed.
Table 3.7.4 Technical details.
Characteristic Value
Nominal diameter DN 20
Maximum operating pressure 8 bar
Maximum operating temperature 120C
Connections 3/4 F
Calibration field 26.5 m.w.c.
Figure 3.7.23 Assemblage of the differential valve.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
94
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.7.3 Distribution manifolds
The manifolds for heating plants are suitable for connection with 2 and 4-zone mixing and distribution modules in relation to the nominal
diameter.
Figure 3.7.24 Distribution manifold.
The manifolds are complete with:
compact interception valves both on supply and return,
connection for expansion vessel,
connection for safety group.
The distribution groups are supplied in the dimensions DN 25, DN 32 and DN 40 and the characteristics are indicated in the following tables.
Maximum output with T=20C 50 kW 72 kW 280 kW
Number of zones 23 23 34
Material Steel Steel Steel
Connections on separator side 2 11/2 M DN 65, PN 16, 4 holes
Connections on distribution/mixing module side 11/2 M 2 M DN 40, PN 6, 4 holes
Attachment for expansion vessel group 3/4 F 3/4 F 3/4 F
Interception valves incorporated Yes Yes No
Figure 3.7.25 Distribution manifold.
D
2
D
1
H
L
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Table 3.7.6 Dimensions of distribution manifold.
COD. DN D
1
D
2
Zone HxLxP
VS0110821 25 G11/2 G11/2 2 120x505x120
VS0110823 25 G11/2 G11/2 3 120x755x120
VS0110824 25 G11/2 G11/2 4 120x1005x120
VS0110825 25 G11/2 G11/2 5 120x1255x120
VS0110831 32 G11/2 G2 2 130x520x120
VS0110833 32 G11/2 G2 3 130x785x120
VS0110834 32 G11/2 G2 4 150x1060x150
VS0110835 32 G11/2 G2 5 150x1325x150
VS0110843 40 DN 65 DN 65 3 220x1020x220
VS0110845 40 DN 65 DN 65 4 220x1340x220
95
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Figure 3.7.26 Characteristic diagram of manifold DN 25.
4-way manifold
3-way manifold
2-way manifold
5-way manifold
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

l
o
s
s

P

[
k
P
a
]

Flow Q [l/h]
3000
7
8
9
10
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The curves refer to the least favourable zone
P
P1 P2
0
2
4
6
0 1000 4000 2000 5000
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

l
o
s
s

P

[
k
P
a
]
Flow Q [l/h]
3000
8
10
P
P2 P1
4-way manifold
5-way manifold
2-way manifold
3-way manifold
3
5
7
9
1
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
0
1
2
3
0 2000 6000 8000 10000 12000
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

l
o
s
s

P

[
k
P
a
]
Flow Q [l/h]
14000
4
5
9
P
4-way manifold
3-way manifold
4000
6
7
8
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
96
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.7.4 Hydraulic separator
The hydraulic separator is a compensation chamber to render independent the hydraulic circuits connected. It is utilised when the circulator
of the primary circuit interacts with the circulators of the secondary circuit. The use of the separator enables problems connected with flow
variations and head of the circuits to be eliminated. The separator also functions as an air-purging device.
Figure 3.7.29 Hydraulic separator.
The separators are complete with:
attachment for drainage,
attachment for air vent,
attachment for temperature probe.
The separators are supplied in the dimensions DN 25, DN 32 and DN 40 and the characteristics are indicated in the following tables.
Maximum flow 3,8 m
3
/h 6,5 m
3
/h 18 m
3
/h
Connections manifold side 11/2 F 11/2 M DN 65, PN 16, 4 holes
Connections boiler side 11/2 F 11/2 M DN 65, PN 16, 4 holes
Materiale Steel Steel Steel
Figure 3.7.30 Hydraulic separator.
D
D
D
1
D
2
H
L
2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir
S
.p
.A
.
Table 3.7.8 Dimensions of hydraulic separator.
COD. DN D D
1
D
2
HxLxP
VS0110851 25 G11/2 G3/4 G1/2 520x120x120
VS0110853 32 G11/2 G1/2 G11/4 970x150x150
VS0110855 40 DN 65 G1/2 G11/4 970x220x220
97
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Figure 3.7.31 Characteristic diagram of separator DN 25.
0
4
5
6
7
8
9
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

l
o
s
s

P

[
k
P
a
]
Flow Q [l/h]
6000
10
11
12
P
P1
P2
5000
3
2
1
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
0
1
2
3
4
5
0 2000 4000 6000 8000
P
r
e
s
u
r
e

l
o
s
s

P

[
k
P
a
]
Flow Q [l/h]
12000
6
7
8
P
P1
P2
11000
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
0
1
2
3
0,5
1,5
0 2000 4000 6000 8000
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

l
o
s
s

P

[
k
P
a
]
Flow Q [l/h]
20000
2,5
P
P1
P2
18000 16000 14000 12000 10000
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
98
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.7.4.1 Functioning principle of the hydraulic separator
When creating distribution systems for central heating systems it is necessary to realise the importance of the hydraulic separator.
Its function is to render independent the various circuits of the system connected to the distribution manifold to avoid the possibility of
reducing the performance of the pumps or even burning them and generating parasite currents that maintain parts of the system hot even
when the pump is not running. In order to understand how the hydraulic separate can render the various parts of the circuit independent,
consider a system without this important component.
By starting up the pump a difference in pressure is generated P between the supply manifold and the return manifold that can influence
the circuits supplied by the pumps and despite the fact that they are off. This influence can generate parasite currents that tend to
create an inverse circulation from the return manifold to the supply manifold.
Figure 3.7.34 System without hydraulic separator, start-up of a pump.
5
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

If the pump is also activated, besides overcoming the pressure loss of the heating circuit, it must also overcome the pressure difference
P generated by the pump .
Figure 3.7.35 System without hydraulic separator, start-up of second pump.
5
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

99
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
The situation worsens for pump which, if activated, must overcome the pressure difference generated by pumps and .
Figure 3.7.36 System without hydraulic separator, start-up of third pump.
5
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

The situations described above could have negative effects on the distribution system.
The pumps are forced into working out of field, and, if over-worked, they will rapidly burn out.
The pumps are not capable of guaranteeing the power requested by the user; this phenomenon is greater if the distribution system is
composed of pumps of different sizes (big and small). In this case the smaller pumps must spend the greater part of their energy to
overcome the opposing head generated by the lager pumps.
It is possible to detect hot parts of the system even though the pumps are not running; the return connections on the radiators or return
manifolds of the floor heating circuits may be hotter than the respective connections or return manifolds. This effect is caused by the
parasite circulation that begins when the pressure difference P is more significant.
Figure 3.7.37 System with hydraulic separator.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

The introduction of the hydraulic separator allows a considerable reduction in the difference in pressure P between the supply and the
return manifold. This difference in pressure becomes equal to the value of the internal hydraulic resistance of the separator itself.
100
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.7.4.2 Calculation of the temperatures generated by the separator
The hydraulic separator resolves the problem of interference among the pumps of the single circuitss by making them independent but
effects the temperatures in that within them there are mixing pheonomena that can be quite significant. It can happen that the hot fluid
coming from the generator of heat mixes with the cold fluid returning from the system circuits thus reducing the supply of the same.
In dimensioning the heating systems it is therefore important to keep in consideration the possibility of this variation in temperature in order
to correctly calcolate the thermal output. The variations in temperature generated by the hydraulic separator depend on the configuration
of the system and in particolar on the difference between the flow in the primary circuit and the secondary circuit.
By indicating the inlet and outlet temperature from the separator in the primary side with T
1P
and T
2P
, and the inlet and outlet temperature
from the separator in the secondary side with T
2S
and T
1S
, with m
P
and m
s
the flows respectively in the primary side (supplied by the
generator) and in the secondary side (required of the system) and Q being the thermal output requested by the system, the energy balance
on both sides of the hydraulic separator is given by the following two relations.
Q = c
P
m
P
(T
P1
- T
P2
) [3.7.4]
Q = c
s
m
s
(TS1 - T
S2
) [3.7.5]
where c
p
is the specific heat of the water equal to 4190 J/Ckg.
a) Flow in the primary circuit equal to the flow in the secondary circuit
Figure 3.7.38 Equal flows in the primary and secondary circuits.
TP1
TP2
TS2
TS1
2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir
S
.p
.A
.
If the flows present in the primary circuit and in the secondary circuit are the same
m
P
= m
S
then the effects of internal mixing are absent and therefore the temperatures have the following relationship:
T
P1
= T
S1
T
P2
= T
S2
With the supply temperature in the primary side T
P1
[C], the flow in the primary m
P
[kg/s] and the thermal output requested by the system
Q [W] the return temperature in the primary and secondary sides can be determined by utilizing the equation [3.7.4]:
Q
c
p
m
p
T
S2
= T
P2
= TP1 -
101
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
b) Flow in the primary circuit greater than the flow in the secondary circuit
Figure 3.7.39 Flow in the primary circuit greater than in the secondary circuit.
TP1
TP2
TS2
TS1
2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir
S
.p
.A
.
Should the flow in the primary circuit be greater than the flow in the secondary circuit
m
P
> m
S
the water will begin to mix and will cause an increase in the return temperature of the primary circuit.
We have, therefore:
T
P1
= T
S1
T
P2
> T
S2
With the supply temperature in the primary side T
P1
[C], the flow in the primary m
P
[kg/s] eand the thermal output requested by the system
Q [W] it is possible to determine the return temperature in the primary side.
Q
T
P2
= T
P1
-
c
P
m
P
With the flow m
P
[kg/s] in the secondary side, the return temperature T
S2
can be determined:
Q Q
T
S2
= T
S1
- = T
P1
-
c
P
m
S
c
P
m
S
c) Flow in the primary circuit lower than the flow in the secondary circuit
Figure 3.7.40 Flow in the primary circuit less than the flow in the secondary circuit.
TP1
TP2
TS2
TS1
2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir
S
.p
.A
.
Should the flow in the primary circuit be less than the flow in the secondary circuit
m
P
< m
S
the water will begin to mix with the effect of decreasing the supply temperature in the secondary circuit. We have therefore:
T
P1
> T
S1
102
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
T
P2
= T
S2
the supply temperature on the primary side T
P1
[C], the flow in the primary circuit m
P
[kg/s] and the required heat output of the system Q
[W] the return temperature in the primary side can be determined.
Q
T
P2
= T
P1
-
c
p
m
P
With the flow m
s
[kg/s] in the secondary side the supply temperature T
S1
can be determined, to be used for dimensioning the system
(radiators, floor heating, etc.):
Q Q
T
S1
= T
S2
+ = T
P2
+
c
P
m
S
c
P
m
S
3.7.4.3 Example 1
Consider a system such as then one shown in the figure and determine the supply temperature to the heating circuit.
Figure 3.7.41 System layout.
R
a
d
i
a
t
o
r

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
R
a
d
i
a
n
t

f
l
o
o
r

2
R
a
d
i
a
n
t

f
l
o
o
r

1
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Radiator circuit
- Flow m
1
= 400 kg/h
- Heat output Q
1
= 9 kW
Floor heating circuit 1
- Flow
m
2
= 330 kg/h (boiler side)
- Heat output Q
2
= 5 kW
Floor heating circuit 2
- Flow
m
3
= 520 kg/h (boiler side)
- Heat output Q
3
= 22 kW
Generator
- Supply temperature T
P1
=70C
- Flow m
P
= 2500 kg/h
- Heat output Q
G
= 50 kW
103
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Total heat output required by the system
By summing the required outputs of each heating circuit we obtain:
Q = Q
1
+ Q
2
- Q
3
= 9000 + 15000 + 22000 = 46000 W
Flow of the secondary
The flow in the secondary circuit is obtained by summing the flows of the single heating circuits; with floor heating systems supplied by
mixers, the flow to be considered is obviously the flow of the boiler side (diversion flow).
m
S
= m
1
+ m
2
+ m
3
= 400 + 330 + 520 = 1250 kg/h = 0.3472 kg/s
Flow of the primary
The flow in the primary circuit is the maximum flow supplied by the generator pump:
m
P
= 2500 kg/h = 0.6944 kg/s
Supply temperature of the secondary circuit
In this case the flow of the primary circuit is greater than the flow in the secondary circuit and therefore the separator works with a supply
temperature in the secondary circuit equal to the temperature in the primary circuit:
T
S1
= T
P1
= 70C
Return temperature of the primary circuit
The return temperature is:
Q 46000
T
P2
= T
P1
- = 70 -
c
p
m
P
4190 0.6944
= 54C
Return temperature of the secondary circuit
In these conditions the supply temperature of the secondary is equal to the supply temperature of the primary:
Q Q 46000
T
S2
= T
S1
- = T
P1
- = 70 -
c
p
m
S
c
p
m
S
4190 0.3472
=38C
Figure 3.7.42 System layout, flows and temperatures.
R
a
d
i
a
t
o
r

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
R
a
d
i
a
n
t

f
l
o
o
r

2
R
a
d
i
a
n
t

f
l
o
o
r

1
70C
70C
38C
54C
2500 kg/h
1250 kg/h
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
104
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.7.4.4 Example 2
Consider a system like the one shown in the layout in the figure and determine the supply temperature of the heating system.
c
i
r
c
u
i
t
o

r
a
d
i
a
t
o
r
i

1
c
i
r
c
u
i
t
o

r
a
d
i
a
t
o
r
i

2
c
i
r
c
u
i
t
o

r
a
d
i
a
t
o
r
i

3
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Radiator circuit 1
- Flow m
1
= 770 kg/h
- Heat output Q
1
= 9 kW
Radiator circuit 2
- Flow m
2
= 1900 kg/h
- Heat output Q
2
= 22 kW
Radiator circuit 3
- Flow m
3
= 1290 kg/h
- Heat output Q
3
= 15 kW
Generatore
P1
= 75C
- Flow m
P
= 2500 kg/h
- Heat output Q
G
= 50 kW
Total heat output required by the system
By summing the required outputs of each heating circuit, we obtain:
Q = Q
1
- Q
2
- Q
3
= 9000 + 15000 + 22000 = 46000 W
Flow of the secondary circuit
The flow of the secondary circuit is obtained by summing the flows of the single heating circuits:
m
S
= m
1
+ m
2
+ m
3
= 770 + 1900 + 1290 = 3960 kg/h = 1.1 kg/s
Flow of the primary circuit
The flow in the primary circuit is the maximum flow supplied by the generator pump:
m
P
= 2500 kg/h = 0.6944 kg/s
105
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Return temperature of the primary circuit
The return temperature is:
Q 46000
T
P2
= T
P1
- = 75 -
c
p
m
P
4190 0.6944
= 59C
Return temperature of the secondary circuit
In this case the flow in the primary circuit is below the flow in the secondary circuit and therefore the return temperature in the secondary
circuit is the same as the return in the primary circuit:
T
S2
= T
P2
= 59C
Supply temperature of the secondary circuit
The supply temperature in the secondary circuit and that must be used for feeling the heating circuits is:
Q 46000
T
S1
= T
S2
+ = 59 +
c
p
m
S
4190 1.1
= 69C
Figure 3.7.44 System layout, flows and temperatures.
75C
69C
59C
59C
2500 kg/h
3960 kg/h
R
a
d
i
a
t
o
r

c
i
r
c
u
i
t

1
R
a
d
i
a
t
o
r

c
i
r
c
u
i
t

2
R
a
d
i
a
t
o
r

c
i
r
c
u
i
t

3
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
106
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.7.5 Dimensioning of the mixing groups
Dimensioning of the mixing groups is demonstrated with an example. The technique adopted is also valid for high temperature distribution
groups where the total flows that transit inside the groups must be employed due to the fact that with these distribution groups there is no
mixing process.
3.7.5.1 Example
The task is to dimension mixing modules for supplying three low temperature zones for which we know the following characteristics.
Boiler
Mc
= 70C
Zone 1
- Flow m
u,1
= 1854 kg/h (utility side)
- Heat output Q
1
= 15.3 kW
Mu,1
= 40.6C
- Return temperature T
Ru,1
= 33.5C
- Pressure loss P
u,1
= 32 kPa
Zona 2
- Flow m
u,2
- Heat output Q
2
= 12.3 kW
Mu,1
= 40.6C
Ru,2
= 33.6C
- Pressure loss P
u,2
= 29 kPa
Zone 3
- Flow m
u,3
- Heat output Q
3
= 12.2 kW
Mu,3
= 40.6C
Ru,3
= 31.1C
- Pressure loss P
u,3
= 39 kPa
Zone 2 Zone 1 Zone 3
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
107
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Calculation of the diversion flows
The diversion flows are on the boiler side; the mixers divert part of the flow coming form the boiler to mix it with the return water from the
heating circuits. In order to dimensions the heating plants we need to know the flows on the boiler side that can be calculated by using the
formulas indicated in paragraph 3.7.1.2, from which we obtain:
m
c
= m
u

(T
Mu
- T
Ru
)
(T
Mc
- T
Ru
)
And therefore, for the three mixers, the flows on the boiler side (diversion flows) are:
(40. 6 - 33. 5)
(70 - 33. 5)
m
c,1
= m
u,1
= 1854
(T
Mu,1
- TRu,1)
(T
Mc
- TRu,1)
= 360 kg/h
(40. 6 - 33. 6)
(70 - 33. 6)
m
c,2
= m
u,2
= 1511
(T
Mu,2
- TRu,2)
(T
Mc
- TRu,2)
= 290 kg/h
(40. 6 - 31.1)
(70 - 31.1)
m
c,3
= m
u,3
= 1104
(T
Mu,3
- TRu,3)
(T
Mc
- TRu,3)
= 269 kg/h
Total flow on boiler side
The total flow on the boiler side is given by the sum of the diverted flows from each mixer:
m
c
= m
c,1
+ m
c,2
+ m
c,3
= 360 + 290 + 269 = 919 kg/h
Return temperature to the boiler
This is given by the energy balance on the distribution manifold (return side) between the inlet and the outlet:
m
c
T
Rc
= m
c,1
T
Ru,1
- m
c,2
T
Ru,2
+ m
c,3
T
Ru,3
from which we obtain:
T
Rc
=
m
c
m
c,1
T
Ru,1
- m
c,2
T
Ru,2
- m
c,3
T
Ru,3
=32.8C
Choice of the size of the mixing module 1
In order to choose the correct size we must compare the total pressure loss generated by the entire system separator+manifold+mixer+user
with the head supplied by the pump in relation to the required flow. The pressure losses in the separator could be overlooked in that they
are compensated for by the boiler pump, but to have a greater safety margin we prefer to take them into consideration. It is necessary to
determine the pressure losses generated by each single element that makes up the system and we start by considering the mixer with the
smallest size: DN 25.
Hydraulic separator. The pressure loss is evaluated when the total flow is flowing through the separator m
c
. From the diagrams in paragraph
3.7.4, in correspondence with the flow rate of 919 kg/h, the pressure loss is identified p
separator
= 0.3 kPa.
108
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Figure 3.7.46 Identification of the pressure loss in the separator.
1
2
3
4
5
P
P1
P2
2000 1000 0
919
0,3
Flow Q [l/h]
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

l
o
s
s

P

[
k
P
a
]
0
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Manifold. We proceed in the same way, using the diagrams in paragraph 3.7.3. In correspondence with flow m
c
= 919 kg/h the pressure
loss is identified p
manifold
= 0.6 kPa considering the curve of the 3-way manifold.
Figure 3.7.47 Identification of the pressure loss in the manifold.
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

l
o
s
s

P

[
k
P
a
]
Flow Q [l/h]
1500 1000 500 0
0
1
2
P2 P1
3
919
0,6
3-way manifold
2-way manifold
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Mixer. From the diagrams of paragraph 3.7.1 the pressure loss in the mixer is identified and the head given by the pump at maximum speed.
In this case, the flow to be considered is the flow on the utility side in that the curves are based on the flow of water of the heating circuit.
In correspondence with the flow m
u,1
= 1854 kg/h, the pressure loss is identified p
mixer
= 12 kPa and a pump head of H = 38 kPa.
Figure 3.7.48 Identification of the pressure loss and the pump head of the mixer.
0
10
20
30
40
0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 1854
12
38
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

l
o
s
s

P

[
k
P
a
]
Flow Q [l/h]
P
P2 P1
Head of pump
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
109
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
The total pressure loss is equal to:
p
total
= p
separatore
+p
collettor
+p
mixer
+p
utility
= 0.3 + 0.6 + 12 + 32 = 44.9 kPa
In comparing it with the pump head it can be seen that the mixer DN 25 is not enough to guarantee the required flow:
(H = 38 kPa) < (p
total
= 44.9 kPa)
We therefore consider a larger mixer of DN 32 and we proceed in the same way.
Hydraulic separator. p
separator
= 0.1 kPa.
Manifold. p
manifold
= 0.3 kPa.
Mixer. p
mixer
= 3.3 kPa e H = 22 kPa.
The total pressure loss is equal to:
p
total
= p
separator
+p
manifold
+p
mixer
+p
utility
= 0.1 + 0.3 + 3.3 + 32 = 35.7 kPa
and when we compare it to the pump head we can verify that the mixer size DN 32 is sufficient for feeding the first part of the system:
(H = 38 kPa) > (p
total
= 35.7 kPa).
Choice of the size of the mixing module 2
We use the same procedure to analyse the size DN 25 considering the pressure losses of the manifodl and the separator pertinent to DN
32. In fact the size of the manifold and the separator must correspond to the biggest mixer. By carrying out the same procedure for the
second mixer we obtain a DN 25.
separator
= 0.1 kPa.
Manifold. p
manifold
= 0.3 kPa.
Mixer. p
mixer
= 8.7 kPa e H = 42 kPa.
p
total
= p
separator
+ p
manifold
+ p
mixer
+ p
utility
= 0.1 + 0.3 + 8.7 + 29 = 38.1 kPa
(H = 42 kPa) > (p
total
= 38.1 kPa).
Selection of the size of the mixing module 3
For the third mixer we obtain the size DN 25. The pressure losses in the separator and in the manifold must correspond to those of size DN
32 in that these components must be of the biggest size amongst the mixing modules.
separator
= 0.1 kPa.
Manifold. p
manifold
= 0.3 kPa.
Mixer. p
mixer
= 5.5 kPa e H = 46.5 kPa.
p
total
= p
separator
+ p
manifold
+ p
mixer
+ p
utility
= 0.1 + 0.3 + 5.5 + 39 = 44.9 kPa
(H = 46.5 kPa) > (p
total
= 44.9 kPa).
110
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Manifold and hydraulic separator
The size of the manifold and the hydraulic separator, as mentioned previously, must correspond to the biggest size among all of the mixing
modules. Therefore, we must use a DN 32 both for the manifold and for the hydraulic separator.
Zone 1
DN 32
Zone 2
DN 25
Zone 3
DN 25
DN 32
DN 32
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
111
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.8 V-DRYAIR isotherm dehumidifiers for cooling systems
3.8.1 Condensation and the dehumidification of air
Radiant systems absorb sensible heat but they cannot absorb latent heat, or, that is, the heat caused by the condensation of the water
contained in the air (phase transition). Just as the humidity contained in the air condenses onto a cold glass, it can also condense onto a
cold surface, such as the radiant floor that is operating in the cooling mode. Depending on the quantity of water contained in the air and
therefore its relative humidity, it will be necessary to dehumidify the environment in order to reduce the possibility of condensation forming
on the floor surface. Air has the capacity of containing a certain quantity of water in the form of vapour; this capacity is represented by the
absolute humidity AH (g of vapour in one kg of dry air) and it has a maximum value (saturation) which is an increasing funtion of the air
temperature T. Relative humidity RH is the ratio of the quantity of water vapour contained in a mass of air to the maximum quantity of
water vapour that the same mass of air can contain at the same temperature conditions (saturation). Relative humidity is measured as a
percentage, if relative humidity is 100% this means that the saturation conditions have been reached and condensation commences, the
so-called dew temperature has therefore been reached. This means that a descrease in temperature results in an unstable state of the
humid air, in which there is an excessive amount of vapour. Equilibrium is reached through condensation, that is, the transition phase from
the gaseous state to the liquid state of the excess vapour. This phenomenon occurs on contact with cool surfaces, that is, those surfaces
that possess a lower temperature than the temperature of dew, a value that is deduced from the Mollier diagram.
Supposing relative humidity is 50% and air temperature is 37C, it is possible to determine at what temperature condensation will commence.
By cooling the air, starting out at the point characterised by T=37C and RH=0.5 and descending vertically (maintaining absolute humidity
AH constant) toward the saturation curve. On reaching the saturation curve we identify a dew temperature of 25C. This means that if a
mass of air at 37C with relative humidity of 50% comes into contact with a radiant surface at a temperature of 25C, the result will be the
formation of condensation.
Figura 3.8.1 Mollier diagram, calculation of the temperature of dew.
50
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

T

[
C
]
Absolute humidity UA [g
V
/kg
AS
]
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-5
-10
25 20 15 10 5 0 30 35
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Relative humidity UR
T=37C
UR=0,5
T=25C
S
a
tu
ra
tio
n
c
u
rv
e
U
R
=
1
.0
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
To avoid this problem it is necessary to dehumidify the air thus reducing its humidity content. In fact, if we consider a mass of air at the
same temperature of 37C but with a relative humidity of 35%, we note that the dew temperature falls to 19C. In this way the temperature
of the radiant surface can be reduced to 20/21C to increase the cooling performance and avoid the risk of condensation formation.
Figure 3.8.2 Temperature of dew of the air at 37C with different values of relative humidity.
50
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

T

[
C
]
Absolute humidity UA [g
V
/kg
AS
]
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-5
-10
25 20 15 10 5 0 30 35
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Relative humidity UR

T=37C
UR=0.5
T=25C
T=19C
T=37C
UR=0.35
S
a
tu
ra
tio
n
c
u
rv
e
U
R
=
1
.0
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
112
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.8.2 V-DRYAIR 250V and V-DRYAIR 250H isotherm dehumidifiers
he V-DRYAIR 250 dehumidifiers are used for summer dehumidification of rooms that are cooled with the use of radiant panels.
The load-bearing structure is in galvanized sheet metal and the ventilation part is made up of a centrifugal ventilator and a motor with the
choice of three speeds that guarantees efficiency and a silent operation. Air treatment is ensured by a refrigeration circuit composed of pre-
treatment and post-treatment batteries in copper pipes and aluminium fins, an alternative compressor mounted on anti-vibration supports
or springs, expansion capillary and dehydrator filter. The V-DRYAIR 250 range delivers air at space neutral temperatures. This characteristic
is guaranteed by the presence of a post-cooling battery in which water from the radiant panel system is circulated.
V-DRYAIR 250 is controlled by the control and adjustment system, V-CLIMA that starts the dehumidifier when the relative humidity in the
room is higher than the set value. A series of accessories, supplied on demand, allow an optimum installation for all system types.
The V-DRYAIR 250 dehumidifier is available in 2 versions:
V-DRYAIR 250V: suitable for vertical installation inside a niche. The dehumidifier is completed with a casing in wood and a cover grid
in wood or metal.
V-DRYAIR 250H: suitable for ceiling installation and ductable both in delivery and return.
Figure 3.8.3 V-DRYAIR 250H for ceiling installation, ductable. Figure 3.8.4 V-DRYAIR 250V for recessed wall installation.

Figure 3.8.5 Casing for recessed wall installation and covering grid in wood.

113
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Table 3.8.1
V-DRYAIR 250V and V-DRYAIR 250H technical data Value
Measurement
unit
Thermo-technical data
Person load in room
(1)
6-8
Nominal condensation capacity
(2)
0.78 l/h
Nominal air flow rate 250 m
3
/h
Total nominal water flow absorbed by the pre and post cooling battery 170 l/h
Nominal refrigerating power absorbed by pre and post air cooling battery 800 W
P pre and post cooling batteries 6.8 kPa
Refrigerating gas R134a 280 g
Electrical data
Power supply 230/1/50 V/ph/Hz
Nominal current absorbed
(2)
V-DRYAIR 250V 1.8 A
V-DRYAIR 250H 1,9 A
Maximum current absorbed 2.6 A
Nominal power absorbed
(2)
V-DRYAIR 250V 360 W
V-DRYAIR 250H 400 W
Maximum power absorbed 400 W
Degree of protection of shell IP54
Centrifugal fan 3 speed options
Dimensions
V-DRYAIR 250V without recessed wall box and front panel (LxPxH) 729x212x705 mm
Recessed wall box (LxPxH) 740x230x750 mm
V-DRYAIR 250H (LxPxH) 593x800x250 mm
Internal dimensions of fan supply 208x77 mm
Weight
V-DRYAIR 250V 37 kg
V-DRYAIR 250H 40 kg
Hydraulic attachments
Number of hydraulic attachments 2
V-DRYAIR 250V G 3/8 F.
V-DRYAIR 250H G 1/2 F.
Operational limits
Water temperature pre/post treatment battery 12-22 C
Dry bulb temperature 15-35 C
Relative humidity 45-90 %
(1) Datum that depends on the level of metabolic activity and the radiant temperature in the room.
(2) Measured under the following conditions:
a. Nominal air flow of 250 m
3
/h.
b. Return air at 25C with R.H. of 65%.
c. Nominal water flow of 170 l/h.
d. Temperature of incoming water at pre and post cooling batteries of 15C.
114
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.8.3 V-DRYAIR 450H isotherm dehumidifers
The V-DRYAIR 450H dehumidifiers are ductable units and have been designed for the dehumidification of rooms that are cooled with
radiant panels. Unlike traditional dehumidifiers, and like the smaller versions offered by Valsir, V-DRYAIR 450H is capable of delivering air
at space neutral temperature. This characteristic is guaranteed by the presence of a post-cooling battery in which water from the radiant
panel system is made to flow. The V-DRYAIR 450H dehumidifiers also allow the removal of air both in summer months and winter months,
by means of an optional kit for renewing the air that ensures the delivery of air at space neutral temperature and that can be managed
with an independent timer. With the use of appropriate dampers for air ducts (not supplied by Valsir) it is possible to decide which function
to use: complete recirculation (dehumidification) or renewal, or else mix these two functions by dehumidifying and renewing the room
air contemporarily. In combination with an energy recovery device, which is available as an accessory, it is possible to preheat/pre-cool
the process air, and mix the flow with the room emission air, thus increasing the efficiency of the unit and reducing energy consumption.
In difficult summer conditions it is also possible to make an integration to the radiant cooling system by increasing the flow of water to the
post-cooling battery, in order to deliver cooler air to the room.
The design standards of these machines take into account the specific comfort conditions of the air of the rooms that are cooled with
radiant panels (air temperature in the rooms 25C, relative humidity in the room 60%, average radiant temperature of the surface of 22 to
25C). V-DRYAIR 450H has been designed for medium-big residential areas and public practices with an average of 12 to 20 people per
unit.
Figure 3.8.6 V-DRYAIR 450H for ceiling installation, ductable.
Table 3.8.2
V-DRYAIR 450H technical data Value
Measurement
unit
Person load in room
(1)
12-20
(2)
1.1 l/h
3
/h
P pre and post cooling batteries 7 kPa
Available head (at 450 m
3
/h) max. 145 Pa
Electrical data
(2)
2.5 A
(2)
410 W
External protection fuse 10 A
Protection fuse of the main ventilatore 2.5 A
115
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Measurement
unit
Dimensions
Weight
V-DRYAIR 450H 72 kg
Operational limits
3
/h.
3.8.4 V-DRYAIR 900H isotherm dehumidifiers
The V-DRYAIR 900H dehumidifiers are ductable units and have been designed for the dehumidification of rooms that are cooled with
radiant panels. Unlike traditional dehumidifiers, and like the smaller versions offered by Valsir, V-DRYAIR 900H is capable of delivering air
at space neutral temperature. This characteristic is guaranteed by the presence of a post-cooling battery in which water from the radiant
panel system is made to flow. The V-DRYAIR 900H dehumidifiers also allow the removal of air both in summer months and winter months,
by means of an optional kit for renewing the air that ensures the delivery of air at space neutral temperature and that can be managed
with an independent timer. With the use of appropriate dampers for air ducts (not supplied by Valsir) it is possible to decide which function
to use: complete recirculation (dehumidification) or renewal, or else mix these two functions by dehumidifying and renewing the room
air contemporarily. In combination with an energy recovery device, which is available as an accessory, it is possible to preheat/pre-cool
the process air, and mix the flow with the room emission air, thus increasing the efficiency of the unit and reducing energy consumption.
In difficult summer conditions it is also possible to make an integration to the radiant cooling system by increasing the flow of water to the
post-cooling battery, in order to deliver cooler air to the room.
The design standards of these machines take into account the specific comfort conditions of the air of the rooms that are cooled with
radiant panels (air temperature in the rooms 25C, relative humidity in the room 60%, average radiant temperature of the surface of 22 to
25C). V-DRYAIR 900H has been designed for medium-big residential areas and public practices with an average load of 25 to 30 people
per unit.
Figure 3.8.7 V-DRYAIR 900H for ceiling installation, ductable.
116
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Table 3.8.3
Measurement
unit
Person load in room
(1)
25-30
(2)
2.6 l/h
3
/h
P pre and post cooling batteries 12 kPa
Available head (at 900 m
3
/h) max. 200 Pa
Electrical data
(2)
5.2 A
(2)
900 W
External protection fuse 10 A
Protection fuse of the main ventilatore 2.5 A
Dimensions
Weight
V-DRYAIR 900H 95 kg
Operational limits
3
/h.
117
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.9 Control systems
The control systems for heating systems are composed of two principal components: the control unit and the V-CLIMA climatic control
unit. The control units are employed to create the electric connection between the thermo-electric heads of the circuits with the room
thermostats, the V-CLIMA control units allow a variable point management of the system by varying the temperature of the supply water
of the heating circuits in relation to the external climatic conditions.
3.9.1 V-CLIMA system
V-CLIMA is the climatic adjustment system created by Valsir for the management of floor heating and cooling systems. It is composed of
a principal master unit to which the expansion units for the management of up to 6 climatic zones can be connected. The system detects
the external temperature, the temperatures and the humidity of each single zone, actuates directly the mixing valve and varies the supply
temperature to the system of each zone. With V-CLIMA it is possible to maximise energy saving because the supply temperature to the
circuits is a direct function of the climatic conditions; with the heating mode, the lower the external temperature the higher will be the supply
temperature to the circuits. With the cooling mode, the system is capable of identifying the risk of the formation of condensation by acting
on the humidifiers installed in each single zone. V-CLIMA, controls boiler and chiller ignition and automatically switches over from the winter
mode to the summer mode and vice versa.
The summer-winter switchover can be carried out manually or automatically, by simply setting the external switchover temperature.
The operational conditions of the system can be verified at any time, and it is possible to read and intervene in the case of malfunction
alarms as well to modify the system configuration. The V-CLIMA functions are numerous, but some are worth mentioning, in particular,
the Start-up function that manages the supply temperature when the system is first started in a gradual manner thus avoiding thermal
shocks inside the screed, in accordance with the European Standard UNI EN 1264. Another important function of V-CLIMA is Speed-up,
that reduces the heating time of the rooms to a minimum, by maximizing the supply temperature should the system be turned on a second
time, until the rooms have reached the desired temperature.
By means of the remote user terminal installed in a position of choice inside the building, it is possible to verify the operating conditions of
the system, read and intervene in the case of malfunction signals as well as modify the configuration of the system. It is also possible to set
a weekly functioning program, both for the floor system and for the dehumidifiers, by using the V-CLIMA system as a weekly thermostat
with timer with three different room temperatures, the winter mode, the reduced winter mode and the summer mode.
Figure 3.9.1 Main unit (master). Figure 3.9.2 Expansion unit.

Figure 3.9.3 User terminal.
118
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.9.1.1 V-CLIMA system components
Table 3.9.1 V-CLIMA adjustment kit - main unit.
Cod. VS0111001
Principal unit complete with connection kit, clock, supply probe, room temperature/
humidity probe and external temperature probe.
Main functions
Heating/cooling Thermostat with timer
Remote user terminal (optional) Remote
control (optional).
Working frequency 20/60 Vdc and 24 Vac (50/60 Hz)
Absorbed power 25 VA
Operating temperature -10C60C, U.R.<90%
Protection degree IP20
Dimension
L 140 mm
H 60 mm
B 110 mm
Inlets
Temperature/room humidity
External temperature
Supply temperature
Summer/winter switchover
Remote On/Off
Chiller alarm
Boiler alarm
Dehumidifier alarm
Generic alarm
Outlets
Servomotor three points or 010 V
System pump On/Off
Boiler On/Off
Dehumidifier On/Off
Summer/winter indicator
119
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Table 3.9.2 V-CLIMA expansion kit.
Cod. VS0111003
Expansion unit complete with connection kit, supply probe and room
temperature/humidity probe.
Main functions Heating/cooling
Working frequency 20/60 Vdc and 24 Vac (50/60 Hz)
Absorbed power 15 VA
Dimension
L 70 mm
H 60 mm
B 110 mm
Inlets
Temperature/room humidity
External temperature
Supply temperature
On/Off remoto
Dehumidifier alarm
Generic alarm
Outlets
Servomotor three points or 010 V
System pump On/Off
Dehumidifier On/Off
Table 3.9.3 User terminal.
Cod. VS0111051
Semi-graphical monochrome user terminal to replicate the information of the climatic
control unit in any area of the household.
Working frequency from the main unit or 18/30 Vdc
Absorption 0,8 W
Dimension
L 156 mm
H 82 mm
B 30 mm
120
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.9.1.2 Climatic adjustment curve of the V-CLIMA system
The climatic adjustment curve in heating and cooling of the V-CLIMA system is easy to program by entering 6 fundamental parameters,
shown in the following diagram.
Figure 3.9.4 Climatic curve of the V-CLIMA system for heating and cooling and main programming parameters.
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
10
20
30
40
50
60
S
u
p
p
l
y

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

[
C
]
0
2
1
Tm,max
Tm,prog
Te,prog
Tm,20C
Tm,raff
Te,raff
3
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Point 1 on the diagram. Supply temperature to the system in the heating mode T a)
m,20C
with external temperature of 20C.
Point 2 on the diagram. Supply temperature to the system in the heating mode T b)
m,prog
at the external project temperature T
e,prog
.
Maximum supply temperature limit to system in the heating mode T c)
m,max
.
Point 3 on the diagram. External start-up temperature of summer mode T d)
e,raff
(to be programmed if the automatic summer-winter
switchover has been set).
Point 3 on the diagram. Supply temperature to the system in cooling mode T e)
m,raff
(fixed point functioning).
The programming of these parameters allows the V-CLIMA adjustment system to operate with different adjustment frames in relation to the
external climatic conditions as indicated in the following diagram.
Figure 3.9.5 Adjustment frames in relation to the external temperature.
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
10
20
30
40
50
60
S
u
p
p
l
y

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

[
C
]
0
C
o
o
l
i
n
g
S
u
m
m
e
r
-
w
i
n
t
e
r

t
r
a
n
s
i
t
i
o
n

Climatic adjustment
Limitation of the curve
to the maximum
temperature allowed
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
121
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Climatic adjustment range
In this phase the V-CLIMA control unit activates the source that supplies the heating fluid and varies the supply temperature to the floor
system in relation to the external temperature by actuating the mixing valve. The curve gradient is calculated in relation to the parameters
T
m,20C
, T
m,prog
and T
e,prog
.
Adjustment range with limitation of the maximum supply temperature
Once the maximum temperature allowed has been reached, set with the parameter T
m,max
, the V-CLIMA system supplies the floor system
with fluid at a constant temperature regardless of the external temperature.
Summer winter transition phase
During this phase, the system deactivates the boiler and the source of refrigerated water. The limit of this phase is defined by the parameter T
e,raff
.
Adjustment band in the cooling mode
During this phase, the system is supplied with fluid at a temperature that is set with the parameter T
m,raff
. The system will maintain the
set supply temperature until the maximum humidity limit has been reached in the room (programmable); in this case the V-CLIMA system
closes the mixing valve thus preventing it from supplying refrigerating water and at the same time it activates the dehumidification system
and keeps it running until the set humidity level has been reached.
The V-CLIMA control unit is supplied with default parameters already set. These can be modified by the user.
Table 3.9.4 Default parameters set in the V-CLIMA system.
Parameter Value
Supply temperature T
m,20C
with external temperature of 20C 20C
Supply temperature T
m,prog
at the project external temperature 40C
Minimum project external temperature T
e,prog
0C
Maximum supply temperature allowed T
m,max
50C
Summer mode start-up temperature T
e,raff
25C
Supply temperature in the summer period T
m,raff
16C
Winter room set-point temperature 20C
Reduced room set-point temperature 17C
Summer set-point room temperature 25C
122
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.9.1.3 Connection schemes
Figure 3.9.6 V-CLIMA connection scheme for space heating only with 220 V motor.
2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir
S
.p
.A
.
F
o
r

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s
u
s
e

w
i
r
e
s

w
i
t
h
1
.
5

m
m
q

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
S
a
f
e
t
y

t
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
e
r
c
l
a
s
s

I
I
,

2
5

V
A

+

1
5

V
A
f
o
r

e
a
c
h

a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
e
x
p
a
n
d
e
r
F
o
r

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

p
r
o
b
e
,
u
s
e

a

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

b
i
p
o
l
a
r

w
i
r
e
w
i
t
h

a

s
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

1

m
m
q
R
o
o
m

p
r
o
b
e

z
o
n
e

1
N
T
C

t
y
p
e
S
u
p
p
l
y

p
r
o
b
e
z
o
n
e

1
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
p
r
o
b
e
F
o
r

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

p
r
o
b
e
s

u
s
e
a

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

w
i
r
e

w
i
t
h

a

1

m
m
q

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
r

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s
u
s
e

w
i
r
e
s

w
i
t
h
1
.
5

m
m
q

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
r

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s
u
s
e

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

w
i
r
e
w
i
t
h

1

m
m
q

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
M
o
t
o
r

o
f

m
i
x
i
n
g
v
a
l
v
e

z
o
n
e

6
2
2
0

V

m
o
t
o
r
S
u
p
p
l
y

p
r
o
b
e
z
o
n
e

6
R
o
o
m
p
r
o
b
e
z
o
n
e

6
N
T
C

t
y
p
e
M
o
t
o
r

o
f

m
i
x
i
n
g
v
a
l
v
e

z
o
n
e

1
2
2
0

V

m
o
t
o
r
Mixer pump zone 1
Boiler hook-up
Relay with 220 V coil
Mixer pump zone N
230/24 Vac
G
G
0
230 Vac
N
L
Rx-/Tx-
Rx+/Tx+
GND
GND
C1
C4
C5
NO1
NO4
NO5
NC5
NO2
NO3
TLan
J
6
J
7
J
8
J
9
J
1
0
J
1
1
J
5
P
rg
E
s
c
J
1
J
2
J
3
J
4
G
+5VREF
IDC1
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y3
Y2
Y1
+24VDC
G0
GND
GND
SYNC
B1
B2
B3
B4
Chiller al.
Boiler al.
Dehumidifier al.
Generic al.
Inlets
On/off control unit
Summer/winter
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
J
5
J
6
J
7
J
8
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
9
J
1
0
Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
J
1
J
2
J
3
T+
T-
G
G0
GND
TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
J
5
J
6
J
7
J
8
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
9
J
1
0
Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
J
1
J
2
J
3
T+
T-
G
G0
GND
TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
J
5
J
6
J
7
J
8
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
9
J
1
0
Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
J
1
J
2
J
3
T+
T-
G
G0
GND
TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
J
5
J
6
J
7
J
8
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
9
J
1
0
Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
J
1
J
2
J
3
T+
T-
G
G0
GND
TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
J
5
J
6
J
7
J
8
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
9
J
1
0
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
9
J
1
0
Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
J
1
J
2
J
3
T+
T-
G
ID1
IDC1
ID2
ID3
G0 G0
GND
TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
ID2: zone 6 generic al.
ID3: zone 6 On/Off
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
it
c
h
z
o
n
e
2
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
it
c
h
z
o
n
e
3
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
it
c
h
z
o
n
e
4
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
it
c
h
z
o
n
e
5
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
it
c
h
z
o
n
e
6
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
M
NTC
NTC
M
NTC
NTC
NTC
C
O
M
C
l
o
s
e
O
p
e
n
C
O
M
C
l
o
s
e
O
p
e
n
123
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Figure 3.9.7 V-CLIMA connection scheme fpr heating and cooling with 220 V motor.
F
o
r

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s
u
s
e

w
i
r
e
s

w
i
t
h
1
.
5

m
m
q

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
S
a
f
e
t
y

t
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
e
r
c
l
a
s
s

I
I
,

2
5

V
A

+

1
5

V
A
f
o
r

e
a
c
h

a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
e
x
p
a
n
d
e
r
F
o
r

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

p
r
o
b
e
,
u
s
e

a

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

b
i
p
o
l
a
r

w
i
r
e
w
i
t
h

a

s
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

1

m
m
q
R
o
o
m

p
r
o
b
e

z
o
n
e

1
T
/
H

N
T
C
/
0
-
1

V

t
y
p
e
S
u
p
p
l
y

p
r
o
b
e
z
o
n
e

1
F
o
r

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

p
r
o
b
e
s

u
s
e

a
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

w
i
r
e

w
i
t
h

a

1

m
m
q

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
S
u
m
m
e
r
/
w
i
n
t
e
r

s
i
g
n
a
l
f
o
r

c
h
i
l
l
e
r

i
g
n
i
t
i
o
n

a
n
d
f
o
r

d
e
v
i
a
t
i
o
n

v
a
l
v
e
s

E
/
I
I
F
o
r

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s
u
s
e

w
i
r
e
s

w
i
t
h
1
.
5

m
m
q

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
r

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s
u
s
e

w
i
r
e
s

w
i
t
h
1
.
5

m
m
q

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
S
u
m
m
e
r
/
w
i
n
t
e
r

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
c
o
d
.

V
S
0
1
1
1
0
6
5

(
t
o

b
e
o
r
d
e
r
e
d

s
e
p
a
r
a
t
e
l
y
)
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
p
r
o
b
e
F
o
r

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s
u
s
e

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

w
i
r
e
w
i
t
h

1

m
m
q

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
M
o
t
o
r

o
f

m
i
x
i
n
g
v
a
l
v
e

z
o
n
e

6
2
2
0

V

m
o
t
o
r
S
u
p
p
l
y

p
r
o
b
e
z
o
n
e

6
R
o
o
m

p
r
o
b
e
z
o
n
e

6
T
/
H

N
T
C
/
0
-
1

V

t
y
p
e
Mixer pump zone 1
Boiler hook-up
Dehumidifier hook-up zone 1
Mixer pump zone 6
M
o
t
o
r

o
f

m
i
x
i
n
g
v
a
l
v
e

z
o
n
e

1
2
2
0

V

m
o
t
o
r
O
p
e
n
C
l
o
s
e
C
O
M
NTC
NTC
NTC
Out H
NTC
+G
M
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
Out H
+G
M
O
p
e
n
C
l
o
s
e
C
O
M
Rx-/Tx-
Rx+/Tx+
GND
GND
C1
C4
C5
NO1
NO4
NO5
NC5
NO2
NO3
TLan
J
6
J
7
J
8
G
+5VREF
IDC1
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y3
Y2
Y1
+24VDC
G0
GND
GND
SYNC
B1
B2
B3
B4
J
1
J
2
J
3
J
4P
rg
E
s
c
J
9
J
1
0
J
1
1
J
5
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
5
J
9
J
1
0
J
6
J
7
J
8
Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
J
1
J
2
J
3
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
T+
T-
G
G0
GND
TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
5
J
9
J
1
0
J
6
J
7
J
8
Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
J
1
J
2
J
3
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
T+
T-
G
G0
GND
TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
5
J
9
J
1
0
J
6
J
7
J
8
Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
J
1
J
2
J
3
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
T+
T-
G
G0
GND
TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
5
J
9
J
1
0
J
6
J
7
J
8
Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
J
1
J
2
J
3
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
T+
T-
G
G0
GND
TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
5
J
9
J
1
0
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
9
J
1
0
J
6
J
7
J
8
Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
J
1
J
2
J
3
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
T+
T-
G
G0
GND
TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
ID1
IDC1
G0
ID2
ID3
230 Vac
N
L
230/24 Vac
G
G
0
ID1: zone 6 dehumidifier al.
ID3: zone 6 On/Off
1 5
6
7
8
2
3
4
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
itc
h
z
o
n
e
2
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
itc
h
z
o
n
e
3
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
itc
h
z
o
n
e
4
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
itc
h
z
o
n
e
5
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
itc
h
z
o
n
e
6
2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir
S
.p
.A
.
Chiller al.
Boiler al.
Dehumidifier al.
Generic al.
Inlets
On/off control unit
Summer/winter
124
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Figure 3.9.8 Connection scheme of V-CLIMA for space heating with 24 V motor.
F
o
r

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s
u
s
e

w
i
r
e
s

w
i
t
h
1
.
5

m
m
q

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
S
a
f
e
t
y

t
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
e
r
c
l
a
s
s

I
I
,

2
5

V
A

+

1
5

V
A
f
o
r

e
a
c
h

a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
e
x
p
a
n
d
e
r

F
o
r

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

p
r
o
b
e
,
u
s
e

a

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

b
i
p
o
l
a
r

w
i
r
e
w
i
t
h

a

s
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

1

m
m
q
R
o
o
m

p
r
o
b
e

z
o
n
e

1
N
T
C

t
y
p
e
S
u
p
p
l
y

p
r
o
b
e
z
o
n
e

1
F
o
r

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

p
r
o
b
e
,

u
s
e

a

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d
b
i
p
o
l
a
r

w
i
r
e

w
i
t
h

a

s
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

1

m
m
q
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
p
r
o
b
e
M
o
t
o
r

o
f

m
i
x
i
n
g
v
a
l
v
e

z
o
n
e

1
2
4

V

m
o
t
o
r
F
o
r

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s
u
s
e

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

w
i
r
e
w
i
t
h

1

m
m
q

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
M
o
t
o
r

o
f

m
i
x
i
n
g
v
a
l
v
e

z
o
n
e

6
2
4

V

m
o
t
o
r
S
u
p
p
l
y

p
r
o
b
e
z
o
n
e

6
R
o
o
m

p
r
o
b
e
z
o
n
e

1
N
T
C

t
y
p
e
Mixer pump zone 1
Boiler hook-up
Mixer pump zone N
F
o
r

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s
u
s
e

w
i
r
e
s

w
i
t
h

1
.
5

m
m
q
s
e
c
t
i
o
n
NTC
NTC
NTC
M
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
M
Y
2
4

V
0

V
Y
2
4

V
0

V
230/24 Vac
230 Vac
G
N
L
G
0
Chiller al.
Boiler al.
Dehumidifier al.
Generic al.
Inlet
On/off control unit
Summer/winter
Rx-/Tx-
Rx+/Tx+
GND
GND
C1
C4
C5
NO1
NO4
NO5
NC5
NO2
NO3
TLan
G
+5VREF
IDC1
J
1
J
2
J
3
J
4
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y3
Y2
Y1
+24VDC
G0
GND
GND
SYNC
B1
B2
B3
B4
J
5
J
6
J
7
J
8
J
9
J
1
0
J
1
1
P
rg
E
s
c
NO1 B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc T+
T-
Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
5
J
9
J
4
J
1
J
2
J
3
J
1
0
J
6
J
7
J
8
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
5
J
9
J
1
0
J
6
J
7
J
8
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
5
J
9
J
1
0
J
6
J
7
J
8
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
5
J
9
J
1
0
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
9
J
1
0
J
6
J
7
J
8
J
5
J
6
J
7
J
8
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
NO1
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C2
C3
C4
ID1
G
G0
GND
TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
T-
Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
J
1
J
2
J
3
ID1
G
G0
GND
TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
T+
T-
Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
J
1
J
2
J
3
ID1
G
G0
GND
TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
T+
T-
Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
J
1
J
2
J
3
J
1
J
2
J
3
ID1
G
G0
GND
TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
T+
T-
G
G0
GND
TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
it
c
h
z
o
n
e
2
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
it
c
h
z
o
n
e
3
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
it
c
h
z
o
n
e
4
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
it
c
h
z
o
n
e
5
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
it
c
h
z
o
n
e
6
ID1
IDC1
G0
ID2
ID3
ID3: zone 6 On/Off
2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir
S
.p
.A
.
125
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Figure 3.9.9 Connection scheme of V-CLIMA for space heating and cooling with 24 V motor.
2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir
S
.p
.A
.
F
o
r

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s
u
s
e

w
i
r
e
s

w
i
t
h
1
.
5

m
m
q

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
r

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

p
r
o
b
e
,
u
s
e

a

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

b
i
p
o
l
a
r

w
i
r
e
w
i
t
h

a

s
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

1

m
m
q
R
o
o
m

p
r
o
b
e
z
o
n
e

1
T
/
H

0
-
1

V

t
y
p
e
S
u
p
p
l
y

p
r
o
b
e
z
o
n
e

1
F
o
r

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

p
r
o
b
e
,

u
s
e

a

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d
b
i
p
o
l
a
r

w
i
r
e

w
i
t
h

a

s
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

1

m
m
q
S
u
m
m
e
r
/
w
i
n
t
e
r

s
i
g
n
a
l
f
o
r

c
h
i
l
l
e
r

i
g
n
i
t
i
o
n

a
n
d
f
o
r

d
e
v
i
a
t
i
o
n

v
a
l
v
e
s

E
/
I
F
o
r

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s
u
s
e

w
i
r
e
s

w
i
t
h
1
.
5

m
m
q

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
o
r

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s
u
s
e

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

w
i
r
e
w
i
t
h

1

m
m
q

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
M
o
t
o
r
e

v
a
l
v
o
l
a
m
i
s
c
e
l
a
t
r
i
c
e

z
o
n
a

1
M
o
t
o
r
e

a

2
4

V
F
o
r

t
h
e

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
s
u
s
e

w
i
r
e
s

w
i
t
h
1
.
5

m
m
q

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
S
a
f
e
t
y

t
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
e
r
c
l
a
s
s

I
I
,

2
5

V
A

+

1
5

V
A
f
o
r

e
a
c
h

a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
e
x
p
a
n
d
e
r
R
o
o
m
p
r
o
b
e
z
o
n
e

6
T
/
H

0
-
1

V

t
y
p
e
S
u
p
p
l
y

p
r
o
b
e
z
o
n
e

1
Mixer pump zone 1
Boiler hook-up
Mixer pump zone 6
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
p
r
o
b
e
M
o
t
o
r

o
f

m
i
x
i
n
g
v
a
l
v
e

z
o
n
e

1
2
4

V

m
o
t
o
r
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
+G
M
Out H
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
NTC
+G
M
Out H
Y
1 5
6
7
8
2
3
4
2
4
V
0
V
Y
2
4
V
0
V
230/24 Vac
230 Vac
G
N
L
G
0
Rx-/Tx-
Rx+/Tx+
GND
GND
C1
C4
C5
NO1
NO4
NO5
NC5
NO2
NO3
TLan
J
6
J
7
J
8
J
9
J
1
0
J
1
1
J
5
P
rg
E
s
c
J
1
J
2
J
3
J
4
G
+5VREF
IDC1
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y3
Y2
Y1
+24VDC
G0
GND
GND
SYNC
B1
B2
B3
B4
Chiller al.
Boiler al.
Dehumidifier al.
Generic al.
Inlet
On/off control unit
Summer/winter
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
J
5
J
6
J
7
J
8
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
9
J
1
0 Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
J
1
J
2
J
3
G
G0
GND
T+
T- TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
J
5
J
6
J
7
J
8
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
9
J
1
0 Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
J
1
J
2
J
3
G
G0
GND
T+
T- TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
J
5
J
6
J
7
J
8
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
9
J
1
0 Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
J
1
J
2
J
3
G
G0
GND
T+
T- TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
J
5
J
6
J
7
J
8
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
9
J
1
0 Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
J
1
J
2
J
3
G
G0
GND
T+
T- TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
NO4
NC1
NC2
NC3
C1
C2
C3
C4
J
5
J
6
J
7
J
8
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
9
J
1
0
B1
B2
GND
B3
B4
GND
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
+ 5 Vref
+ Vdc
J
9
J
1
0 Serial address
1
2
4
8
J
4
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
IDC1
J
1
J
2
J
3
G
G0 G0
GND
T+
T- TLan
VG
VG0
Y1
ID1
ID2
ID3
IDC1
ID1: zone 6 dehumidifier al.
ID3: On/Off zona 6
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
itc
h
z
o
n
e
2
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
itc
h
z
o
n
e
3
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
itc
h
z
o
n
e
4
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
itc
h
z
o
n
e
5
O
F
F
O
N
1
2
4
8
S
w
itc
h
z
o
n
e
5
126
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.9.2 Control units of the heating circuits
The Valsir control unit allows management of all the circuits in the floor heating system at the distribution manifold by means of simple
installation and wiring operations. It can be easily installed in the manifold cabinet by using a standardised mounting guide supplied with
the package or else it can be mounted directly on the wall. The Valsir control unit is provided with a transformer which brings the network
voltage (220 Volt) to 24 Volt; in this way, the installation can be made directly by the heating system installer. It is possible to use any type
of thermostat and thermostat with timer, even if they are different from each other. Furthermore, the control unit means that the signals can
easily be divided amongst one or more zones.
The modularity of the control unit means that the configuration can be changed at any time and extra modules allow the number of
controllable zones, or the number of thermo-electric heads connected to the same zone, to be increased. There are two types of Valsir
control units: the smallest one controls up to four thermo-electric heads and it is controlled by a single thermostat (1 zone); the biggest one
allows to control up to 14 thermo-electric heads and can be interfaced with 6 thermostats (6 zones).
Figure 3.9.10 Modularity of the Valsir control unit.
Additional
modules
Up to 6 thermostats
Up to 14
thermoelectric
heads
3
2
2
2
2
5
5
5
2
0
0
8
V
a
lsir S
.p
.A
.
The presence of LEDs allows monitoring of the circuit (open/closed) at any time and a fuse protects the unit in case of errors in the wiring.
The board of the control unit is protected in the case of a short circuit of one of the thermoelectric heads of the circulator of the mixing kit.
The connections are rapidly and easily carried out thanks to the colouring of the terminals which is the same as the wires and furthermore,
the use of a screwdriver is not required. Any extra modules are easily assembled to the principal unit. The control units are equipped with
spring terminals that allow wiring without the use of screw terminals and using wires with sections of 0.5 to 1.5 mm
2
that must be peeled
back to 10 mm.
127
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.9.2.1 Components of the control unit
Table 3.9.5 Control unit for 1 zone.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Cod. VS0110600
Wired control unit for the adjustment of 1 zone, expandable with additional module
(cod. VS0110610).
Feed voltage 230 V
Operating voltage 24 V 50/60 Hz
Maximum absorbed power 50 W
Protection class III
Protection degree IP 20
Pre-set for connection of
1 thermostat
max. 4 thermoelectric heads (cod. VS0110430)
Operating temperature from 0 to 50C
Air humidity max. 80% in absence of condensation
Dimension LxAxP 157 mmx70 mmx75 mm
Wires
Rigid conductor 0.51.5 mm
2

Flexible conductor 1.01.5 mm
2
Table 3.9.6 2 zone expansion unit.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Cod. VS0110605
Wired control unit for the adjustment of 1 zone, expandable with additional module
(cod. VS0110610).
Feed voltage 230 V
Maximum absorbed power 50 W
Protection class III
6 thermostats
Wires
2
2
128
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Table 3.9.7 Pump control module.
2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir
S
.p
.A
.
Cod. VS0110610
Expansion module to increase the number of thermoelectric heads connected to the
existing zones for the control untis (cod. VS0110600 and cod. VS0110605)
Feed voltage 24 V 50/60 Hz (with the same control unit)
Protection class II
2 thermostats
Wires
Rigid conductor 0,51,5 mm
2
Flexible conductor 1,01,5 mm
2
Table 3.9.8 Pump control module.
2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir
S
.p
.A
.
Cod. VS0110620
Control module for the pumps. This module can interrupt the supply to a circuit in
relation to the signal of a thermostat or when the entire system is closed. It can also
delay ignition of the pump by 5, 10 or 15 mins. It the period of inactivity exceeds 24
hours then the pump module will activate the pump at intevals of 5 minutes to avoid
blockage of the pump.
Feed voltage 24 V 50/60 Hz (with the same control unit)
Voltage/current of commutation 24V DC, 230 V AC, 5 A
Protection class II
Wires
2
2
Table 3.9.9 Thermoelectric heads.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Cod. VS0110430
NC thermoelectric heads for manifolds.
Feed voltage 24V 50/60 Hz with the same control unit)
Actuation time 4 min
Power wire 2x0.5 mm
2
Length of power wire 1000 mm
Characteristics
Autosetting of pin length
Initial ignition test funciton
Visual indication of open/closed state
Click-on engagement
Protection system against any leakage from the
valves
129
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.9.2.2 Installation and wiring of the control unit
a) Instalaltion of the control unit.
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
T
O
P
The control unit can be installed inside the
manifold cabinet with the use of a bar for
securing it that meets the DIN standard.
Separate the main components of the
control unit to facilitate installation and
enable rapid wiring.
Secure the control unit to the bar that
meets the DIN standard.
Step 4
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Should it be necessary to dismount the unit
again, use a screwdriver on the notches.
130
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
b) Wiring of the control unit.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

Connect the transformer to the main base.
Press the wires coming from the
transformer inside the guides on the base
of the control unit.
Correct position the power wires.
1
1
0
1
0
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Correctly peel all the wires to be connected
to the terminal unit.
Press the wires coming from the thermostats
inside the guides on the base of the
control unit. Connect the two wires of the
thermostats to the terminals L
1
and .
Position the conductors correctly inside the
guides.
2008 Valsir S.p.A. 2008 Valsir S.p.A. 2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Place the unit once more on the base.
Insert the peeled part of the thermostat
wires into the connectors of the control unit
making sure that the colours match.
If necessary use a screwdriver to open
the terminals and remove the wires from
the control unit to correct any connection
errors.
131
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Insert the peeled part of the power wire
inside the connectors of the control unit
with the help of a screwdriver.
Correct wiring of the thermostat and the
power wires.
Press the wires coming from the
thermoelectric heads into the guides on the
control unit.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Insert the peeled part of the wires of the
thermoelectric heads into the control unit
connector with the aid of a screwdriver.
Up to 4 thermoelectric heads can be
connected for each zone.
Correct wiring of the wires of the
thermoelectric heads. Verify that all the
connections have been completed.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Replace the cover on the control unit. Secure the cover by turning the scews.
Turn on the control unit by inserting the
plug into the socket.
132
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
The led lights up.
If the fuse blows then corresponding led
will light up.
When a zone is in operation the
corresponding led will light up.
3.9.2.3 Installation and wiring of the pump module
a) Installation of the pump module.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The pump module must be installed
together with the control unit. For example,
inside the manifold cabinet with the use of
a bar in compliance with the DIN standard
for securing it.
When installed, the pump module forms a
single body with the control unit.
Separate the main components of the
module to facilitate installation and wiring.
Step 4 Step 5
2
3
1
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
2
1

2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Secure the module to the DIN-compliant bar,
wire it and then connect it to the control unit
by sliding it onto the bar.
Should it be necessary to dismount the pump
module, use a screwdriver on the notches
and slide the module until it is completely
disconnected from the control unit.
133
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
b) Wiring of the pump module.
1
1
0
1
0

2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Correctly peel all the wires to be connected
to the pump module.
Press the wires coming from the pump into
the guides on the base of the control unit.
Position the conductors correctly inside the
guides.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Replace the unit onto the base.
Insert the peeled part of the wires of the
thermostats inside the connectors of the
control unit making sure that the colours
match.
If necessary use a screwdriver to open
the terminals and remove the wires from
the control unit to correct any connection
errors.
Step 7
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Insert the peeled part of the power wire
into the connector of the control unit with
the aid of a screwdriver.
134
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
c) Programming the switchover delay in the pump.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
0 5 10 15
2008 Valsir S.p.A. 0 5 10 15
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
When the switchover signal is emitted, the
module changes the functioning state of
the pump and applies a delay established
by the position of the jumpers.
The pump control signal is not delayed.
The pump control signal is delayed by 5
minutes.
Step 4 Step 5
0 5 10 15 2008 Valsir S.p.A. 0 5 10 15 2008 Valsir S.p.A.
minutes.
minutes.
135
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
d) Setting of the pump activation.
With this setting of the jumpers the
pump is activated by the signal of all the
thermostats. When the temperature set at
the thermostat of each room is reached,
the pump is stopped.
With this jumper setting the pump is
activated by the signal of thermostat 1.
Step 7
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
136
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.9.2.4 Connection schemes
Figure 3.9.11 Connection scheme of the control unit.
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

u
n
i
t

N
M
i
x
i
n
g

k
i
t

p
u
m
p
T
h
e
r
m
o
s
t
a
t

6
T
h
e
r
m
o
s
t
a
t

5
T
h
e
r
m
o
s
t
a
t

4
T
h
e
r
m
o
s
t
a
t

3
R
o
o
m

t
h
e
r
m
o
s
t
a
t
T
h
e
r
m
o
s
t
a
t

2
T
h
e
r
m
o
s
t
a
t

1
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

u
n
i
t

1
C
o
n
n
e
c
t

t
h
e

h
e
a
d
s

t
o

t
h
e

m
a
t
c
h
i
n
g

t
h
e
r
m
o
s
t
a
t
s
(
m
a
x

1
4
)
M
i
x
i
n
g

k
i
t

p
u
m
p
Thermoelectric head 1
Boiler hook-up relay
B
o
o
s
t
e
r

p
u
m
p

o
f
t
h
e

h
e
a
t
i
n
g

p
l
a
n
t
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

i
n

t
h
e

c
a
s
e

o
f

o
n
e

r
o
o
m

t
h
e
r
m
o
s
t
a
t
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g

m
o
r
e

t
h
a
n

4

t
h
e
r
m
o
e
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

h
e
a
d
s
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

i
n

t
h
e

c
a
s
e
o
f

o
n
e

r
o
o
m

t
h
e
r
m
o
s
t
a
t
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g

m
o
r
e

t
h
a
n

4
t
h
e
r
m
o
e
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

h
e
a
d
s
m
a
x
.

8

t
h
e
r
m
o
e
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

h
e
a
d
s
m
a
x
.

1
4

t
h
e
r
m
o
e
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

h
e
a
d
s
m
a
x
.

1
2

t
h
e
r
m
o
e
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

h
e
a
d
s
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

r
e
l
a
y

o
u
t
l
e
t
s

w
h
e
n

t
h
e

p
u
m
p

t
h
a
t

f
e
e
d
s

t
h
e
m
i
x
i
n
g

k
i
t
s

i
s

n
o
t

t
h
e

p
u
m
p

i
n
s
i
d
e

t
h
e

b
o
i
l
e
r

(
b
o
o
s
t
e
r

p
u
m
p
)
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

r
e
l
a
y

o
u
t
l
e
t
s

w
h
e
n

t
h
e

p
u
m
p

t
h
a
t

f
e
e
d
s
t
h
e

m
i
x
i
n
g

k
i
t
s

i
s

t
h
e

p
u
m
p

i
n
s
i
d
e

t
h
e

b
o
i
l
e
r
B
o
i
l
e
r

h
o
o
k
-
u
p
(
t
o

t
h
e

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l

b
l
o
c
k
o
f

t
h
e

b
o
i
l
e
r

o
n
t
h
e
r
m
o
s
t
a
t

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
)
R
1
R
2
R
3
R
N
R
1
R
1
R
2
R
2
R
3
R
3
R
N
R
N
2
0
0
8
V
a
ls
ir
S
.p
.A
.
137
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.9.3 Some control schemes
Control scheme 1
Boiler
Thermostat
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Fixed point floor heating system with single temperature zone
management. The thermostat or the thermostat with timer
controls the mixer and the boiler circulation pump. Once the set
temperature has been reached, the circulation of hot water in
the system is stopped
Control scheme 2
Boiler
Thermostat
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Fixed point floor heating system with single temperature
zone management with radiators and towel-drying radiators
connected to a high temperture kit mounted on the mixer.
The thermostat or the thermostat with timer controls the mixer
and the boiler circulation pump, once the set temperature has
been reached, the circulation of hot water both in the loops and
in the radiators is stopped
138
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Control scheme 3
Boiler
Thermostat
Thermostatic
head
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Fixed point floor heating system with radiators and towel-
drying radiators with thermostatic heads and connected to the
high temperature kit mounted on the mixer. The thermostat or
the thermostat with timer controls the mixer circulation pump
only, once the temperature set at the thermostat has been
reached, the circulation of hot water in the loops is stopped.
The thermostatic heads of the radiators can still call for hot
water until the set limit has been reached.
In this case the boiler pump is not stopped, the presence of a
differential by-pass in the boiler is recommended to guarantee
internal circulation of the water when the room temperature has
been reached.
Control scheme 4
Thermostats
Boiler
Control unit and
pump module
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Fixed point floor heating system with multipe temperature zone
management. The control unit interfaces the room thermostats
or the thermostats with timers with the thermoelectric heads of
the manifold. The pump module stops the boiler and the mixer
circulation pumps when the rooms have all reached the set
temperature.
139
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Control scheme 5
Thermostats
Boiler
Control unit and
pump module
Thermostatic
head
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Fixed point floor heating system with multiple temperature zones
with radiators and towel-drying radiators with thermostatic
heads. The control unit interfaces the room thermostats or
thermostats with timer with the thermoelectric heads of the
floor heating manifold. The pump module stops the mixer
ciruclation pump when all the rooms have reached the set
temperature. The boiler pump continues feeding the radiators
and the differential by-pass inside the boiler ensures internal
circulation of water when all of the circuits are closed.
Control scheme 6
Control unit and
pump module
Boiler
Thermostats
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Fixed point floor heating system with multiple temperature zones
with radiators and towel-drying radiators with thermoelectric
heads. The control unit interfaces the room thermostats and
floor heating manifold and the high temperature kit that feeds
the radiators.
The pump module stops the mixer and boiler circulation pump
when the rooms have all reached the set temperature.
140
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Control scheme 7
Boiler
Room probe
External probe
Climatic control unit
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Variable point floor heating system with single zone
management. The V-CLIMA climatic control unit records the
external temperature, the internal temperature of a sample
room and the supply temperature to the heating circuits and
acts on the mixing valve. When the external temperature drops,
the control unit acts on the mxing valve and increases the
supply temperature to the system. The room probe allows a
comparison of the value measured with the temperature set in
the climatic control unit that has the function of thermostat with
timer. When the set temperature has been reached, the control
unit stops the boiler and the mixer pump.
Control scheme 8
External probe
Room probe
Boiler
Climatic control unit
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Variable point floor heating system with single zone management
with radiators and towel-drying radiators.
The V-CLIMA climatic control unit records the external
temperature, the internal temperature and the supply
temperature and acts on the mixing valve motor. When the
external temperature drops, the control unit acts on the mixing
valve and increases the supply temperature to the system.
The room probe allows the comparison of the recorded value
with the value set in the climatic ontrol unit that has the
function of thermostat with timer. When the set temperature is
reached, the control unit stops the boiler and the mixer pump
thus stopping the circulation in the loops and in the radiators.
141
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Control scheme 9
Boiler
Room probe
External probe
Thermostats
Climatic
control unit
Control unit and
pump module
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Variable point floor heating system with multiple temperature
zone management. The V-CLIMA climatic control unit records
the external temperature, the internal temperature and the
supply temperature and acts on the motor of the mixing valve.
When the external temperature drops, the control unit acts
on the mixing valve and increases the supply temperature to
the system. The control unit interfaces the thermostats or the
floor heating manifold. The pump module stops the circulation
pump of the mixer and the boiler when all of the rooms have
reached the set temperature.
Control scheme 10
Thermostats
Boiler
Room probe
External probe
Climatic
control unit
Control unit and
pump module
Thermostatic
head
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Variable point floor heating system with multiple temperature
zone management with radiators and towel-drying radiators
with thermostatic heads.
The V-CLIMA climatic control unit records the external
temperature, the internal temperature and the supply
temperature and acts on the mixing valve.
When the external temperature drops, the control unit acts on
the mixing valve and increases the supply temperature to the
system. The control unit interfaces the room thermostats or the
floor heating manifold. The pump module stops the circulation
pump of the mixer when all of the rooms have reached the set
temperature.
The boiler pump continues feeding the radiators and the
differential by-pass inside the boiler ensures internal circulation
of the water when all of the circuits are closed.
142
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
Control scheme 11
Control unit and
pump module
Thermostats
External probe
Room probe
Boiler
Climatic
control unit
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Impianto di riscaldamento a pavimento a punto variabile
gestito a zone di temperatura multiple integrato da radiatori,
termoarredo o arredobagno. La centralina climatica V-CLIMA
rileva la temperatura esterna, la temperatura interna e quella
di mandata agendo sul motore della valvola miscelatrice.
Al diminuire della temperatura esterna, la centralina agisce
sulla valvola miscelatrice aumentando la temperatura di
mandata allimpianto. Lunit di controllo interfaccia i termostati
o i cronotermostati ambiente alle testine termoelettriche sia
del collettore del riscaldamento a pavimento sia del kit di alta
temperatura che alimenta di radiatori.
Il modulo pompa arresta la pompa di circolazione del miscelatore
e la pompa della caldaia quando tutti i locali hanno raggiunto la
temperatura impostata.
Control scheme 12
Deviation
valve
External probe
Room probe
Boiler
Climatic
control unit
Thermostats
Control unit and
pump module
Dehumidifier
Chiller
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Variable point floor heating and cooling system with multiple
temperature zone management. The V-CLIMA climatic
control unit records the external temperature, the internal
temperature and the supply temperature and acts on the motor
of the mixing valve. When the external temperature drops,
the control unit acts on the mixing valve and increases the
supply temperature to the system. In the cooling mode, when
the external temperature increases, the valve is activated to
reduce the supply temperature to the circuits. The control unit
interfaces the room thermostats or thermostats with timers
(that must be equipped with the summer/winter function) with
the thermoelectric heads of the floor heating manifold.
The pump module stops the circulation pump of the mixer when
all of the rooms have reached the set tempearture. The control
unit starts or stops the dehumidifiers in relation to the signal
detected by the room temperature/humidity probe. The further
control of the dew temperature allows the chiller to be stopped
if there is a risk of condensation formation. The summer/winter
function of the control unit allows the automatic activation of
the deviation valves placed on the primary circuit.
143
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
3.10 Concrete fluidizer
V-Fluid fluidizing additive has been studied to improve the plasticity and fluidity of concrete and mortar. At the same time it allows a reduction
of the water used for mixing by 10% to 15%, without lowering the resistance of the concrete, and obtains high fluidity and workability.
Dosage ranges from 0.2% to 0.3% of the cement weight.
Table 3.10.1 Characteristics of V-FLUID concrete fluidizer.
Description
Additive designed to give concretes more workability at reduced water ratio and increased
concrete strength.
Field of applications Creation of poured concrete floors.
Application mode Added to the paste water when mixing concrete.
Dosage 0.2%0.3%
Fundamental performance
Reduction of paste water in the range of 10 to 15%.
Improved workability in the production of screed for floor systems.
Aspect Liquid
Colour Brown
Odour Characteristic
pH 7
Solubility in water Soluble
Density 1.1 kg/l
Package 10 kg container
Storage 12 months in unopened package and away from direct sunlight.
Caution
Application temperature must not be below 5%.
Excessive use of the product can compromise the mechanical resistance of the cement.
3.10.1 Calculation of the quantity of fluidizer
The percentage dosage of the fluidizer, from 0.2% to 0.3% for the V-FLUID fluidizer, depends on the quantity of cement used; the dosage,
therefore, expresses the ratio of 1 kg of fluidizer for every 100 kg of cement. To determine the quantity of fluidizer to be used, we need to
know the quantity of concrete, the quantity of cement used in relation to the volume of concrete and the desired dosage (0.2% - 0.3%).
The following table is used to rapidly determine the quantity of concrete and fluidizer for a surface area of 100 m
2
in relation to the thickness
of the concrete and the relationship between the weight of the cement and the volume of the concrete. The range of values corresponds to
fluidizer/cement dosages of 0.2% to 0.3%.
Table 3.10.2 Quantity of concrete and fluidizer for a surface area of 100 m
2
for dosages of 0.2%-0.3%.
Quantity of fluidizer [kg/100 m
2
]
s
u
Quantity of concrete
[m
3
/100 m
2
]
Cement 300 kg/m
3
Cement 400 kg/m
3
Cement 500 kg/m
3
30 5 34.5 46 57.5
40 6 3.65.4 4.87.2 69
50 7 4.26.3 5.68.4 710.5
60 8 4.87.2 6.49.6 812
70 9 5.48.1 7.210.8 913.5
80 10 69 812 1015
90 11 6.69.9 8.813.2 1116.5
100 12 7.210.8 9.614.4 1218
110 13 7.811.7 10.415.6 1319.5
120 14 8.412.6 11.216.8 1421
130 15 913.5 1218 1522.5
140 16 9.614.4 12.819.2 1624
150 17 10.215.3 13.620.4 1725.5
144
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
For a more precise calculation it is possible to proceed by following the example indicated while taking into consideration the panel, the pipe
spacing and the dimensions of the pipe.
3.10.2 Example
The quantity of fluidizer must be calculated in order to create a screed slab with a thickness of 4.5 cm (over the pipe), that covers a surface
area of 550 m
2
with a pipe spacing of 15 cm and the V-ESSE panel. We assume a ratio cement/concrete of 400 kg/m
3
and a fluidizer dosage
of 0.3%. With the table in the appendix Calculation of the quantity of concrete the volume of concrete of 6.4 m
3
for 100 m
2
is determined.
To cover the entire surface area of 550 m
2
we therefore need:
550 m
2
6.4 m
3
=
100 m
2
35.2 m
3
of concrete.
If the ratio of cement/concrete is 400 kg/m
3
and dosage is 0.3% the quantity of fluidizer is calculated in the following way:
0.3
35.2 m
3
400 kg/m
3

100
= 42.2 kg
145
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
H
A
R
A
C
T
E
R
I
S
T
I
C
S

O
F

T
H
E

C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
S
3
146
V
A
L
S
I
R

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

A
N
D

C
O
O
L
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
4
4 VALSIR FLOOR HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEMS
4.1 System and system components
V-ESSE system
This heating and cooling system has been especially designed for residential and office buildings where installation height is at least 80
mm excluding the flooring. The panel is covered with a protective film and is characterised by an excellent surface resistance to stamping
and is the typical Valsir blue in colour.
V-BAND edging strip
MIXAL 16x2 pipe
concrete
anti-shrinkage grid
V-ESSE insulation panel
5060 mm
10 mm
90130 mm
3060 mm
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The main components that make up this system are:

MIXAL 16x2 pipe produced with an internal layer in crosslinked polyethylene PEX, an intermediate layer in aluminium that is produced
with the TIG butt-welding process (certified by the Italian Welding Institute) and an external layer in high density polyethylene HDPE.
Total barrier to oxygen permeation and extremely flexible during the installation phase. It is manufactured in compliance with the most
strict international quality standards and has been certified by the Italian Plastics Institute (IIP) in compliance with the Standard UNI
10954-1:2001. Coils are available in four different lengths: 100 m, 120 m, 240 m and 500 m.
V-ESSE pocketed insulation panel made of expanded polystyrene and covered with a Valsir blue film in EPS with a compressive
strength of 150 kPa. Produced in compliance with the European Standard UNI EN ISO 13163 and marked in accordance with EC
European Directives. This panel allows a minimum pipe spacing of 75 mm and is available in two versions with a base thickness of 20
and 30 mm and a total height of 50 and 60 mm respectively.
V-BAND edging strip with a thickness of 7 mm and a height of 200 mm. The entire surface of the strip is covered with adhesive and
is equipped with a polyethylene film to stop concrete from getting under the panels. The strip is applied to all of the walls and has the
function of cancelling thermal bridges between the floor and the wall and absorbing any thermal expansion in the screed.
V-FOIL anti-humidity film made of polyethylene with a thickness of 0.2 mm equipped with an adhesive strip for joining one film to the
other. It is laid in all the rooms that are in direct contact with the ground in order to to avoid humidity entering the room.
Anti-shrinkage grid in electro-welded steel. They are used to prevent the formation of any possible cracks in the concrete slab caused
by the thermal expansion of the same.
Variations:
It is also possible to combine the MIXAL 20x2 pipe with the V-ESSE insulation panel thus generating an increase of flow inside the
heating loops.
147
V
A
L
S
I
R

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

A
N
D

C
O
O
L
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
4
V-ESSE soundproof system
This heating and cooling system has been designed by Valsir in order to satisfy the requirements of noise reduction inside buildings required
by the Italian Ministerial Decree D.P.C.M. 5/12/1997. When combined with the V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat the V-ESSE system represents
an integrated solution to thermal and acoustic insulation against foot-traffic noise.
V-ACUSTIC, covering the entire surface, allows a reduction in foot-traffic noise of 28 dB (in accordance with European Standard UNI EN
12354-2) and contemporarily guarantees an excellent barrier against humidity. Acoustic insulation of the walls is obtained by using the
V-BAND edging strip made expanded polyethylene with a thickness of 8 mm that, together with the V-ACUSTIC mat, ensures the installation
of a floating floor with elevated soundproof characteristics.
5060 mm
10 mm
96136 mm
3060 mm
6 mm
V-BAND edging strip
MIXAL 16x2 pipe
Concrete
anti-shrinkage grid
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

MIXAL 16x2 pipe produced with an internal layer in crosslinked polyethylene PEX, an intermediate layer in TIG butt-welded aluminium
(certified by the Italian Welding Institute) and an external layer in high density polyethylene HDPE. Absolute barrier to oxygen permeation
and extremely ductile during the installation phase. It is produced in compliance with the strictest International Standards and is
certified by the Italian Plastics Institute (IIP) in accordance with the standard UNI 10954-1:2001. Coils are available in four different
lengths: 100 m, 120 m, 240 m and 500 m.
V-ESSE pocketed insulation panel made of expanded polystyrene and covered with a Valsir blue film in EPS with a compressive
strength of 150 kPa. It is produced in compliance with the European Standard UNI EN ISO 13163 and marked in accordance with EC
European Directives. This panel allows a minimum pipe spacing of 75 mm and is available in two versions with a base thickness of 20
and 30 mm and a total height of 50 and 60 mm respectively.
V-BAND edging strip with a thickness of 7 mm and a height of 200 mm. The strip has adhesive on the entire surface and is equipped
with a polyethylene film to avoid concrete getting beneath the panels. The strip is applied to all the walls and has the function of
cancelling all thermal acoustic bridges between the floor and the walls and absorbing the thermal expansion of the screed.
V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat composed of resistant and elastic synthetic fibres. It has a thickness of 8 mm that drops to 6 mm following
installation. Thanks to the Velcro effect on the underneath, the mat does not move during installation thus avoiding the formation
of acoustic bridges. It is resilient and withstands puncture and traffic on the building site. Thanks to the dynamic rigidity of 21 MPa
it allows a reduction in foot traffic noise of 28 dB (in compliance with the European Standard UNI EN 12354-2) thus meeting the
requirements of the Italian Ministerial Decree D.P.C.M. of 5/12/1997. Anti-shrinkage grid made of electro-welded steel. It is employed
to prevent the development of any cracks in the concrete slab due to the thermal expansion of the same.
Variations:
The V-ACUSTIC mat can be combined with any of the other insulation panels in the Valsir range.
148
V
A
L
S
I
R

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

A
N
D

C
O
O
L
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
4
V-ERRE system
This reduced height system is the ideal solution for buildings where installation space is reduced to a minimum but at the same time the
owner does not wish to forego the advantages of a Valsir floor heating and cooling system.
V-BAND edging strip
MIXAL 16x2 pipe
concrete
anti-shrinkage grid
V-ERRE insulation panel
32 mm
30 mm
10 mm
72 mm
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

MIXAL 16x2 pipe produced with an internal layer in crosslinked polyethylene PEX, an intermediate layer in TIG butt-welded aluminium
(certified by the Italian Welding Institute) and an external layer in high density polyethylene HDPE. Absolute barrier to oxygen permeation
and extremely flexible during the installation phase. It is produced in compliance with the strictest International Standards and is
certified by the Italian Plastics Institute (IIP) in accordance with the standard UNI 10954-1:2001. Coils available in four different lengths:
100 m, 120 m, 240 m and 500 m.
V-ERRE pocketed insulation panel made by joining 10 mm of expanded polystyrene to a rigid sheet of black PS equipped with bosses for
attaching the pipe with a total height of 32 mm. This insulation panel is manufactured in compliance with the European Standard UNI EN
ISO 13163 and is marked in accordance with EC European Directives. It allows a minimum pipe spacing of 50 mm and is characterised
by a compressive strength of 200 kPa.
V-FOIL anti-humidity film made of polyethylene with a thickness of 0.2 mm equipped with an adhesive strip for attaching one film to the
other. It is laid in all the rooms that are in direct contact with the ground to avoid humidity entering the room.
Anti-shrinkage grid made of electro-welded steel. They are used to prevent the formation of any cracks in the concrete slab that caused
Variations:
The V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat can be combined with the V-ERRE insulation panel in order to create heating and cooling systems that
meet the acoustic requirements of the Italian Ministerial Decree D.P.C.M. of 5/12/1997 with a noise reduction of 28 dB (in compliance
with the European Standard UNI EN 12354-2).
149
V
A
L
S
I
R

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

A
N
D

C
O
O
L
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
4
V-ENNE system
This is an eco-compatible floor heating and cooling system made with natural materials that are capable of integrating with the environment
in which we live thus contributing to sustainable development.
V-ENNE is a solution that guarantees the building occupants thermal well-being and energy savings, typical of the Valsir radiant panel
heating systems; it is guaranteed by the use of a thermal insulation that is breathable, long-lasting and ecological.
31 mm
10 mm
87117 mm
3060 mm
16 mm
V-RAIL16 pipe fixing bar
V-ENNE insulation panel
V-BAND/N edging strip
MIXAL 16x2 pipe
anti-shrinkage grid in Polypropylene
concrete
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

MIXAL 16x2 multilayer pipe produced with an internal layer in crosslinked polyethylene PEX, an intermediate layer in TIG butt-welded
aluminium (certified by the Italian Welding Institute) and an external layer in high density polyethylene HDPE. Absolute barrier to oxygen
permeation and extremely flexible during the installation phase. It is produced in compliance with the strictest International Standards
and is certified by the Italian Plastics Institute (IIP) in accordance with the standard UNI 10954-1:2001. Coils are available in four
different lengths: 100 m, 120 m, 240 m and 500 m.
V-ENNE insulation panel produced with wood fibres with a thickness of 30 mm and a specific weight of 270 kg/m
3
; during production
of the panel the fibres are impregnated with latex thus allowing the panel to maintain its characteristics even in the presence of a
particularly humid concrete screed.
V-ENNE insulation panel produced with wood fibres with a thickness of 30 mm and a specific weight of 270 kg/m
3
; during production
of the panel the fibres are impregnated with latex thus allowing the panel to maintain its characteristics even in the presence of a
particularly humid concrete screed.
V-BAND/N 8 mm edging strip made of compact linen used for absorbing the thermal expansion of the concrete and for thermally
isolating them from the walls.
Anti-shrinkage grid made of atoxic and inert polypropylene. It is used to prevent the formation of any cracks in the concrete slab caused
Variations:
The soundproof solution involves the laying of a linen felt
mat with a thickness of 5 mm underneath the insulation
panel; the improvement in foot-traffic performance
is guaranteed by a dynamic rigidity of 55 MN/m
3
thus
allowing the soundproof requirements established by the
Ministerial Decree D.P.C.M. of 5 December 1997 to be
satisfied with a reduction in noise levels of approximately
17 dB.
31 mm
10 mm
97127 mm
3060 mm
16 mm
10 mm
V-ACUSTIC/N soundproof mat
V-ENNE insulation panel
V-BAND/N edging strip
MIXAL 16x2 pipe
concrete
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

150
V
A
L
S
I
R

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

A
N
D

C
O
O
L
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
4
V-ELLE system
This is the ideal system for industrial environments in which an elevated load resistance is required due to the presence of heavy vehicles
or industrial machinery. The smooth panel allows rapid installation of the system by anchoring the Valsir multilayer pipes with the use of
hooked clips.
anti-shrinkage grid
concrete
V-BAND edging strip
V-ELLE insulation panel
120180 mm
140210 mm
2030 mm
V-CLIP01 anchor clips
MIXAL 20x2 pipe
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The main components that make up the system are:

and is certified by the Italian Plastics Institute (IIP) in accordance with the standard UNI 10954-1:2001. Coils are available in three
different lengths: 100 m, 120 m and 240 m.
V-ELLE smooth insulation panel made of expanded polystyrene attached to a grey non-woven film for anchoring the hooked clips and
characterised by 50 mm squares for facilitating installation. This product is manufactured in compliance with the European Standard
UNI EN ISO 13163 and is marked in accordance with the EC European Directives. It is available in two versions, with a 20 mm total
thickness and a compressive strength of 200 kPa, a 30 mm thickness and a compressive strength of 250 kPa. The latter is ideal for
systems that require an elevated load resistance that are applied to the pavement.
V-CLIP01 hooked anchor clips for securing directly to the panel with the use of a portable clip fixing device.
V-BAND edging strip with a thickness of 7 mm and a height of of 200 mm. The entire surface of the strip is covered with adhesive and
other. It is laid in all the rooms that are in direct contact with the ground in order to avoid humidity entering the rooms.
Anti-shrinkage grid in electro-welded steel. These grids are used to prevent the formation of any possible cracks in the concrete slab
that are caused by the thermal expansion of the same.
151
V
A
L
S
I
R

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

A
N
D

C
O
O
L
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
4
Variations:
The MIXAL 16x2 multilayer pipe can be used with
the V-ELLE insulation panel for residential and office
applications where systems can be created with limited
installation heights.
The V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat can be used with the
V-ELLE system for the creation of heating and cooling
systems that meet the soundproof requirements of the
Italian Ministerial Decree D.P.C.M. dated 5/12/1997 in
order to yield a reduction in noise levels of 28 dB (in
accordance with UNI EN 12354-2).
20 mm
10 mm
76106 mm
3060 mm
16 mm
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The V-ELLE system can also be employed for ice and snow removal applications to be used in parking lots, courtyards, etc.
V-ELLE insulation panel
anti-shrinkage grid
covering
(asphalt, ground, etc)
MIXAL 20x2 pipe
anti-shrinkage grid
60210 mm
2030 mm
40180 mm
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
152
V
A
L
S
I
R

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

A
N
D

C
O
O
L
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
4
V-ZETA system
This system is employed for the creation of floor heating systems in industrial environments without forgoing the ease of installation
of the Valsir multilayer pipe on the pocketed panel. It is an economically valid solution and is also suitable for residential and office
environments.
MIXAL 20x2 pipe
concrete
anti-shrinkage grid
V-ZETA insulation panel
50 mm
90160 mm
140210 mm
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

V-ZETA pocketed insulation panel made of white expanded polystyrene with a compressive strength of 200 kPa. It is produced in
compliance with the European Standard UNI EN ISO 13164 and marked in accordance with the EC European Directives. The panel
allows a minimum pipe spacing of 75 mm, has a base thickness of 20 mm and a total height of 50 mm.
other. It is laid in all the rooms that are in direct contact with the ground to avoid humidity entering the rooms.
Anti-shrinkage grid in electro-welded steel. These reinforcement grids are used to prevent the formation of any possible cracks in the
concrete slab caused by the thermal expansion of the same.
Variations:
The MIXAL 16x2 multilayer pipe can be used with the
V-ZETA insulation panel for the creation of residential and
office systems with an elevated compressive strength.
The V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat can be combined with
the V-ZETA insulation panel in order to create heating and
cooling systems that meet the soundproof requirements
of the Italian Ministerial Decree D.P.C.M. dated 5/12/1997
with a reduction in noise levels of 28 dB (in accordance
with the European Standard UNI EN 12354-2).
50 mm
10 mm
90120 mm
3060 mm
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
153
V
A
L
S
I
R

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

A
N
D

C
O
O
L
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
4
V-RAIL system
This solution has been designed specifically for industrial environments in which the pipe is anchored to the surface by means of the special
V-RAIL fixing bars made of a plastic material and equipped with bi-adhesive. The use of the anchor bars results in an extremely simple and
rapid installation of the heating loops.
V-BAND edging strip
MIXAL 20x2 pipe
concrete
anti-shrinkage grid
insulation panel
V-RAIL20 bar
120180 mm
140210 mm
2030 mm
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

aluminium (certified by the Italian Welding Institute) and an external layer in high density polyethylene HDPE. Absolute barrier to
oxygen permeation and extremely flexible during the installation phase. It is manufactured in compliance with the strictest International
Standards and is certified by the Italian Plastics Institute (IIP) in accordance with the standard UNI 10954-1:2001. Coils are available in
three different lengths of 100 m, 120 m and 240 m.
Smooth insulation panel with characteristics of compressive strength compatible with industrial applications.
V-RAIL02 fixing bar for pipes made of a plastic material and equipped with bi-adhesive for securing to the insulation panel (it is possible
to use screws as well as the bi-adhesive if necessary).
other. It is laid in all the rooms that are in direct contact with the ground in order to avoid humidity entering the rooms.
Anti-shrinkage grid in electro-welded steel. These reinforcement grids are used to prevent the formation of any possible cracks in the
concrete slab caused by the thermal expansion of the same.
Variations:
This system can be used as an industrial type heating system without insulation panels by anchoring the V-RAIL02 pipe fixing bar
directly to the floor slab. It can also be employed as a snow / ice melting system for courtyards, car parks, athletic fields, etc. or as a
system in geothermal applications.
154
V
A
L
S
I
R

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

A
N
D

C
O
O
L
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
4
120180 mm
MIXAL 20x2 pipe
anti-shrinkage grid
concrete
V-BAND edging strip
insulation panel
V-RAIL20 bar
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
MIXAL 20x2 pipe

concrete
anti-shrinkage grid
V-RAIL02 fixing bar
background
40180 mm
covering
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
MIXAL 20x2 pipe

lawn
ground
V-RAIL02 fixing bar
background
40180 mm
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
155
V
A
L
S
I
R

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

A
N
D

C
O
O
L
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
4
V-CLIP system
This system is generally used for the creation of industrial systems without the use of insulation panels. The pipe is anchored to a metal
support grid with a wire of 3-5 mm with the use of V-CLIP02 anchor clips. These special accessories can be fixed in any position on the
metal mesh thanks to their particular construction characteristics.
120180 mm
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
V-CLIP02 anchor clips for securing the pipe to the electro-welded support grid (wire 3-5 mm).
other. It is laid in all the rooms that are in direct contact with the ground to avoid humidity entering the room.
Anti-shrinkage grid in electro-welded steel. They are used to prevent the formation of any cracks in the concrete slab caused by the
thermal expansion of the same.
Variations:
This system can be used as a snow/ice melting system for courtyards, parking lots, athletic fields, etc., or in geothermal applications.
background
MIXAL 20x2 pipe
support grid
anti-shrinkage grid
concrete
40180 mm
covering
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

40180 mm
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
background
MIXAL 20x2 pipe
support grid
ground
lawn
156
V
A
L
S
I
R

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

A
N
D

C
O
O
L
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
4
4.2 Guidelines for choosing the system and its components
The following table is useful for rapidly identifying the floor heating/cooling system most suitable for the application to be created.
System
Application
Residential and offices Industrial Snow and ice melting Geothermal
V-ESSE YES
V-ESSE soundproof YES
V-ERRE YES
V-ELLE YES YES YES
V-ZETA YES YES
V-RAIL YES YES YES
V-CLIP YES YES YES
By using the following table it is possible to rapidly identify the components and relative quantities in relation to the pipe spacing.
The residential type systems include insulation panels, multilayer pipe, edging strip, anti-humidity film, concrete fluidiser, anchor clips in
the case of smooth panels and they are based on a surface area of 100 m
2
. The industrial type systems include insulation panels, multilayer
pipe, edging strip, anti-humidity film, anchor clips for smooth panels and they are based on a surface area of 1000 m
2
.
Table 4.1 Components and quantities for V-ESSE system with MIXAL 16x2 multilayer pipe for residential type applications.
System V-ESSE for residential type applications
Pipe MIXAL 16x2 multilayer pipe
Layer composition Component Code U.M.
Pipe spacing
7.5 7.5/15 15 15/22.5 22.5 22.5/30 30
Quantity per 100 m
2
of surface area
MIXAL 16x2
multilayer pipe
VS0100137, VS0113005,
VS0113007, VS0100141
m 1333 1000 667 556 444 389 333
V-ESSE insulation
panel
VS0109000, VS0109001 m
2
100 100 100 100 100 100 100
V-BAND edging
strip
VS0109200 m 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
V-FOIL anti-
humidity film
VS0109600 m
2
100 100 100 100 100 100 100
V-FLUID fluidising
additive
VS0109800 kg 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8
Number of
circuits*
- - 16 12 8 7 5 5 4
* Indicative value determined on the basis of the average length of the circuits utilised in residential applications.
157
V
A
L
S
I
R

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

A
N
D

C
O
O
L
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
4
Table 4.2 Components and quantities for V-ESSE system with V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat with MIXAL 16x2 multilayer pipe for residential type applications.
System V-ESSE with V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat for residential type applications
Pipe spacing
7.5 7.5/15 15 15/22.5 22.5 22.5/30 30
Quantity per 100 m
2
of surface area
MIXAL 16x2
multilayer pipe
VS0100137, VS0113005,
VS0113007, VS0100141
m 1333 1000 667 556 444 389 333
V-ESSE insulation
panel
VS0109000
VS0109001
m
2
100 100 100 100 100 100 100
V-BAND edging
strip
VS0109200 m 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
V-ACUSTIC
soundproof mat
VS0109601 m
2
100 100 100 100 100 100 100
V-FLUID fluidising
additive
VS0109800 kg 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8
Number of
circuits*
- - 16 12 8 7 5 5 4
Table 4.3 Components and quantities for V-ERRE10 system with MIXAL 16x2 multilayer pipe for residential type applications.
System V-ERRE10 for residential type applications
Pipe spacing
5 5/10 10 10/15 15 15/20 20 20/25 25 25/30 30
Quantity per 100 m
2
of surface area
MIXAL 16x2
multilayer pipe
VS0100137
VS0113005
VS0113007
VS0100141
m 2000 1500 1000 833 667 583 500 450 400 367 333
V-ERRE10
insulation
panel
VS0109017 m
2
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
V-BAND
edging strip
VS0109200 m 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
V-FOIL anti-
humidity film
VS0109600 m
2
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
V-FLUID
fluidising
additive
VS0109800 kg 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8
Number of
circuits*
- - 24 18 12 10 8 7 6 5 5 4 4
158
V
A
L
S
I
R

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

A
N
D

C
O
O
L
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
4
Table 4.4 Components and quantities for V-ELLE system with MIXAL 16x2 multilayer pipe for residential type applications.
System V-ELLE for residential type installations
Pipe spacing
5 5/10 10 10/15 15 15/20 20 20/25 25 25/30 30
Quantity per 100 m
2
of surface area
MIXAL 16x2
multilayer pipe
VS0100137
VS0113005
VS0113007
VS0100141
m 2000 1500 1000 833 667 583 500 450 400 367 333
V-ELLE
insulation panel
VS0109018
VS0109019
m
2
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
V-BAND edging
strip
VS0109200 m 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
V-FOIL anti-
humidity film
VS0109600 m
2
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
V-FLUID
fluidising
additive
VS0109800 kg 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8
V-CLIP01 clips VS0109400 pcs 1333 1000 667 556 444 389 333 300 267 244 222
Number of
circuits*
- - 24 18 12 10 8 7 6 5 5 4 4
Table 4.5 Components and quantities for V-ZETA20 system with MIXAL 16x2 multilayer pipe for residential type installations.
System V-ZETA20 for residential type applications
Pipe spacing
7.5 7.5/15 15 15/22.5 22.5 22.5/30 30
Quantity per 100 m
2
of surface area
MIXAL 16x2
multilayer pipe
VS0100137, VS0113005,
VS0113007, VS0100141
m 1333 1000 667 556 444 389 333
V-ZETA20
insulation panel
VS0109016 m
2
100 100 100 100 100 100 100
V-BAND edging
strip
VS0109200 m 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
V-FOIL anti-
humidity film
VS0109600 m
2
100 100 100 100 100 100 100
V-FLUID fluidising
additive
VS0109800 kg 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8
Number of
circuits*
- - 16 12 8 7 5 5 4
159
V
A
L
S
I
R

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

A
N
D

C
O
O
L
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
4
Table 4.6 Components and quantities for V-ELLE30 system with MIXAL 20x2 multilayer pipe for industrial type or snowmelt applications.
System V-ELLE30 for industrial or snowmelt applications
Pipe spacing
15 20 25 30 35
Quantity per 100 m
2
of surface area
MIXAL 20x2 multilayer
pipe
VS0100139, VS0113009,
VS0113011
m 6667 5000 4000 3333 2857
V-ELLE30
insulation panel
VS0109019 m
2
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
V-BAND edging strip VS0109200 m 130 130 130 130 130
V-FOIL anti-humidity film VS0109600 m
2
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
V-CLIP01 clips VS0109400 pcs 4444 3333 2667 2222 1905
Number of circuits* - - 67 50 40 33 29
Table 4.7 Components and quantities for V-ZETA20 system with MIXAL 20x2 multilayer pipe for industrial type installations.
System V-ZETA20 for industrial type installations
Pipe spacing
15 22.5 30 37.5
Quantity per 100 m
2
of surface area
pipe
VS0100139, VS0113009,
VS0113011
m 6667 4444 3333 2667
V-ZETA20
insulation panel
VS0109019 m
2
1000 1000 1000 1000
V-BAND edging strip VS0109200 m 130 130 130 130
2
1000 1000 1000 1000
Number of circuits* - - 67 44 33 27
160
V
A
L
S
I
R

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

A
N
D

C
O
O
L
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
4
Table 4.8 Components and quantities for V-RAIL system with MIXAL 20x2 multilayer pipe for industrial, snowmelt or geothermal type applications.
System V-RAIL for industrial, snowmelt or geothermal type applications
Pipe spacing
15 20 25 30 35
Quantity per 100 m
2
of surface area
pipe
VS0100139, VS0113009,
VS0113011
m 6667 5000 4000 3333 2857
2
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
V-RAIL anchor bars VS0109411 m 700 700 700 700 700
Table 4.9 Components and quantities for V-CLIP system with MIXAL 20x2 multilayer pipe for industrial, snowmelt or geothermal type applications.
System V-CLIP for industrial, snowmelt or geothermal type applications
Pipe spacing
15 20 25 30 35
Quantity per 100 m
2
of surface area
pipe
VS0100139, VS0113009,
VS0113011
m 6667 5000 4000 3333 2857
2
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
V-CLIP02 clips VS0109403 pcs 8333 6250 5000 4167 3571
161
V
A
L
S
I
R

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

A
N
D

C
O
O
L
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S
4
Table 4.10 Components and quantities for V-ENNE system with MIXAL 16x2 multilayer pipe for residential type applications.
System V-FOIL anti-humidity film
Pipe spacing
5 5/10 10 10/15 15 15/20 20 20/25 25 25/30 30
Quantity per 100 m
2
of surface area
MIXAL 16x2
multilayer pipe
VS0100137
VS0113005
VS0113007
VS0100141
m 2000 1500 1000 833 667 583 500 450 400 367 333
V-ENNE
insulation panel
VS0109020 m
2
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
V-BAND edging
strip
VS0109202 m 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
V-FOIL anti-
humidity film
VS0109600 m
2
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
V-RAIL anchor
bars
VS0109410 m 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
Helical screws VS0109409 pcs 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
V-FLUID
fluidising
additive
VS0109800 kg 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8
Number of
circuits*
- - 24 18 12 10 8 7 6 5 5 4 4
162
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
5 DIMENSIONING OF FLOOR HEATING SYSTEMS IN COMPLIANCE WITH
UNI EN 1264
5.1 Introduction
The European Standard UNI EN 1264, parts 1, 2, 3 and 4 is used as a reference standard for the calculation of the thermal output and for
the dimensioning of floor heating systems in residential and office applications as well as in other types of buildings. In this chapter, we
will look at the mathematical instruments for calculating the thermal output, the surface temperature and hot water flow, necessary for
heating a room by means of a floor radiant panel with PEXAL and MIXAL multilayer pipes. In as far as possible, the symbols referred to in
the reference standard will be used.
5.2 Dimensioning: theory
5.2.1 Layer composition of the floor
The heat output of a floor heating system is strongly connected to the structure and composition of the floor; the type of covering (marble,
cotto or ceramic tiles, carpet, etc) to be used must be known, as well as the thickness of the various layers and their thermal characteristics,
and the type of insulation panel. The heating loops are placed on the insulation panel and buried in the concrete screed over which the
covering is laid. The room may be positioned directly over the ground or it may be part of a multi-floor building; this must be considered
when calculating the heat resistance of the floor.
Figure 5.1 Layer composition of a heating floor above a room.
concrete
insulation
concrete
slab
plaster
covering
concrete
concrete
slab
plaster
covering
insulation
T
f
T
m
T
i
,
a
s
a,2
,
a,2
s
a,1
,
a,1
s
b,1
,
b,1
s
b,2
,
b,2
s
b,3
,
b,3
s
u
,
E
R
,isol
R
,B
T
u
,
b
T
i
,
a
T
f
T
m
R
,B
s
a,2
,
a,2
s
a,1
,
a,1
s
u
,
E
s
b,1
,
b,1
s
b,2
,
b,2
s
b,3
,
b,3
R
,isol
T
u
,
b
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
163
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
Figure 5.2 Layer composition of a heating floor laid over the ground.
concrete
insulation
concrete
covering
ground
anti-humidity film
concrete
concrete
covering
ground
insulation
film anti-humidity film
T
f
T
i
,
a
T
f
T
i
,
a
s
a,2
,
a,2
s
u
,
E
s
a,1
,
a,1
R
,isol
s
b,1
,
b,1
s
b,2
,
b,2
s
a,2
,
a,2
s
u
,
E
s
a,1
,
a,1
R
,isol
s
b,1
,
b,1
s
b,2
,
b,2
R
,B
T
m
R
,B
T
m
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
S
a,i
is the thickness of each layer i that makes up the floor covering [m], the layer of screed over the pipes is identified by S
u
,
S
b,i
is the thickness of each layer i that makes up the floor below the pipe[m],

a,i
and
b,i
are the coefficients of heat conductivity of each /ith layer which makes up the floor both above and below the pipe [W/mK],

a
is the coefficient of convective heat exchange of the air [W/m
2
K] in the upper part of the radiant panel and assumed to be equal to
10.8 W/m
2
K,

b
2
K] in the room below, when the room is not in direct contact with the
ground, and is assumed to be equal to 5.9 W/m
2
K,
R
,B
is the heat resistance of the floor covering [m
2
K/W],
R
,isol
is the heat resistance of the insulation panel [m
2
K/W],
R
O
is the total heat resistance of the floor above the pipe [m
2
K/W],
R
U
is the total heat resistance of the floor below the pipe [m
2
K/W]
The heat resistance of the floor covering is given by the following equation:
R
,B
=
i
= = + + ...
s
a,i
s
a,1
s
a,2
a,i
a,1
a,2
[5.1]
In the appendix, the heat resistance values are given for the most widely used coverings, as well as the most common
construction materials. Some comments are also made on the use of wood (parquet) as a floor covering.
164
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
The total heat resistance above the pipe is:
1
R
0
= + R
,B
+
s
u

E

a

[5.2]
where S
u
indicates the thickness of the screed above the pipes and
E
indicates its heat conductance.
When the room is directly over the ground, the total heat resistance of the floor below the pipe is :
R
U
= R
,isol
+
i
= R
,isol
+
s
b,i
s
b,1
s
b,2
b,i

b,1

b,2
+ + ... [5.3]
if there is a room lying underneath, the coefficient of convective heat exchange of the air is also used:
R
U
= R
, isol
+
i
= R
, isol
+ + + ... +
s
b,i
s
b,1
s
b,2
1 1
b,i

b,1

b,2
b

b
[5.4]
The standard EN 1264-4 establishes the minimum thermal resistance that the insulating layers shall have in relation to the
thermal conditions under the floor heating structure.
In the following table, these limits are indicated as well as the minimum insulation thickness required (polystyrene with typical heat
conductance of 0.034 W/mK).
Table 5.1 Minimum thermal resistance of the insulating layer.
Thermal resistance of insulation
R
,isol
[m
2
K/W]
Minimum thickness
of insulation [mm]
Condition
0,75 22 Constantly heated room below.
1,25 37 Unheated or intermittently heated room below.
1,25 37 Room directly over the ground.
1,25 37 Room with air temperatures below T
U
0C.
1,50 44 Room with air temperatures below -5CT
U
<0C.
2,00 59 Room with air temperatures below -15CT
U
<-5C.
165
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
5.2.2 Required thermal flow
Before dimensioning a heating system the heat flow (or specific heat output) required in heating the single rooms must be determined.
The calculation must be carried out in compliance with the national standards and laws and it must take into account the structure and the
building elements as well as the climatic area in which the building is situated.
The heat flow delivered by the floor surface [W/m
2
] is given by the following ratio:
Q
A
F
q
a
= [5.5]
where Q is the required output to heat the room and A
F
is the surface of the floor covered by loops. In the following pages, the log mean
temperature difference T
H
will be used, given by:
T
H
=
T
m
- T
r
ln
T
m
- T
i
T
r
- T
i
[5.6]
where T
m
is the temperature of the flow water in the circuit [C], T
r
is the temperature of the return water [C] and [C] and T
i
is the
temperature of the room [C]. As specified in UNI EN 1264-2, the thermal flow is proportional to the log mean temperature difference:
T
H
R
q
q
a
=
[5.7]
by means of the following coefficient of proportionality:
1
6.7 a
C
R
q
=
a
B
a
T
mT
a
U
mU
a
D
mD
+
1 1
[5.8]
where the coefficients a
B
, a
T
, m
T
, a
U
, m
U
, a
D
, m
D
and a
C
are in relation to the structure of the heating floor.
In particular:
a
B
is a coefficient in relation to the thermal conductivity of the concrete
E
[W/mK] and the heat resistance of the floor covering R
,B
[m
2
K/W].
a
T
is a coefficient in relation to the floor covering R
,B
,
m
T
is dependent on pipe spacing p [cm] of the heating loop,
a
U
is dependent on pipe spacing p and floor covering R
,B
,
m
U
is dependent on concrete thickness S
u
[cm] above the pipes,
a
D
is dependent on pipe spacing p and floor covering R
,B
,
m
D
is dependent on the outside diameter De [mm] of the pipe,
a
C
is dependent on pipe spacing p, the outside diameter De and wall thickness s of the pipe as well as the conductance coefficient T
[W/mK]. Its value is indicated in the following table.
Table 5.2 Coefficient a
C
for the calculation of the specific heat output.
Spacing
p
Pipe
PEXAL 14x2 MIXAL 16x2 MIXAL 20x2
[cm] Coefficient a
C
5 -87.044 -127.829 -145.262
7.5 -58.030 -85.219 -96.841
10 -43.522 -63.914 -72.631
15 -29.015 -42.610 -48.421
20 -21.761 -31.957 -36.315
22.5 -19.343 -28.406 -32.280
25 -17.409 -25.566 -29.052
30 -14.507 -21.305 -24.210
35 -12.435 -18.261 -20.752
37.5 -11.606 -17.044 -19.368
The values of the coefficients a
B
, a
T
mT
a
U
mU
, a
D
mD
are expressed in the attached diagrams at the end of this chapter.
166
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
5.2.3 Characteristic curves
A diagram, showing the heat flow on the vertical axis, and the temperature difference on the horizontal axis, can represent the relationship
between the average differential surface temperature and the heat flow. The resulting curve is defined as the characteristic curve of the
floor installation; it is a straight line and the gradient is given by the coefficient 1/R
q
. Once the floor structure has been established, it
is possible to draw several characteristic curves in relation to the pipe spacing. When the pipe spacing is increased, the curve gradient
diminishes as can be seen in the figure.
Figure 5.3 Characteristics curves.
Log mean temperature difference T
H
[C]
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

f
l
o
w

q

[
W
/
m
2
]
p
1 p
2
p
3
p
4
p
5
Spacing p [cm]
1
1
1
1
1
R
q,1
R
q,2
R
q,3
R
q,4
R
q,5
Gradient
Required flow q
a
[W/m
2
]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
5.2.4 Thermal flow limit and maximum floor temperature
The standard UNI EN 1264-2 establishes a physiological limit to the maximum floor temperature in relation to the type of room:
Table 5.3 Maximum floor temperature.
T
f,max
[C] Type of room/area
29 Habitual living area
33 Bathroom or similar
35 Peripheral area
The heat flow limit can be obtained with the radiant floor once all of its characteristics have been established (spacing, screed thickness,
type of covering, layer composition). The heat flow limit is calculated from the following equation:
1
q
G
= B
G
R
q

1-n
G
n
G
1-n
G
[5.9]
where B
G
and n
G
are two coefficients in relation to screed thickness S
u
[cm] above the pipes and conductivity
E
[W/mK] but above all, pipe
spacing p [cm]. Whereas the coefficient is dependent on the room temperature and the maximum floor temperature:
1.1
f,max i
T T
9
= [5.10]
Only pipe spacing which respect the following ratio can be accepted:
q
a
q
G
[5.11]
If no spacing corresponds to this ratio, then the floor heating system alone is not sufficient to heat the room and it must be
supplemented with another source of heat, for example, one or more radiators.
167
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
5.2.5 Limit curve
The union of the limit values q
G
forms the so-called limit curve of heat flow. This curve, drawn on the characteristic curves, indicates the
pipe spacing values, which are not acceptable, or, in other words, the spacing, which would result in a floor surface temperature above the
physiological limits imposed by the standard.
Figure 5.4 Characteristic curves and limit curve.
H
[C]
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

f
l
o
w

q

[
W
/
m
2
]
p
1
p
2
p
3
p
4
p
5
Spacing p [cm]
Required flow q
a
[w/m
2
]
Acceptable
Not acceptable
Limit flow q
G
[W/m
2
]
q
G,1
q
G,2
q
G,3
q
G,4
q
G,5
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
5.2.6 Supply temperature
The supply temperature can be determined by following the indications in the reference standard EN 1264-3.
For the calculation of the supply temperature it is possible to proceed in the following way and as represented in the figure
Consider the room with the highest heat flow q a)
a,max
bathrooms excluded.
The characteristic curves in relation to the pipe spacing p available, are determined, assuming a floor covering thermal resistance equal b)
to R
,B
= 0.1 m
2
K/W. In the case of higher values, these shall be used.
The limit curve is determined. c)
The pipe spacing corresponding to the characteristic curves with a heat flow q d)
G
less than required qa,max must be abandoned in the
calculation of the supply temperature.
e) Consider the characteristic curve corresponding to the minimum spacing. Calculate the minimum log mean temperature difference
T
H,min
corresponding to the value q
a,max
of this characteristic curve.
Consider the characteristic curve corresponding to the maximum spacing allowed. Calculate the maximum log mean temperature f)
difference T
H,max
corresponding to the value q
a,max
of the characteristic curve.
g) The minimum supply temperature T
m,min
is given by T
H,min
considering a zero temperature difference between supply and return
T
m
- T
r
= 0C. The equation [5.6] becomes:
T
m,min
= T
i
+ T
H,min
[5.12]
h) The maximum supply temperature T
m,max
is given by T
H,max
considering a maximum temperature difference between supply and return
T
m
- T
r
= 5C. In this case the expression [5.6] becomes:

5
T
H,max
T
m,max
= T
i
+ 5
exp
5
T
H,max
exp - 1
[5.13]
The supply temperature must be chosen between the minimum value T i)
m,min
and the maximum value T
m,max
.
Ulterior criteria based on the economical aspects of system management or investment can be applied in order to further reduce the field
of acceptable values of the supply temperature.
168
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
Figure 5.5 Calculation of the supply temperature.
H
[C]
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

f
l
o
w

q

[
W
/
m
2
]
p
1
p
2
p
3
p
4
p
5
q
G,1
q
G,2
q
G,3
q
G,4
q
G,5
Maximum flow q
a,max
[W/m
2
]
Acceptable
Not acceptable
Curves with floor covering
R
I,B
= 0.1 m
2
K/W
Spacing p [cm]
T
H, min
T
H, max
Limit flow q
G
[W/m
2
]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
5.2.7 Average floor temperature
The average floor temperature is calculated in accordance with the expression indicated in the standard UNI EN 1264-2:
1
1.1
q
a
8. 92
T
f
= T
i
+ [5.14]
where T
i
is the environment temperature and q
a
is the specific thermal output.
5.2.8 Downward heat dispersion
The heating loops deliver heat to the cement screed, which, in turn, delivers upward thermal flow thus heating the room, but also downward
heat which contributes to heating the room below or else loses heat to the outside (in the case of a room directly over the ground or off a
terrace). The downward heat flow is calculated according to the following expression:
q
b
= q
a
+
R
o
R
U
R
U
T
u
- T
i
[5.15]
where R
O
is the thermal resistance of the floor above the pipe, R
U
is the thermal resistance of the floor below the pipe, T
u
is the temperature
of the room below or the ground under the floor, T
i
is the temperature of the room to be heated and q
a
is the required thermal flow.
169
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
5.2.9 Length of heating loops
The length of each loop, the chosen pipe spacing, and the total area to be heated determine the number of heating loops. The length of
the loops is limited by the length of the available rolls and above all by the maximum permissible pressure loss. In the following table, it is
possible to determine the maximum covered surface for a given length of loop and a pre-set pipe spacing
Table 5.4 Maximum area covered by a single circuit.
Loop length Pipe spacing p [cm]
L 5 7.5 10 15 20 22.5 25 30 35 37.5
[m] Heating area A
j
[m
2
]
25 1.25 1.875 2.5 3.75 5 5.65 6.25 7.5 8.75 9.4
50 2.5 3.75 5 7.5 10 11.3 12.5 15 17.5 18.8
100 5 7.5 10 15 20 22.5 25 30 35 37.5
150 7.5 11.3 15 22.5 30 33.8 37.5 45 52.5 56.3
200 10 15 20 30 40 45 50 60 70 75
The heating area A
F
[m
2
] is given by the following expression:
A
F
= 0.01 p L [5.16]
and as a consequence the loop length [m] can be calculated as follows:
A
F
0.01 p
L = [5.17]
where p is the pipe spacing [cm].
5.2.10 Flow and temperature of heating fluid
The required flow for heating the room [kg/s] is given by:
m =
(q
a
+ q
b
) A
F
4190 T
[5.18]
where
A
F
is the surface occupied by the loops [m
2
],
q
a
and q
b
are the upward and downward specific heat outputs required [W/m
2
],
T = T
m
- T
r
is the temperature difference of the heating fluid and therefore T
m
and T
r
are respectively the supply and return temperature of
the heating fluid [C].
When the average fluid temperature is known T
med
the temperature drop has been established T the supply temperature is calculated:
2
T
T
m
= T
med
+ [5.19]
and the supply temperature of the fluid:
2
T
T
r
= T
med
- [5.20]
The velocity of the flow [m/s] is calculated in accordance with following formula
v =
4 10
6
m
D
i
2
[5.21]
where is the density of the water [kg/m
3
] at the average temperature T
med
and D
i
is the internal diameter of the pipe [mm].
The speed can be obtained directly from the diagrams of pressure loss, from which the pressure drop p is also obtained.
170
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
5.2.11 Design limits in the choice of pipe spacing
In choosing the pipe spacing, the limits to be imposed on the speed, pressure loss and temperature difference of each circuit,
must be taken into account.
The speed limits are linked to noise in the case of excessively fast fluids and to air bubbles in the case of excessively slow fluids.
The values of minimum and maximum speed for each pipe diameter are indicated in the following table.
Table 5.5 Velocity and flow limits.
Pipe v
min
[m/s] v
max
[m/s] m
min
[l/s] m
max
[l/s]
PEXAL 14x2 0.05 0.45 0.0040 0.0354
MIXAL 16x2 0.05 0.45 0.0057 0.0509
MIXAL 20x2 0.05 0.45 0.0101 0.0905
The pressure loss limit is obviously linked to the capacity of the pump to circulate the flow inside the loops. The limit imposed is:
p
max
= 250 mbar
and it must include the loss in the flow-check valve on the supply manifold and in the valve with thermostatic capacity on the return
manifold. The maximum temperature difference for each circuit is:
T
max
= 20C
to avoid flows with excessive thermal ranges which would negatively influence the performance of the installation.
5.2.12 Balancing of heating circuits
Balancing of the circuits consists of determining the regulation point of the flow-check valves of each heating loop. The procedure is as
follows:
locate the circuit with the greatest pressure loss, here it is indicated as the k circuit. a)
Calculate the total pressure loss of the k circuit: b)
p
k,total
= p
k,ow-check valve
+ p
k,valve
+ p
k,circuit
[5.22]
where p
k,flow-check valve
is the loss of pressure in the flow-check valve in the k circuit, considered completely open, given by the
characteristic curve of the flow-check valve (Figure 3.4.3) in relation to the flow m
k
in the circuit, p
k,valve
is the pressure loss at the valve
with thermostatic option, given by the characteristic curve of the valve (Figure 3.4.4) in relation to the flow m
k
in the circuit, p
k,circuit
is
the pressure loss in the pipe loop of circuit k.
c) Calculate the pressure loss for the other circuits at the flow-check valve p
i,flow-check valve
keeping in mind that the total pressure loss for
each circuit is the same as the total pressure loss of the circuit with the greatest pressure loss:
p
i,ow-check valve
= p
k,total
+ p
i,valve
+ p
i,circuit
[5.23]
d) By using the flow-check valve characteristic curve, determine the number of regulations corresponding to the pressure loss
calculated.
171
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
5.3 Dimensioning: practice
The floor heating system of the building indicated in Figure 5.6 and having the following characteristics, must be sized:
Tabble 5.6 Project data.
N. Room Room temperature T
i
Total area Heating area A
F
Required thermal
output Q
1 Bedroom 20C 11.4 m
2
11.4 m
2
696 W
2 Living room 20C 16.1 m
2
16.1 m
2
1320 W
3 Kitchen 20C 10.4 m
2
10.4 m
2
832 W
4 Bathroom* 22C 7.2 m
2
5.4 m
2
576 W
5 Storeroom 18C 2.4 m
2
2.4 m
2
120 W
* The heating area of the bathroom must be reduced due to the presence of the bathtub.
The building is positioned on the first floor, over constantly heated rooms, at a temperature of T
u
=20C.
In compliance with the standard requirements, the V-ESSE 30 pocketed insulation panel is chosen, with a 30 mm base and a total height
of 60 mm; this panel allows a spacing of 7.5 cm, 15 cm, 22.5 cm, 30 cm and 37.5 cm. The screed thickness above the pipes is 45 mm.
The MIXAL 16x2 multilayer pipe is chosen for the heating loops. The other characteristics of the floor can be seen in Figure 5.7 for the
bathroom and in Figure 5.8 for all the other rooms. The floor covering is made of 15 mm cotto tiles, in all of the rooms, except for the
bathroom, where 10 mm ceramic tiles have been chosen.
Figure 5.6 Building example.
Room no. 1
Bedroom
Area 11.4 m
2
Room no. 5
Storeroom
Area 2.4 m
2
Room no. 3
Kitchen
Area 10.4 m
2
Room no. 2
Living room
Area 16.1 m
2
Room no. 4
Bathroom
Area 7.2 m
2
(5.4 m
2
)
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
172
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
Figure 5.7 Layer composition of bathroom floor.
concrete
V-ESSE30 insulation
concrete slab
prestressed slab 250 mm
plaster
ceramic tile covering 10 mm
MIXAL 16x2
R
I,B
= 0.010 m
2
K/W
s
u
= 45 mm,
E
=1.28 W/mK
s
b,3
=5 mm,
b,3
=0.93 W/mK
s
b,1
= 50 mm,
b,1
=1.28 W/mK
R
,isol
=0.85 m
2
K/W
R
,2
=0.43 m
2
K/W
T
i
=24C,
a
=10.8 W/m
2
K
T
i
=20C,
a
=5.9 W/m
2
K
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 5.8 Floor layer composition of the other rooms.
concrete
V-ESSE30 insulation
concrete slab
prestressed slab 250 mm
plaster
cotto tile covering 15 mm
MIXAL 16x2
T
i
=20C,
a
=10.8 W/m
2
K
T
i
=20C,
a
=5.9 W/m
2
K
R
I,B
= 0.017 m
2
K/W
s
u
= 44 mm,
E
=1.28 W/mK
s
b,3
=5 mm,
b,3
=0.93 W/mK
s
b,1
= 50 mm,
b,1
=1.28 W/mK
R
,isol
=0.85 m
2
K/W
R
,2
=0.43 m
2
K/W
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
173
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
5.3.1 Floor layer composition
The figures illustrating the floor Layer composition enable us to calculate the thermal resistance characteristics of all the rooms in the
building.The upward thermal resistance of the rooms, excluding the bathroom, is:
s
u
E

a
R
0
= + R
,B
+ =
1 1 0.045
+ 0.017 +
1.28 10.8
= 0.1447 m
2
K/W
whereas, for the bathroom, it is:
s
u
E

a
R
0
= + R
,B
+ =
1 1 0.045
+ 0.010 +
1.28 10.8
0.1377 m
2
K/W
The downward thermal resistance is valid for all the rooms (including the bathroom):
s
b,1
s
b,2
s
b,3
b,1

b,2

b,3

b
R
U
= R
,isol
+

1 1
= 0.85 + + 0.43 +
0.050 0.005
1.28 0.93 5.9
+ + + + = 1.4939 m
2
K/W
In the following table, the thermal resistance values of the rooms are summarised.
Table 5.7 Thermal resistance of the floor in the project rooms.
N. Room
Thermal resistance of
covering R
,B
[m
2
K/W]
Upward thermal resistance
R
O
[m
2
K/W]
Thermal resistance of
covering R
U
[m
2
K/W]
1 Bedroom 0.017 0.1447 1.4939
2 Living room 0.017 0.1447 1.4939
3 Kitchen 0.017 0.1447 1.4939
4 Bathroom 0.010 0.1377 1.4939
5 Storeroom 0.017 0.1447 1.4939
174
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
5.3.2 Required thermal flow
In order to proceed with the choice of spacing for each room, it is first necessary to calculate not only the required thermal flow qa, but also
the coefficient R
q
given by the expression [5.8] and the log mean temperature difference T
H
for each available spacing. The coefficients a
B
,
a
T
mT
, a
U
mU
, a
D
mD
used in the calculation of R
q
are determined respectively from the diagrams in Figure 5.13, Figure 5.14, Figure 5.15 and Figure
5.16. The resulting values, as shown in the table, will be used in the following paragraphs in the calculation of the supply temperatures and
the choice of spacing.
Table 5.8 Characteristic coefficients and log mean temperature difference for each room and or each available pipe spacing.
N. Room
q
a

[W/m
2
]
Spacing p
[cm]
a
B
a
T
mT
a
U
mU
a
D
mD
a
C
R
q
T
H

[C]
1 Bedroom 85
7.5 0.97 1.00 1.00 0.980 -85.21 0.155 13.20
15 0.97 0.82 1.00 0.964 -42.61 0.191 16.25
22.5 0.97 0.68 1.00 0.955 -28.40 0.232 19.69
30 0.97 0.56 1.00 0.950 -21.30 0.281 23.89
37.5 0.97 0.46 1.00 0.948 -17.04 0.346 29.41
2 Living room 82
7.5 0.97 1.00 1.00 0.980 -85.21 0.155 12.73
15 0.97 0.82 1.00 0.964 -42.61 0.191 15.67
22.5 0.97 0.68 1.00 0.955 -28.40 0.232 19.00
30 0.97 0.56 1.00 0.950 -21.30 0.281 23.04
37.5 0.97 0.46 1.00 0.948 -17.04 0.346 28.37
3 Kitchen 80
7.5 0.97 1.00 1.00 0.980 -85.21 0.155 12.42
15 0.97 0.82 1.00 0.964 -42.61 0.191 15.29
22.5 0.97 0.68 1.00 0.955 -28.40 0.232 18.53
30 0.97 0.56 1.00 0.950 -21.30 0.281 22.48
37.5 0.97 0.46 1.00 0.948 -17.04 0.346 27.68
4 Bathroom 107
7.5 1.01 1.00 1.00 0.980 -85.21 0.149 15.95
15 1.01 0.82 1.00 0.963 -42.61 0.184 19.65
22.5 1.01 0.67 1.00 0.955 -28.40 0.226 24.15
30 1.01 0.55 1.00 0.950 -21.30 0.276 29.51
37.5 1.01 0.45 1.00 0.948 -17.04 0.338 36.13
The storeroom is not included in the calculation as it already contains the supply/return manifold of the heating loops and the pipes will
supply the required flow, which is, in this case, very low (q
a
= 50 W/m
2
). It is possible to verify this statement by calculating the heat flow
delivered by the pipes, which pass through the storeroom.
175
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
5.3.3 Thermal flow limit and maximum floor temperature
Only pipe spacing that generates a flow limit q
G
above the flow required qa will be accepted. In the following table the flow limits and
available spacing are indicated for each room. The coefficients , B
G
and n
G
are also indicated and they are required for calculating the flow
limits and are determined from the expression [5.10] and from the diagrams of Figure 5.17 and Figure 5.18.
For simplicity sake, the coefficients R
q
, are indicated once more, as they are used in calculating q
G
, as well as the comparison with the
required thermal flow which permits evaluation of the applicability of each pipe spacing.
Table 5.9 Thermal flow limit for each room in the project.
N. Room
q
a

[W/m
2
]
Spacing p
[cm]
R
q

[m
2
K/W]
B
G
n
G
q
G
q
a
q
G
1 Bedroom 85
7.5 0.155 1.0 94.5 0.013 97.90 Yes
15 0.191 1.0 74.5 0.077 92.97 Yes
22.5 0.232 1.0 54.5 0.148 84.68 No
30 0.282 1.0 35.1 0.247 74.45 No
37.5 0.344 1.0 17.4 0.411 60.65 No
2 Living room 82
7.5 0.155 1.0 94.5 0.013 97.90 Yes
15 0.191 1.0 74.5 0.077 92.97 Yes
22.5 0.232 1.0 54.5 0.148 84.68 Yes
30 0.282 1.0 35.1 0.247 74.45 No
37.5 0.344 1.0 17.4 0.411 60.65 No
3 Kitchen 80
7.5 0.155 1.0 94.5 0.013 97.90 Yes
15 0.191 1.0 74.5 0.077 92.97 Yes
22.5 0.232 1.0 54.5 0.148 84.68 Yes
30 0.282 1.0 35.1 0.247 74.45 No
37.5 0.344 1.0 17.4 0.411 60.65 No
4 Bathroom 107
7.5 0.149 1.247 94.5 0.013 122.02 Yes
15 0.184 1.247 74.5 0.077 115.58 Yes
22.5 0.226 1.247 54.5 0.148 105.12 No
30 0.276 1.247 35.1 0.247 92.19 No
37.5 0.338 1.247 17.4 0.411 74.70 No
The selected pipe spacing must be excluded in that they generate surface temperatures above the physiological limits imposed by the
standard EN 1264.
176
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
5.3.4 The characteristics curves and the limit curve
When the coefficient R
q
is known for each available pipe spacing, the characteristic curves for the floor heating system can be traced.
If, on the same graph, the points corresponding to the flow limit q
G
are intersected, the limit curve is obtained. All the rooms with the same
floor layer composition have the same curves; therefore, the characteristic curves of the bedroom, living room and kitchen are traced in
Figure 5.9, whereas the bathroom is shown in Figure 5.10.
Figure 5.9 Characteristics curves of the bedroom, living room and kitchen.
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0 5 10 15 20 25
H
[C]
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

f
l
o
w

q

[
W
/
m
2
]
30 35
7.5
15
22.5
30
37.5
Spacing p [cm]
97.90
92.97
84.68
74.45
60.65
Limit flow q
G
[W/m
2
]
85
Required flow q
a
[W/m
2
]
82
Acceptable
Not acceptable
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 5.10 Characteristic curves of the bathroom.
0 5 10 15 20 25
H
[C]
30 35 40
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

f
l
o
w

q

[
W
/
m
2
]
140
Acceptable
Not acceptable
7.5
15
22,5
30
37.5
Spacing p [cm]
122.02
115.58
105.12
92.19
74.70
Limit flow q
G
[W/m
2
]
107
Required flow q
a
[W/m
2
]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
177
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
5.3.5 Supply temperature
To calculate the supply temperature, the room with the highest thermal flow, excluding the bathroom, must be considered. In this case, the
bedroom has the highest thermal flow which is equal to q
a,max
= 85 W/m
2
. As required by the standard, all the coefficients are calculated for
tracing the characteristic curves and the corresponding limit curve of the room, considering a floor covering with a thermal resistance equal
to a R
,B
= 0.1 m
2
K/W (from the project information, there is no other floor covering with a higher thermal resistance).
Table 5.10 Characteristic coefficients and log mean temperature difference for the calculation of the supply temperature.
Room
q
a,max

[W/m
2
]
Spacing p
[cm]
a
B
a
T
mT
a
U
mU
a
D
mD
a
C
R
q

[m
2
K/W]
T
H

[C]
Fictitious with
structure as in
project with
R
,B
= 0.1 m
2
K/W
85
7.5 0.61 1.0 1.0 0.984 -85.21 0.247 20.99
15 0.61 0.86 1.0 0.972 -42.61 0.289 24.58
22.5 0.61 0.75 1.0 0.963 -28.40 0.334 28.35
30 0.61 0.65 1.0 0.958 -21.30 0.386 32.80
37.5 0.61 0.56 1.0 0.956 -17.04 0.448 38.10
Table 5.11 Thermal flow limit for the calculation of the supply temperature.
Room
q
a,max

[W/m
2
]
Spacing p
[cm]
R
q

[m
2
K/W]
B
G
n
G
q
G
q
a
q
G
Fictitious with
structure as in
project with
R
,B
= 0.1 m
2
K/W
85
7.5 0.247 1.0 94.5 0.013 98.50 Yes
15 0.289 1.0 74.5 0.077 96.24 Yes
22.5 0.334 1.0 54.5 0.148 90.22 Yes
30 0.386 1.0 35.1 0.247 82.53 No
37.5 0.448 1.0 17.4 0.411 72.92 No
In Figure 5.11 the minimum and maximum values of the log mean temperature difference T
H,min
and T
H,max
are shown. These values are
used in expressions [5.12] and [5.13], to calculate the minimum and maximum values of the supply temperature:
T
m,min
= T
i
+ T
H,min
= 20 + 20.99 = 40.99C 41C
5
T
H,max
T
m,max
= T
i
+ 5 = 20 + 5
1.1929
1.1929 - 1
exp
5
T
H,max
exp - 1
= 50.92C 50C
The supply temperature T
m
will have to be chosen from the acceptable range of 41C to 50C. In the example dealt with we consider a
supply temperature of T
m
= 46C, an average value in the acceptable range.
Figure 5.11 Calculation of the supply temperature.
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

f
l
o
w

q

[
W
/
m
2
]
85
0 5 10 15 20 25
H
[C]
30 35 40
Maximum flow q
a,max
[W/m
2
]
T
H,min
= 20.99C T
H,max
= 28.35C
Curves with floor covering
R
I,B
= 0.1 m
2
K/W
7.5
15
22.5
30
37.5
Spacing p [cm]
98.50
96.24
90.22
82.53
72.92
Limit flow q
G
[W/m
2
]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
178
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
5.3.6 Circuit dimensioning
It is now possible to proceed with the calculation of all the other parameters: temperature difference, return temperature, downward
thermal flow, loop length, flow, velocity and pressure loss, some of which are fundamental for the definitive dimensioning of the circuits and,
therefore, for the choice of the pipe spacing for each room. The temperature difference T is calculated by using the diagram in Figure 5.19
when the room temperature T
i
, is known, the supply temperature T
m
and the log mean temperature difference T
H
. By using the expression
[5.20] the calculation of the return temperature is immediate. The floor temperature T
f
is calculated with the diagram in Figure 5.20 once
the room temperature T
i
and the required flow q
a
is known.
The downward thermal flow q
b
is determined by expression [5.15]. The length L of the heating loops is calculated by the expression [5.17].
The flow m is calculated with the diagram in Figure 5.21 in relation to the total heat output and the temperature difference T.
The diagrams of the pressure losses are used for evaluating the velocity v and the pressure loss p which must be increased by one
percentage point that depends on the type of loop employed. In the example the loop is spiral and the pressure losses are increased by 13%
(see chapter 3.1.13). The results calculated for each room are shown in the following table:
Table 5.12 Results.
N. Room
q
a

[W/m
2
]
Spacing p
[cm]
T
[C]
T
r

[C]
T
f

[C]
q
b

[W/m
2
]
L
[m]
m
[l/s]
v
[m/s]
p
[mbar]
1 Bedroom 85
7.5 21 25 27.7 8.23 152 0.0121 0.11 52
15 16.5 29.5 27.7 8.23 76 0.0154 0.14 38
2
Living
room
82
7.5 21 24 27.5 7.94 215 0.0165 0.15 122
15 17.5 28.5 27.5 7.94 107 0.0198 0.18 82
22.5 12.5 33.5 27.5 7.94 72 0.0277 0.24 97
3 Kitchen 80
7.5 20.5 25.5 27.3 7.70 139 0.0106 0.093 38
15 18 28 27.3 7.70 70 0.0121 0.11 25
22.5 13.5 32.5 27.3 7.70 47 0.0162 0.14 26
4 Bathroom 107
7.5 17 29 29.6 9.86 72 0.0089 0.08 15
15 11 35 29.6 9.86 36 0.0137 0.12 15
Choice of the definitive spacing must be made by excluding the spacing values that do not respect the limits indicated in paragraph 5.2.11.
In the example all the values are within the limits. If the MIXAL 16x2 multilayer pipe is to be used in 100 m rolls, reduced pipe spacing
values must be chosen which allow circuits under 100 m. For the bathroom, a spacing of 15 cm is chosen, so that the flow velocity is not
too near the minimum permissible value.
Table 5.13 Choice of ultimate pipe spacing.
N. Room
Spacing p
[cm]
T
r

[C]
Q
a
+Q
b

[W]
L
[m]
m
[l/s]
v
[m/s]
p
[mbar]
1 Bedroom 15 27.7 1063 76 0.0154 0.14 38
2 Living room 22.5 27.5 1448 72 0.0277 0.24 97
3 Kitchen 15 27.3 912 70 0.0121 0.11 25
4 Bathroom 15 29.6 631 36 0.0137 0.12 15
4054 254 0.0689
179
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
Figure 5.12 Example building - drawing of loops.
Room no. 1
Bedroom
Area 11.4 m
2
Room no. 5
Storeroom
Area 2.4 m
2
Room no. 3
Kitchen
Area 10.4 m
2
Room no. 2
Living room
Area 16.1 m
2
Room no. 4
Bathroom
Area 7.2 m
2
(5.4 m
2
)
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
180
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
5.3.7 Balancing of heating circuits
To determine the regulation points of the flow-check valves of each loop, it is necessary, first of all, to consider the least favourable circuit,
therefore, the one with the highest pressure loss, in this case, the living room.
For the flow value indicated in table m
2
= 0.0277 l/s = 99.72 l/h the following is determined:
p
2,flow-check valve
= 4.3 mbar from the characteristic curve of the flow-check valve in correspondence with the maximum opening (t.a.),
p
2,valve
= 4.3 mbar from the characteristic curve of the valve with thermostatic option,
p
2,circuit
is the pressure loss indicated in Table 5.13.
The total pressure loss in the heating circuit of room 2 is, therefore:
p
2,total
= p
2,flow-check valve
+ p
2,valve
+ p
2,circuit
= 4.3 + 4.3 + 97 = 105.6 mbar
From the characteristic curve of the valve with thermostatic capacity for circuit 1, we have p
1,valve
= 1.3 mbar and
p
1,flow-check valve
= p
2,total
- p
1,valve
- p
1,circuit
= 105.6 - 1.3 - 34 = 70.3 mbar
From the characteristic curve of the valve with thermostatic option for circuit 3 we have p
3,valve
=1.3 mbar and
p
4,flow-check valve
= p
2,total
- p
4,valve
- p
4,circuit
= 105.6 - 0.8 - 22 = 82.8 mbar
From the characteristic curve of the valve with thermostatic option for circuit 4 we have
p4,valve
=1.3 mbar and
p
4,flow-check valve
= p
2,total
- p
4,valve
- p
4,circuit
= 105.6 - 1.0 - 12 = 92.6 mbar
In correspondence with these losses, the regulations of the flow-check valves are obtained, as shown in the table.
Table 5.14 Adjustment points of the circuit flow-check valves.
N. Room
m
[l/s]
p
i,flow-check valve

[mbar]
K
v
Number of turns
1 Bedroom 0.0154 70.3 0.21 0.250.5
2 Living room 0.0277 4.3 1.52 t.a.
3 Kitchen 0.0121 82.8 0.15 0.250.5
4 Bathroom 0.0137 92.6 0.16 0.250.5
To calculate K
v
the typical expression can be used:
1000
p 1000
K
v
=
m
with p expressed in mbar and m in l/h.
181
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
Figure 5.13
a
B
0.6
0.7
0.8
1.0
1.2
0.5
0
0.4
R
,B
[m
2
K/W]
0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14
0.9
1.1
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
E
[W/mK]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 5.14
0
R
,B
[m
2
K/W]
0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14
0.6
0.7
0.8
1.0
1.1
0.5
0.4
0.9
5
7.5
10
15
20
22.5
25
30
35
37.5
p [cm]
a
m
T
T
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
182
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
Figure 5.15
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.12
0.14
0.02
0
0.10
a
R
,
B

[
m
2
K
/
W
]
5
7.5
10 15 20
22.5
25 30
35
37.5
p [cm]
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
s
U
[cm]
m
u
u
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
183
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
Figure 5.16
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.12
0.14
0.02
0
0.10
R
,
B

[
m
2
K
/
W
]
0.99
0.98
0.97
0.96
0.95
0.94
0.93
0.92
1.00 20
16
14
De [mm]
5 7.5 10 15 20
22.5
25 30
35
37.5
p [cm]
a
m
D
D
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
184
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
Figure 5.17
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
40
60
80
120
20
0
100
B
G
7.5 10
15
20
22.5
25
30
35
37.5
p [cm]
5
3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7 2.5
s
u
/
E
[cmmK/W]
s
u
[cm] with
E
= 1.28 W/mK
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 5.18
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.45
0.20
0.15
0.40
n
G
7.5
10
15
20
22.5
25
30
35
37.5
p [cm]
5
3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7 2.5
0.10
0.05
0
s
u
/
E
[cmmK/W]
s
u
[cm] with
E
= 1.28 W/mK
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
185
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
Figure 5.19
5
T
m
- T
i
[C]
10 15 20 25 30
20
16
14
12
10
8
5
18
5
10
15
25
30
0
20
T
H
4
2
15
6
35
35
0
T = T
m
- T
r
[C]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 5.20
20
q
a
[W/m
2
]
40 60 80 100 120 140 160
6
8
10
14
16
4
2
12
180
T
f

-

T
i

[
C
]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
186
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

F
L
O
O
R

H
E
A
T
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

I
N

C
O
M
P
L
I
A
N
C
E

W
I
T
H
U
N
I

E
N

1
2
6
4
5
Figure 5.21
2 4 6 8 10
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.02
0
0.24
0
20
16
14
12
10
8 5
18
4 2
15
6
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.10
0.18
0.20
0.22
Q
tot
= Q
a
+ Q
b
[kW]
m

[
l
/
s
]
1 3 5 7 9
T = T
m
- T
r
[C]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
187
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
6 DIMENSIONING OF ANTI-SNOW AND ANTI-ICE SYSTEMS (SNOW-MELT)
6.1 Introduction
Radiant panel heating systems can be used for eliminating snow and ice in outdoor areas such as roads, bridges, viaducts, airport runways
and helicopter landing pads, sidewalks, car parks, athletic fields, garage entrance ramps, hospitals, hotels, warehouse loading docks, etc.
The problem of snow and ice is usually dealt with by scattering salt or other anti freeze substances. As well as being unreliable, these
methods cause pollution to ground water and, in fact, some regional laws forbid their use. Heating systems with radiant panels have proven
to be the most efficient and reliable for this type of application. Furthermore, the Valsir PEXAL and MIXAL multilayer pipe is the best choice
for this type of installation in that the internal aluminium layer renders the pipe more resistant than other traditional pipes in plastic and at
the same time, its elasticity makes it easier to install than metal pipes.
As with indoor radiant panel heating systems, sizing of the system must be carried out meticulously in order to achieve maximum
performance and to avoid energy wastage. There are some factors that should be considered in relation to the climatic conditions of the
installation site and the type of system that is to installed.
Climatic factors
Rate of snowfall: this factor is extremely important in designing a system; it is the speed with which snow falls on the surface to be
heated and it is measured in cm/h.
Air temperature: important in determining the thermal energy necessary for the removal of both snow and ice.
Wind velocity: wind removes heat from the heating surface, thus obstructing snow melt and facilitating the formation of ice.
Relative humidity: the higher the humidity the more thermal energy will be required for melting the snow.
Factors relating to the system
Surface temperature: in order to avoid ice formation, the temperature of the heating surface must not be lower than 1C.
Higher temperatures would lead to energy waste. The system must be capable of delivering sufficient thermal output even in varying
external climatic conditions.
Heating fluid: generally an antifreeze solution is utilized in these systems which is made up of a mixture of water and ethylene or
propylene glycol, in adequate proportions, depending on the minimum external temperature (see the tables in the appendix).
Water drainage: an excellent drainage system for the melted snow must be provided; any stagnant water left on the surface would lead
to a reduction in heat output.
Thermal insulation: under the heating coils it is advisable to lay a layer of insulation, which reduces direct downward thermal dispersion
(heat loss). The type of insulation is closely related to the expected surface load. Extruded polystyrene insulating panels may be used for
light loads (max. load 250 kPa) or insulating screed (generally concrete with additional spheres of insulating material) for high surface
loads caused by heavy vehicles, such as operational machinery and articulated trucks, etc.
Heating screed: the pipe may be buried in the concrete or directly in the ground. Asphalt pavements, however, are not advisable for two
reasons. Asphalt is usually laid at 150C and this temperature may cause damage to the pipes. Furthermore, the subsequent phase of
asphalt compaction process (by means of rollers) may put excessive strain on the pipes and result in deformation of the same.
188
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
6.2 System types
The heating circuits are embedded in the ground in different ways, depending on the type of area to be heated. There are essentially three
types.
Figure 6.2.1
striped cement or rubber
515 cm
concrete
insulation
ground or concrete
2 cm
24 cm
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The pipes are embedded directly in the layer of concrete, which also forms the pavement. This is generally the case with entrance/exit
ramps. The pipe must be embedded in the concrete at a depth that can vary from 5 to 15 cm.
A layer of striped cement is laid over the surface layer or else a layer of rubber is laid. An installation example is shown in the figure.
Figure 6.2.2
412 cm
5 cm
24 cm
asphalt or ground
concrete
insulation
ground or concrete
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The pipes are embedded in the concrete and the pavement is laid on top. In this case the thickness of the concrete, which contains the
pipes, can be reduced. The thickness can vary from 4 to 12 cm. The surface layer can be made of different materials, such as asphalt,
earth, etc. This type of application is often used for roads and parking lots.
Figure 6.2.3
ground or concrete
ground or concrete
sand
10 cm
820 cm
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The pipes are immersed in a layer of sand or gravel, over which the pavement is laid. The bed of sand or gravel in which the pipes are laid
must have a thickness of 8 to 20 cm. The surface layer can be made of concrete or earth, as with athletic fields.
189
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
6.3 System design
This type of system utilises a mix of water and antifreeze solution, which cannot be heated directly by the boiler. A stainless steel plate heat
exchanger must therefore be positioned between the system and the boiler. The project supply temperature is reached by using a three-
way valve that mixes the flow water with the return water. The three-way valve can be with an on/off servomotor or it can be modulating.
In the first case, a hygrostat and a thermostat actuates the servomotor, which in turn actuates the three-way valve in the presence of
atmospheric conditions that cause the formation of ice on the surface (humidity and temperature).
In the second case, a control unit connected to a probe which measures the temperature of the ground under which the circuits are
installed, actuates the servomotor which acts on the three-way valve in such a way that the heating circuits maintain a surface temperature
above 0C.
Figure 6.3.1 Hygrostat and thermostat actuate the servomotor.
Anti-freeze mix
reintegration circuit
B
o
i
l
e
r
Heat exchanger
Expansion vessel
Heating circuits
Thermostat
Hygrostat
ON/OFF
valve
Circulation pump
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 6.3.2 The surface temperature probe actuates the servomotor.
Adjustment
control uniti
Anti-freeze mix
reintegration circuit
B
o
i
l
e
r
Heat exchanger
Heating circuits
Surface
temperature
probe
Proportional
valve
Circulation pump
Expansion vessel
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
190
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
6.4 Dimensioning: theory
6.4.1 The required thermal output
The sizing of a snow/ice melting heating system calls for the preliminary calculation of the specific heat output required. The method
adopted in this chapter is recommended by ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.).
The specific heat output required by the heating floor is:
q
a
= q
s
+ q
m
+ a
r
(q
e
+ q
h
) [6.1]
where:
q
s
is the sensitive heat transferred to the snow [W/m
2
],
q
m
is the melting heat of the snow [W/m
2
],
q
e
is the evaporation heat of the water [W/m
2
],
q
h
is the heat transferred by convection and radiation from the atmosphere to the water [W/m
2
],
a
r
is the ratio of the snow-free area to total area A to be heated.
The coefficient a
r
takes on different values depending on the type of area to be heated.
Table 6.1 Ratio of snow-free area to area to be heated.
a
r
Area to be heated
0 Private roads and walkways, private ramps.
0.5 Commercial areas, office and shop walkways, roads with elevated traffic.
1 Squares, parking lots, access ramps to car parks, airport runways and helicopter landing pads, athletic fields.
The expressions for calculating the various contributing factors to required heat output are:
q
s
= -5.8083 s
n
T
ea
[6.2]
q
m
= 926.10 s
n
[6.3]
q
e
= 3390.5 (0.04496 v
w
+ 0.055) (0.188 - 2.953 10
-4
p
av
) [6.4]
q
h
= 64.687 (0.04496 v
w
+ 0.055) (0.556 - T
ea
) [6.5]
where
T
ea
is the air temperature [C],
v
W
is the wind velocity [m/s],
p
av
is the vapour pressure of the moist air [Pa] that can be calculated with the relative humidity R.H. [%] by means of the following
expression:
pav = 6.1185 U.R. exp
240.9 + T
ea
17.502 T
ea [6.6]
and s
n
is the equivalent intensity of the snowfall [cm/h].
Equivalent intensity means the equivalent in water of the level of snow covering; this value depends on the snow density, the denser (more
compact) the snow, the greater the equivalent intensity in water.
The following table allows us to calculate the equivalent intensity of the snowfall in relation to the density of the snow and the intensity of
the snowfall.
191
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
Table 6.2 Equivalent intensity of the snowfall.
Intensity of the
snowfall
Accumulation
of snow in
24 hours
Snow densit [kg/m
3
]
25 38 50 63 75
Equivalent intensity of the snowfall
[cm/h] [cm] [cm/h]
0.2 5 0.005 0.008 0.010 0.013 0.015
0.3 7 0.008 0.011 0.015 0.019 0.023
0.4 10 0.010 0.015 0.020 0.025 0.030
0.6 14 0.015 0.023 0.030 0.038 0.045
0.8 19 0.020 0.030 0.040 0.050 0.060
1.0 24 0.025 0.038 0.050 0.063 0.075
1.2 29 0.030 0.046 0.060 0.076 0.090
1.5 36 0.038 0.057 0.075 0.095 0.113
2.0 48 0.050 0.076 0.100 0.126 0.150
2.5 60 0.063 0.095 0.125 0.158 0.188
3.0 72 0.075 0.114 0.150 0.189 0.225
3.5 84 0.088 0.133 0.175 0.221 0.263
4.0 96 0.100 0.152 0.200 0.252 0.300
4.5 108 0.113 0.171 0.225 0.284 0.338
5.0 120 0.125 0.190 0.250 0.315 0.375
5.5 132 0.138 0.209 0.275 0.347 0.413
6.0 144 0.150 0.228 0.300 0.378 0.450
6.5 156 0.163 0.247 0.325 0.410 0.488
7.0 168 0.175 0.266 0.350 0.441 0.525
7.5 180 0.188 0.285 0.375 0.473 0.563
8.0 192 0.200 0.304 0.400 0.504 0.600
8.5 204 0.213 0.323 0.425 0.536 0.638
9.0 216 0.225 0.342 0.450 0.567 0.675
9.5 228 0.238 0.361 0.475 0.599 0.713
10.0 240 0.250 0.380 0.500 0.630 0.750
192
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
6.4.2 Layer composition of the radiant panel
The heating loops are embedded in the screed, which can be made up of different layers. The following shows the generic structure of a
radiant floor for snow/ice melting.
Figure 6.4.1 Generic layer composition of a radiant panel.
p
s
a,2
,
a,2
s
b,2
,
b,2
s
a,1
,
a,1
s
b,1
,
b,1
snow
concrete
T
sa
T
ea
,
a
T
m
ground
asphalt
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The layer composition also includes a film of water over the heated floor generated by the melting of the mantle of snow; this must be
considered at a temperature of 1C, close to the melting point.
s
a,i
is the thickness of each layer i which makes up the screed above the centre line of the pipe [m],
s
b,i
is the thickness of each layer i which makes up the screed below the centre line of the pipe [m],

a,i
and
b,i
are the coefficients of heat conduction of each/ith layer which makes up the screed, both below and above the centre line
of the pipe o [W/mK],

a
2
K] in the upper part of the radiant panel valued at the temperature of
the external air T
ea
which is generally assumed to be equal to 20 W/m
2
K,

f
is the coefficient of convective heat exchange of the film of water [W/m
2
K] evaluated at the temperature T
f
= 1C and generally
assumed to be equal to 500 W/m
2
K,
b is the coefficient of convective heat exchange of the air [W/m
2
K] in the lower part of the radiant panel evaluated at the temperature
of the external air T
eb
if the panel is elevated (viaducts, bridges, etc.) it is assumed to be equal to 16 W/m
2
K,
K
a
and K
b
are the coefficients of total transmittance of the screed both above and below the centre line of the pipe [W/m
2
K],
p is the pipe spacing of the loops [cm].
The coefficient of total transmittance in the upper part of the radiant panel is given by:
2
1
K
a
=
0.5 1+ 1+
+
i

p
2
i
s
a,i
s
a,i
a,i
1
f
[6.7]
The coefficient of total transmittance in the lower part of the radiant panel, if laid directly over ground, is:
2
1
K
b
=
0.5 1+ 1+
i

p
2
i
s
b,i
s
b,i
b,i
[6.8]
if elevated (viaducts, bridges, etc.), is:
2
1
K
b
=
0.5 1+ 1+
+
i

p
2
i
s
b,i
s
b,i
b,i
1
b
[6.9]
193
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
6.4.3 Calculation of temperatures
Once we know the specific heat output qa necessary to melt the snow or de-ice the surface, the mean temperature of the heating fluid can
be determined:
T
med
= T
f
+ = 1 +
q
a
K
a
K
a
q
a
[6.10]
6.4.4 Downward specific heat output
The downward specific heat output [W/m
2
] and which, therefore, does not contribute to heating the surface, is calculated by means of the
following expression:
q
b
= K
b
(T
med
- T
eb
) [6.11]
where T
eb
is the temperature of the air under the panel in the case of elevated systems (bridges, viaducts, etc.), whereas in the case of
heating systems laid on the ground, it is the temperature of the ground.
6.4.5 Calculation of the number of loops
The number of heating loops is determined by the length of each one, by the pipe spacing chosen and the total area to be heated. The length
of the loops is limited by the length of the rolls available and above all by the maximum allowable pressure loss.
From the following table it is possible to determine the maximum surface area that can be covered with a givenloop length and pre-
established pipe spacing.
Table 6.3 Maximum area covered by a single circuit.
Loop length Pipe spacing p [cm]
L 5 7.5 10 15 20 22.5 25 30 35 37.5 40
[m] Heating area A
j
[m
2
]
25 1.25 1.875 2.5 3.75 5 5.65 6.25 7.5 8.75 9.4 10
50 2.5 3.75 5 7.5 10 11.3 12.5 15 17.5 18.8 20
100 5 7.5 10 15 20 22.5 25 30 35 37.5 40
150 7.5 11.3 15 22.5 30 33.8 37.5 45 52.5 56.3 60
200 10 15 20 30 40 45 50 60 70 75 80
The heating area A
j
is given by the following expression:
A
j
= 0.01 p L [6.12]
while the total area to be heated is given by the sum of the single heating areas:
A = A
1
+ A
2
+ ... + A
n
=
j
A
j
[6.13]
and, therefore, supposing the loops are all the same length, then the number of circuits is:
A
n =
A
j
[6.14]
194
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
6.4.6 Calculation of the flow rates and the temperatures of the heating fluid
The required flow rate [kg/s] to melt the snow on the surface is given by the following expression:
m =
(q
a
+ q
b
) A
j
4180 T
[6.15]
where
A
j
is the surface to be heated by the /jth loop [m
2
],
q
a
and q
b
are the downward and upward specific heat outputs [W/m
2
],
T = T
m
- T
r
is the temperature difference of the heating fluid and therefore T
m
and T
r
are respectively the supply and return temperature of
the heating fluid [C].
Once the temperature difference has been established, the supply and return temperature of the fluid can be calculated:
T
2
T
m
= T
med
+ [6.16]
T
2
T
r
= T
med
- [6.17]
By consulting the diagrams of pressure loss, in relation to the diameter of the pipe and the flow rate that has just been calculated, velocity
and pressure loss can be calculated. The velocity limits for each pipe diameter are indicated in the table.
Table 6.4 Velocity and flow limits.
Pipe v
min
[m/s] v
max
[m/s]
m
min

[l/s]
m
max

[l/s]
MIXAL 20x2 0.05 1.00 0.0101 0.201
PEXAL 26x3 0.05 1.00 0.0157 0.314
195
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
6.4.7 Typical snowmelt systems
A typical snowmelt system is represented by the mono-layer system shown in the following figure. The heating loops can be made using a
20 or 26 mm diameter pipe and the layer of support slab below the pipe must be made up of at least 5 cm of concrete. The layer covering
the pipe must be made with at least 5 cm of concrete and a thickness of F made of another material that yields a thermal resistance that
is equal to 6 cm of concrete.
Figure 6.4.2 Layer composition of a typical snowmelt system.
30 cm
5 cm
concrete
ground
pavement
5 cm
F
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The data indicated in the table has been calculated with a relative humidity of 80% and the temperature of the film of water at 1C.
Table 6.5 Thermal output and average temperature of the fluid for snowmelt systems.
T
ea
-15 -10 -5 0
s
n
a
r
v
w
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
0.1
1
q
a
250 317 384 451 207 256 305 355 161 191 221 250 111 119 127 136
T
med
23 29 35 41 19 24 28 32 15 18 21 23 11 12 12 13
0.5
q
a
176 209 243 276 153 177 202 226 128 143 158 173 102 106 110 114
T
med
17 20 23 26 15 17 19 21 12 14 15 16 10 10 11 11
0
q
a
101 101 101 101 98 98 98 98 96 96 96 96 93 93 93 93
T
med
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
0.2
1
q
a
352 419 486 553 306 355 404 453 257 286 316 346 204 212 220 228
T
med
32 38 44 50 28 32 37 41 24 26 29 32 19 20 21 21
0.5
q
a
277 311 344 378 251 276 300 325 224 239 254 268 194 199 203 207
T
med
26 29 32 35 23 25 28 30 21 22 23 25 18 19 19 19
0
q
a
203 203 203 203 197 197 197 197 191 191 191 191 185 185 185 185
T
med
19 19 19 19 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 17 17 17 17
0.3
1
q
a
453 520 587 654 404 453 502 551 352 382 412 441 296 304 313 321
T
med
41 47 53 59 37 41 46 50 32 35 38 40 27 28 29 29
0.5
q
a
378 412 445 479 350 374 399 423 319 334 349 364 287 291 295 299
T
med
35 38 41 43 32 34 36 39 29 31 32 33 26 27 27 28
0
q
a
304 304 304 304 295 295 295 295 287 287 287 287 278 278 278 278
T
med
28 28 28 28 27 27 27 27 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
0.4
1
q
a
554 621 688 755 503 552 601 650 448 478 507 537 389 397 405 413
T
med
50 56 62 68 46 50 54 59 41 43 46 49 35 36 37 38
0.5
q
a
480 513 547 580 448 473 497 522 415 430 445 459 380 384 388 392
T
med
44 47 50 52 41 43 45 47 38 39 40 42 35 35 35 36
0
q
a
405 405 405 405 394 394 394 394 382 382 382 382 370 370 370 370
T
med
37 37 37 37 36 36 36 36 35 35 35 35 34 34 34 34
196
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
6.5 Dimensioning: practice
The use of the calculation diagrams is explained by means of a simple example of radiant panel sizing for snow melting. A heated access
ramp is to be built with a length of 25 m and a width of 4.2 m. The installation is to be situated in the Brescia area.
The pipes are embedded in a layer of concrete with a thickness of 5 cm starting from the centre line of the pipes. There is a 4 cm layer of
concrete under the pipes and a 2 cm layer of expanded polystyrene insulation.
Relative humidity is R.H.=70% and snowfall intensity is 4 cm/h (snow density 50 kg/m
3
). From the table in appendix B we observe a
minimum temperature of - 7C and a wind velocity of 1.5 m/s for the climatic zone in question.
6.5.1 Required heat output
The required specific heat output qa is given by the expression [6.1]. The diagram in Figure 6.5.2 allows us to calculate the sum q
s
+q
m

(sensitive heat transferred to the snow + melting heat of the snow) in relation to the snowfall intensity sn and the external temperature T
ea
.
The diagram in Figure 6.5.3 allows us to calculate the sum q
e
+q
h
(evaporation heat + heat transferred by convection and radiation to the
water) in relation to the relative humidity R.H., external temperature Tea and the wind velocity v
W
.
Table 6.2 is used to determine the equivalent intensity of the snowfall that is equal to s
n
= 0.2 cm/h. For the type of area to be heated we
consider a
r
= 1, the specific heat output to remove the snow from the access ramp is easily calculated:
q
a
= q
s
+ q
m
+ a
r
(q
e
+ q
h
) = 190 + 1 (105) = 295 W/m
2
6.5.2 Layer composition of the radiant panel
The radiant panel in the example is completely made of concrete and lies over a layer of insulation. The heat conductivity coefficients of the
two materials are determined from the tables in appendix C.
Once the total thickness starting from the pipe centres is known
i
s
a,i
= s
a,1
= 5 cm,
and the total thermal resistance
i
= = =
s
a,i
a,i

a,1
s
a,1
0,05 m
1.2 w/mK
0.0416 m
2
K/W
and assuming a pipe spacing of p = 30 cm, the total upward transmittance coefficient is determined from the diagram in Figure 6.5.4:
K
a
= 11.5 W/m
2
K
Then, by calculating the total downward thickness from the pipe centre
i
s
b,i
= s
b,1
= 6 cm,
the total heat resistance
0. 6 m
2
K/W
i
=

s
b,i
0.04 m
1.2 W/mK 0.035 W/mK
0.02 m
b,i

b,1

s
b,1

= = + =
and with a pipe spacing of p = 30 cm, from the diagram in Figure 6.5.5 the coefficient of total downward transmittance for a radiant panel
laid on the ground is determined from the diagram in Figure 6.5.5:
K
b
= 0,9 W/m
2
K
6.5.3 Calculation of temperatures
With the K
a
value and the required upward heat output value q
a
, the average temperature of the heating fluid is calculated from the diagram
in Figure 6.5.6:
T
med
= 27C
6.5.4 Downward specific thermal output
To determine the downward thermal output dispersed underneath the panel, a hypothetical ground temperature is used; it is legitimate to
assume a ground temperature under the panel equal to 1C. From the diagram in Figure 6.5.7, in relation to the K
b
value and the difference
between the supply temperature and that of the ground T
med
- T
eb
= 26C, we obtain q
b
= 24 W/m
2
.
197
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
6.5.5 Calculation of circuit loops
Considering 25 m circuits, with a pipe spacing of p = 30 cm, from Table 6.3 we get the area covered by each loop A
j
= 7.5 m
2
and therefore
the number of loops is n = 105/7.5 = 14.
6.5.6 Calculation of the flow and the temperature of the heating fluid
Considering a temperature difference of T=15C the return temperature is given by:
T
r
= T
med
-
T
2 2
15
= 27 - = 19.5 C
and the supply temperature by:
T
m
= T
r
+ T = 19.5 + 15 = 34.5 C.
The total thermal output of each loop is:
(q
a
+ q
b
) A
j
= (295 + 24) 7.5 = 2392 W = 2.39kW.
The flow rate of the heating fluid for total required thermal output values respectively below 5 kW and above 5 kW is calculated with the
diagrams in Figure 6.5.8 and Figure 6.5.9. From the first figure we obtain the flow rate:
m = 0.038 l/s
With this flow rate and a 20 mm pipe diameter with a thickness of 2 mm, velocity of the fluid is about 0.2 m/s with a pressure loss in each
circuit of 0.5 25 = 0.0125 bar. Figure 6.5.1 shows a general outline of the heated ramp indicating the pipe spacing and the distribution of
the 14 circuits.
Figure 6.5.1 General outline of the heated access ramp.
420 cm
30 cm
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
198
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
Figure 6.5.2
400
600
800
200
0
0.2 0.1 0 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
T
ea
[C] -40
-30
-20
-10
0
0.2 cm/h
190 W/m
2
-7C
500
700
300
100
q
s

+

q
m

[
W
/
m
2
]
s
n
[cm/h]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
199
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
Figure 6.5.3
10
0
50
60
70
80
90
40
30
20
100
T
ea
[C]
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 -35 -25 -15 -5
U
.
R
.

[
%
]
1800
400
600
800
1000
1200
200
0
1400
1600
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 v
w
[m/s]
v
w
[m/s]
200
300
400
105 W/m
2
1
.5
m
/s
0
500
600
700
0
1
2
3
1.5
2.5
0.5
100
-7C
70%
q
e

+

q
h

[
W
/
m
2
]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
200
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
Figure 6.5.4
4
10
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
35
15
20
25
30
5
40
0
p [cm]
5 7.5 10 15 20
22.5
25 30
35
37.5
40
0.010
0.012
0.014
0.016
0.018
0.020
0.025
0.030
0.040
0.050
0.120
0.140
0.070
0.090
0.080
0.060
0.100
0.160
2
5 cm
0
.0
4
m2
K
/W
11.5 W/m
2
K
3
0
c
m
s
a
,
t
o
t

[
c
m
]
K
a

[
W
/
m
2
K
]
s
a,i
/
a,i
[m
2
K/W]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
201
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
Figure 6.5.5
2
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
8
7
3
4
5
6
1
9
0
5 7.5 10 15 20 30
35
37.5
40
0.60
0.80
0.35
0.45
0.40
0.50
1.00
25
22.5
0,30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.14
0.12
0.16
0.10
p[cm]
10
1
4
3.5
1.5
2
2.5
3
0.5
4.5
0
5
6
7
6 cm
30 cm
0.9 W/m
2
K
0.6 m
2
K/W
K
b

[
W
/
m
2
K

]

(
P
a
n
e
l

n
o
t

p
l
a
c
e
d

o
v
e
r

g
r
o
u
n
d
)
K
b

[
W
/
m
2
K

]

(
P
a
n
e
l

p
l
a
c
e
d

o
v
e
r

g
r
o
u
n
d
)
s
b
,
t
o
t

[
c
m
]
s
b,i
/
b,i
[m
2
K/W]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
202
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
Figure 6.5.6
18
4
16
14
6
8
10
12
2
0
0
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
T
med
[C]
60
70
80
90
11.5 W/m
2
K
295 W/m
2
27C
50 40 30 20 10
K
a

[
W
/
m
2
K
]
q
a
[W/m
2
]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 6.5.7
4
6
8
10
1
0
0
100 200 300 400 500 600 700
10 20 30 40 50
80
90
60 70
2
3
5
7
9
24 W/m
2
0.9 W/m
2
K
2
6
C
K
b

[
W
/
m
2
K
]
q
b
[W/m
2
]
T
med
- T
eb
[C]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
203
D
I
M
E
N
S
I
O
N
I
N
G

O
F

A
N
T
I
-
S
N
O
W

A
N
D

A
N
T
I
-
I
C
E

S
Y
S
T
E
M
S

(
S
N
O
W
-
M
E
L
T
)
6
Figure 6.5.8
0.04
0.08
0.10
0.02
0
0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5
m

[
l
/
s
]
0.06
10
15
20
25
30
45
50
35
40
5.0
0.12
0.03
0.06
0.09
0.01
0.05
0.11
2.39 kW
0.038 l/s
1
5
C
Q
tot
= Q
a
+ Q
b
[kW]
T
m
- T
r
[C]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 6.5.9
0.25
0.05
0.225
0.20
0.10
0.125
0.15
0.175
0.025
0
0
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
m

[
l
/
s
]
0.075
T
m
- T
r
[C]
10 15 20 25 30
45
50
35 40
Q
tot
= Q
a
+ Q
b
[kW]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
7
204
7 INSTALLATION
7.1 Preliminary procedures and verifications
Some preliminary verifications are necessary before the heating system can be installed:
verify that the available floor size will allow for the installation of the scheduled floor heating system.
Verify whether the anti-humidity barrier needs to be used; to be utilized in rooms that lie directly over the ground.
Control that the surface of the subfloor is flat, does not sink and is free of masonry debris.
At this stage, the cabinet for the distribution manifold and the mixing kit should already have been installed and encased.
Figure 7.1 Anti-humidity film.
7.2 Installation of the manifold and mixing kit
The cabinet must be installed in such a way that the distribution manifold is higher than the laying level of the loops in order to guarantee
venting of the system.
The position of the manifold and mixing kit must observe the project indications and will therefore be in a central position to the rooms
to be heated, so that the supply pipes to the circuits are not too long.
Figure 7.2 Distribution manifold.
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
7
205
7.3 Laying of the edging strip
The edging strip must be placed vertically in relation to the subfloor and must run along all of the walls, and any pillars or stairways.
When applying the V-BAND edging strip, all of the adhesive surface can be used by removing both protective strips or just the bottom
part by leaving the upper protective strip intact. If the screed has a relatively small height, it is better not to use the entire adhesive
surface in order to avoid leaving traces of glue on the plaster. On the contrary, if the screed is to be quite high (industrial systems) the
entire surface can be used.
Figure 7.3 Edging strip.
7.4 Laying of insulation panels
The V-ESSE insulation panels must be laid in such a way that the successive panel surmounts the joint (rabbet) of the previous panel
(Figure 7.4).
Laying starts at the longest wall or at any rate, along the wall at the far side of the entrance to the room.
When laying the panels along the walls, the polyethylene film of the edging strip must be raised and placed over the panels themselves.
This will stop cement from filtering between the panels and the walls (Figure 7.5).
The panels can be cut with a rigid blade and the remaining panel, if of suitable dimensions, can be re-used.
To install the V-ELLE insulation panels, it is sufficient to unroll the panels and place them next to each other. An adhesive strip is used
to attach them together so that cement does not get in between them (Figure 7.6).
Figure 7.4 Laying order of the V-ESSE panel.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
7
206
Figure 7.5 Placement of the polyethylene film of the V-BAND strip over the insulation panels.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 7.6 V-ELLE insulation panel.
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
7
207
7.5 Laying the pipe
Before installing the pipe, it is necessary to verify on the project which room to start with. The circuits shall be installed consecutively
to avoid that the supply routes from the manifold to the heating loops of the rooms, do not cross over each other.
Always use the pipe unwinder; without this tool the roll may be unwinded incorrectly, causing the pipe to become tangled and twisted
and thus preventing a linear installation.
Unwind the roll starting with the outside coil.
The laying of the pipe must start at the supply manifold and, it the pipe pattern is counter flow, work should start at the perimeter of the
room working inward. In this case, the distance between the pipes must be double as compared to the design spacing, to leave space
for the return route to the manifold. Therefore, with a pipe spacing of 22.5 cm, the pipe must be laid starting from the perimeter of the
room toward the centre, leaving a distance of 45 cm between the pipes (Figure 7.7).
When the centre of the room has been reached, invert the installation direction by bending the pipe but at the same time respecting
the minimum radius allowed. (Figure 7.8).
For pipe bending the minimum radii indicated must be observed.
Connect the supply and the return of the circuit to the manifold.
Remember to record the initial and final length of pipe used for each circuit, using the marking on the pipe, in order to verify the total
length of pipe used.
Figure 7.7 Laying of the pipe from the perimeter to the centre of the room. Figure 7.8 Laying the pipe from the centre of the room to the perimeter.
4
5

c
m
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
45 cm
4
5

c
m

22.5 cm
2
2
.
5

c
m
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 7.9 Heating loop.
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
7
208
When designing the system it may be necessary to create peripheral zones; these are zones where heat dispersion is generally greatest
(e.g. large windows or very dispersant walls), in which the pipe spacing is reduced in order to generate greater thermal flow. The peripheral
zones can be created by laying an independent circuit and connecting it directly to the manifold or it can be part of the same heating circuit.
Peripheral zones that are part of the heating circuit can be laid in two different ways: the first consists of first supplying the peripheral zone
and reducing the pipe spacing and then continuing with the central zone (in succession), the second consists of tightening the pipe spacing
of the loop when the pipe is in the zone with greater heat dispersion.
Figure 7.10 Peripheral zone created in succession. Figure 7.11 Peripheral zone created by tightening the pipe spacing.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

2008 Valsir S.p.A.
7.6 Creation of expansion joints
Expansion joints must be made in order to compensate the dimensional expansion/contraction of the heated concrete screed, caused
by variations in the temperature.
The joints shall cross the entire layer of concrete and must be made when the surface area exceed 40 m
2
or when the length of at least
one of the walls is greater than 8 m.
At the expansion joints the pipes must be protected with a corrugated sheath of 30 to 40 cm (Figure 7.12).
The distribution of the joint line does not need to cover the entire heating circuit but only the supply circuits. (Figure 7.13).
The gap that remains visible on the surface must be filled with a special sealant.
Figure 7.12 Section of the floor at an expansion joint.
Expansion joint
Corrugated sheath
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
7
209
Figure 7.13 Distribution of the joint line.
NO YES
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Figure 7.14 Expansion joint.
7.7 Creation of the settlement joints
Settlement joints must be made between one room and another and above all, when two different floor covering materials are used.
These joints are generally placed in door reveals and are made by cutting the cement screed by approximately 1/3 of its thickness
starting from the covering (Figure 7.15).
The gap that remains visible on the surface must be filled with a special sealant.
Figure 7.15 Section of the floor at the settlement joint.
Settlement joint
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
I
N
S
T
A
L
L
A
T
I
O
N
7
210
7.8 System filling
Close the interception valves both at the supply and return of the manifold.
Close all the flow-check valves on the supply manifold.
Connect the supply pipe of the test pump by removing the insert of the drainage valve of the supply manifold.
Open the drainage valve on the return manifold, connecting a pipe to the insert for the transport of the water to the drain.
Open the flow-check valve of the first circuit and circulate the water until all the air contained in the circuit has been expelled.
Close the circuit flow-check valve and repeat the operation for the other circuits.
Once the filling operation of the circuits has finished close the drainage valve on the return manifold.
7.9 System testing
Open all the flow-check valves.
The test pressure is to be twice the working pressure with a minimum of 6 bar.
Verify the absence of leaks by controlling the entire circuit pressure on the pressure gauge.
The pressure shall be applied to the pipes during laying of the concrete.
If the system is installed in climatic conditions with the risk of freezing temperatures, antifreeze will have to be added to the water.
The antifreeze will have to be removed if there are no functioning problems and the system will have to be flushed using at least 3
changes of water.
7.10 Laying of the screed
The concrete must be prepared without the use of insulating agents.
During preparation of the mixture, the fluidising additive V-FLUID shall be used; the percentages indicated on the product shall be
observed. The fluidiser must be kept out of direct sunlight and the room temperature must not fall below 0C. Verify also the expiry
date on the product.
The fluidiser reduces water content and improves workability.
The concrete must be poured with the system working at a pressure of 6 bar and the temperature of the room must not fall below 5C.
If fusion welded grids are to be used, these shall be laid in observance with the expected heights (1/3 of the height of the screed in
relation to the floor covering).
The height of the screed over the loops must not be lower than 30 mm in accordance with the standard EN 1246.
Figure 7.16 Pouring of the screed.
7.11 System commissioning
This operation shall be carried out at least 21 days after the laying of the screed or in accordance with the manufacturers instructions but
at least 7 days in the case of anhydrite screeds or, at any rate, also in this case, in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
The initial heating up commences at a supply temperature between 20C and 25C, which shall be maintained for at least 3 days.
Subsequently the maximal design temperature shall be set and maintained for at least a further 4 days.
At the end of the test, the floor covering can be laid.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
211
A HEAT TRANSFER
Heat transfer concerns all physical processes in which a certain quantity of heat energy is transferred from one system to another due to a
difference in temperature. Such processes occur according to the principles of thermodynamics:
the heat energy given off by a system has to be the same as the energy received by the other.
Heat transfer always occurs from a hot particle to a cold one.
The speed with which the heat transfer process occurs is also very important and therefore the quantity of heat exchanged within the unit
of time or the heat output Q which is measured in Watts.
A.1 Heat transfer modes
The transfer of heat is a spontaneous phenomenon, which continues to occur between a hot and a cold object, until both objects have
reached the same temperature, the temperature of thermal equilibrium. The hot object transfers part of its thermal energy to the cold object
and the heat transfer can be by conduction, convection or radiation.
A.1.1 Conduction
Conduction is the transfer by direct contact of particles of matter. It is the temperature difference between the two objects that causes
the hot object to transfer energy to the cold object, thus increasing the temperature until a thermal balance has been reached (same
temperature). In Figure A.1 it is observed how two objects at different temperatures are placed together and by conduction the heat flows
from the hot object to the cold object until the equilibrium temperature is reached.
Figure A.1 Heat transfer by conduction.
A B A B
Q
A B
T
A
= T
B
STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3
Hot
body
Cold
body
A.1.2 Convection
Convection occurs when one of the bodies is a fluid (water, air, etc.) and the heat transfer may be associated with a transfer of matter.
When the temperature of a fluid is not uniform, that is, it contains hot and cold areas, the difference in temperature and the speed of the
fluid itself, generate a continuous movement of the particles in the fluid, causing them to be mixed, thus favouring the transfer of heat from
the hot to the cold particles. This phenomenon is called natural convection. When, on the other hand, the movement of the particles is
caused mechanically, by a pump in the case of water circulation, or simply by wind, the phenomenon is called forced convection. Convection
occurs, for example, when an intermediate fluid circulates between two bodies (called heat transfer fluid), which heats up when in contact
with the hot matter, and then transfers its heat when it comes into contact with the cold matter (Figure A.2).
Figure A.2 Heat transfer by convection.
A
Hot
body
B A B
Q
T
A
= T
B
STEP 1 STEP 2
Cold
body
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
212
A.1.3 Radiation
With radiation the heat is transferred by the emission and consequent absorption of electromagnetic rays. The heat exchanged in this case
rapidly increases with a difference in temperature. Radiation differs from the other modes of heat transfer, in that it does not require the
presence of a means in order to transfer energy. Electromagnetic radiation that generates the transmission of heat is linked to the energetic
state of the atoms of which it is composed. In this case, the hot matter emits electromagnetic rays that are absorbed by the cold matter
(Figure A.3).
Figure A.3 Heat transfer by radiation.
A B A B
T
A
= T
B
Q
STEP 1 STEP 2
Hot
body
Cold
body
A.2 Combined heat transfer processes
Depending on the nature of the material, with heat transfer, one mode will be more predominant than the others, or the heat will be
transferred thanks to the combined action of two or all three modes. This is due to the physical characteristics of the materials, such as
density, transparency, etc. The heat which is lost through the walls of a room to the outside of a building, is transferred by conduction across
the various layers which make up the wall and by convection and radiation through the air spaces between the bricks. From the external
surface of the room, the heat is released into the surrounding outside air by means of convection and radiation.
Figure A.4 shows a room where the floor and ceiling are at different temperatures (T
A
>T
B
). In this case, the heat is transferred from the floor
to the ceiling by convection and radiation. If there was no air to act as a medium, then there would only be the phenomenon of radiation
and less heat would be exchanged between the two structures. After a certain time, the total heat output is given by the sum of the heat
transferred by convection and radiation:
Q
TOTAL
= Q
Convection
+ Q
Radiation
[A.1]
The two transmission mechanisms act in a parallel way. There is, in fact, an analogy with electrical circuits, which allows an analysis of the
phenomenon of combined heat transfer (Figure A.4).
Figure A.4 Heat transfer between floor and ceiling.
A
B
Floor
Ceiling
Radiation Convection
T
A
> T
B
A
B
R
1
R
2
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The flow of current which circulates in the two resistances R
1
and R
2
, which represent respectively the resistances of convection and
radiation, behaves in an analogous way to the quantity of heat which flows for a certain period between the two bodies caused by
convection and radiation. The total flow of current, in fact, is given by the sum of the currents, which circulate in the two resistances, just
as the total thermal output is given by the sum of the exchanged thermal output of the single transfer mechanisms [A.1].
On the other hand, if we consider a wall made of two layers of different materials, with the two external parallel surfaces at different
temperatures, as shown in Figure A.5, the heat is transferred by conduction only and it flows from wall A to wall B.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
213
Figure A.5 Heat transfer inside a wall.
A
C
e
m
e
n
t
B
I
n
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
B
r
i
c
k
s
R
1
R
2
R
3
C
o
n
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
T
A
>T
B
B
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
During its passage it meets different materials and the heat transfer intensity is different according to the type of material. We can consider
the three layers as three resistances placed in a series (Figure A.5) for which the following relation is valid:
= + +
1
Q
TOTAL
Q
Conduction,1
Q
Conduction,2
Q
Conduction,3
1 1 1
[A.2]
where Q
Conduction,1
Q
Conduction,2
Q
Conduction,3
are the thermal outputs transferred by conduction respectively through the cement, the insulating
layer and the bricks. As noted from [A.2] the total thermal output transferred is less than the output that would flow singly in each material.
The walls of houses are made of several layers in order to minimise the heat loss through them.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
214
A.3 Heat transfer in heating systems
A.3.1 Radiator systems
In this type of system, the transfer of heat from the radiator to the room occurs both by radiation and by convection.
The convection component, however, is greater than the radiant one. Hot air movement is therefore created at the ceiling and cold air at the
floor as shown in Figure A.6. This air current that is created transports the dust present in the room, which can create breathing problems;
furthermore, the combustion of such dust particles generates dark stains on the walls behind the radiator.
Figure A.6 Radiator systems.
17C
22C
40C
20C
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
A.3.2 Fan heater systems
In this type of system, the radiant component is even lower than in radiator systems. The convective component is further accentuated by
the fact that an internal fan inside the heat convector itself increases hot air movement.
A.3.3 Floor heating systems
The transfer of heat from the screed heated by the pipe occurs due a combined effect of radiation and convection. In this case, however,
the convective component is negligible compared to the radiant component. With these systems layers of heat are generated between the
floor and ceiling, that is, the temperature is higher at the floor and diminishes in proximity to the ceiling. This stratification is close to the
ideal conditions of thermal well-being.
Figure A.7 Floor heating system.
17C
18C
20C
22C
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
215
B CLIMATIC DATA FOR ITALIAN REGIONS AND TOWNS
Table B.1 Climatic data for main Italian towns (continues).
Region Town
Min winter temperature
[C]
Max wind velocity
[m/s]
ABRUZZO
Chieti 0 2
LAquila -5 1.7
Pescara 2 2
BASILICATA
Matera -2 2.9
Potenza -3 3.8
CALABRIA
Catanzaro -2 3.2
Cosenza -3 2.4
Crotone 3 3.5
Reggio Calabria 3 3.8
CAMPANIA
Avellino -2 4.4
Benevento -2 4.4
Caserta 0 1.6
Naples 2 2.3
Salerno 2 1.8
EMILIA-ROMAGNA
Bologna -5 1.6
Ferrara -5 2.4
Forl -5 2.3
Modena -5 1.6
Parma -5 1.1
Piacenza -5 1.2
Province of Piacenza -7 1.2
Ravenna -5 2.1
Reggio Emilia -5 1.1
Rimini -2 2.3
FRIULI VENEZIA GIULIA
Alta Carnia -10 1.7
Bassa Carnia -7 1.7
Gorizia -5 1.5
Pordenone -5 1.3
Tarvisio -15 1.7
Trieste -5 2.6
Udine -5 1.7
LAZIO
Frosinone 0 1.7
Latina 2 2.4
Rieti -3 2.7
Rome 0 2.6
Viterbo -2 4
LIGURIA
Genoa 0 3.8
Imperia 0 3.7
La Spezia 0 5.5
Savona 0 2.2
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
216
Region Town
[C]
Max wind velocity
[m/s]
LOMBARDY
Alta Valtellina -15 0.8
Bergamo -5 1.9
Brescia -7 1.5
Como -5 0.9
Cremona -5 1.4
Lecco -5 0.9
Lodi -5 1.1
Mantua -5 0.9
Milan -5 1.1
Pavia -5 1.2
Province of Como -7 0.9
Sondrio -10 0.8
Varese -5 1.3
MARCHE
Ancona -2 3.2
Ascoli Piceno -2 1.7
Macerata -2 3.4
Pesaro -2 3.4
MOLISE
Campobasso -4 4.3
Isernia -4 4
Teramo 0 1.3
PIEDMONT
Alessandria -8 1.2
Alta Valle cunese -15 1.6
Asti -8 1.5
Cuneo -10 1.6
Novara -5 0.8
Turin -8 0.8
Verbania -5 0.9
Vercelli -7 0.8
APULIA
Bari 0 3.5
Brindisi 0 5.1
Foggia 0 3.5
Lecce 0 4
Taranto 0 5.1
SARDINIA
Cagliari 3 4
Nuoro 0 2.4
Oristano 0 4.3
Sassari 2 3.1
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
217
Region Town
[C]
Max wind velocity
[m/s]
SICILY
Agrigento 3 4.5
Caltanissetta 0 2.4
Catania 5 4.4
Enna -3 3.8
Messina 5 2.8
Palermo 5 3.6
Ragusa 0 2.1
Siracusa 5 5.2
Trapani 5 6.8
TUSCANY
Arezzo 0 4.5
Florence 0 1.4
Grosseto 0 2.4
Livorno 0 2.4
Lucca 0 1.5
Massa Carrara 0 3.5
Pisa 0 2.4
Pistoia 0 3.7
Prato 0 1.4
Siena -2 2
TRENTINO-ALTO ADIGE
Bolzano -15 0.9
Trento -5 1.1
UMBRIA
Perugia -2 1.4
Terni -2 2.7
AOSTA VALLEY
Alta Valle dAosta -20 2.6
Aosta -10 2.6
Valle dAosta -15 2.6
VENETO
Belluno -10 0.9
Padova -5 1
Rovigo -5 1.9
Treviso -5 1
Venice -5 2.6
Verona -5 0.9
Verona (lake zone) -3 0.9
Verona (mountain zone) -10 0.9
Vicenza -5 1.3
Vicenza (plateau zone) -10 1.3
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
218
C THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY AND RESISTANCE OF MATERIALS
Table C.1 Thermal conductivity of some materials.
Material Thermal conductivity [W/mK]
Asphalt 0.70
Reinforced concrete 1.51
Ordinary concrete 1.28
Chalk 0.43
Dry gravel layers 0.93
Plaster with lime mortar 0.70
Plaster with lime and chalk 0.93
Linolium 0.18
Cement mortar 1.40
Expanded polystyrol 0.035
Expanded polyurethane 0.028
Dry sand 0.58
Sand and cement 0.93
Sheets of cork 0.04
Expanded vermiculite 0.07
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
219
Table C.2 Thermal resistance of coverings.
Covering Thermal resistance R
,B
[m
2
K/W]
Ceramic 6 mm 0.0060
Ceramic 8 mm 0.0080
Ceramic 10 mm 0.0100
Cotto 10 mm 0.0111
Cotto 15 mm 0.0167
Cotto 20 mm 0.0222
Cotto 30 mm 0.0333
Rubber 2 mm 0.0071
Rubber 3 mm 0.0107
Rubber 4 mm 0.0143
Rubber 5 mm 0.0179
Marble 10 mm 0.0029
Marble 15 mm 0.0044
Marble 20 mm 0.0059
Marble 30 mm 0.0088
Parquet 6 mm 0.0300
Parquet 8 mm 0.0400
Parquet 10 mm 0.0500
Table C.3 Thermal resistance of floor slabs.
Type of slab Thermal resistance R
b
[m
2
K/W]
Brick slab 200 mm 0.320
Predalles slab 150 mm 0.360
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
220
D WOOD AS A FLOOR COVERING
Particular attention must be given to wooden floor coverings. The factors influencing the characteristics of the coverings are temperature
for the glue and humidity for the wood. The temperature of the screed does not influence the characteristics of the wood, however, it can
be an important factor for the glue used. In fact, special glues must be used that do not depend on the temperature. The factor that can
damage a wood covering is humidity.
Variations in the concentration of humidity generate movements in the wood itself; all types of wood are more or less prone to such
movements.
Clearly the more constant the level of humidity, the less risk there is of damage being caused to the flooring. The formation of cracks is due
to low levels of humidity, bending, on the other hand, is caused by levels of humidity that are too high. When the temperature increases, the
humidity level generally falls; therefore, an excessively heated room will present a greater risk of cracking to the wood. When, however, the
temperature goes down, the cracks will close again. In climates where winters are drier than summers, this phenomenon will be present
whether floor heating has been installed or not, and above all, if there is no control over humidity in the surroundings.
Both cracking and bending of the wood will occur, if it is not allowed to move and to adapt itself to the environment prior to installation.
Various types of wood may be used for floor coverings; the choice should be made between woods that offer a greater dimensional stability
than others.
The ground rules to be followed for the correct design of a floor heating system are:
low temperatures of the floor surface, 1)
the heat flow must be as uniform as possible on the surface and therefore spacing must be kept relatively low, 2)
the concrete screed must be completely dry before the wood flooring is laid, 3)
the wood should be allowed to acclimatize to the conditions which will be generated in the room where it is to be installed. 4)
the thickness of the concrete above the pipes must be no lower than 4 cm in order to ensure uniformity in the distribution of the 5)
temperatures.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
221
E DIMENSIONING OF METAL REINFORCEMENT IN THE FLOORS
The metal reinforcement (grids) placed in industrial floors have the function of limiting the opening of cracks in the concrete screed due to
shrinkage, in the proximity of contraction joints and are not intended to increase the load capacity of the screed. By preventing the crack
from increasing, the metal grid allows maintenance of a good load distribution on the concrete screed.
Figure E.1 Floor with expansion joint.
s
u
L
Joint Joint Concrete
Ground
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Dimensioning of the grid can be done by means of a mathematical equation defined as slip equation:
A
a
= 4.905
f L s
u
10000
s
[E.1]
where:
L is the distance between two successive contraction joints [m],
f is the coefficient of static friction between floor and subfloor,
is the specific weight of the concrete including any permanent loads [kg/m
3
],
s
u
is the thickness of the concrete screed [cm],
s
is the allowable traction stress of the steel [MPa],
A
a
is the reinforcement area per linear meter of floor [cm
2
/m] or rather the ratio between the section of the grid and the dimension of the
mesh as indicated:
d
a
2
A
a
=
4
p
a
[E.2]
where d
a
is the diameter of the wire [cm] and p
a
is the dimension of the mesh [m] (see Figure E.2).
Figure E.2 Characteristic dimensions of the reinforcement grid.
p
a
d
a
Metal grid
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The following table indicates the area of some reinforcement types.
Table E.1 Reinforcement area.
Grid d
a
[cm] p
a
[m] Area A
a
[cm
2
/m]
2/5 0.2 0.05 0.63
3/10 0.3 0.1 0.71
5/20 0.5 0.2 0.98
5/30 0.5 0.3 0.65
5/35 0.5 0.35 0.56
6/20 0.6 0.2 1.41
6/30 0.6 0.3 0.94
6/35 0.6 0.35 0.81
8/30 0.8 0.3 1.68
8/35 0.8 0.35 1.44
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
222
The following show shows the values of f in relation to the type of subfloor.
Table E.2 Coefficient of static friction between floor and subfloor.
Type of subfloor Static friction f
PE sheet 0.80
Fine sand 0.90
Granular mix 1.65
Gravel and sand 1.80
Clay 2.00
It is recommended to use static friction coefficient values f equal to 2.5 considering in this way the irregularities of the ground
on which the concrete floor is to be laid and which significantly influence the effects of friction.
The principle on which the slip equation is based, is that the power of friction which is created between the floor and the subfloor is
proportionate to the weight of the floor itself and the friction coefficient of the subfloor. The forces at the interface between the subfloor and
the floor generate traction stress in the metal grids due to the friction between the two surfaces.
Figure E.3 Force of friction between the subfloor and the concrete floor.
s
u
/3
s
u
Joint
Crack
Metal grid
Concrete
Gronud
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
In order to limit the degree of cracking at the contraction joints, the metal grid will have to laid as near as possible to the upper surface of
the floor. In doing so, however, there is a risk that the grid is cut during installation of the contraction joints.
The correct compromise for the installation height of the grid is 1/3 of the total height of the screed starting from the surface
of the floor as shown in Figure E.3.
E.1 Dimensioning example of a metal reinforcement
Imagine an industrial floor made of 15 cm of concrete (specific weight 2300 kg/m
3
) and with a distance between the contraction joints of
4.5 m. The grid is made of steel with an allowable load traction of 210 MPa. Considering the recommended friction coefficient of f=2.5, the
reinforcement area is calculated:
A
a
= 4.905
2.5 4.5 2300 15
10000 210
= 0.9065 cm
2
/m
According to Table E.1 it is possible to choose between a grid of 5/20 (0.98 cm
2
/m) or else a grid of 6/30 (0.94 cm
2
/m) to be positioned
at 10 cm from the subfloor (5 cm from the floor).
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
223
F ANTIFREEZE LIQUID IN HEATING SYSTEMS
In floor heating systems for snow melting or for heating industrial pavements, or whenever there is a risk that the water inside the
circuit will freeze, it is convenient to add an antifreeze liquid in suitable proportions to the expected minimum temperature.
In the case of systems left unused during the winter season, it is recommended to leave any circuit section valves open so that the entire
circuit can absorb the variations in volume of the water, in relation to the temperature.
In the following tables, the typical concentrations (volume percentage) of the most commonly used antifreeze liquids are indicated: ethylene
or propylene glycol.
Table F.1 Concentrations of ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze.
Temperature Volume concentration
-4C 10%
-9C 20%
-17C 30%
-26C 40%
-37C 50%
Table F.2 Concentrations of propylene glycol-based antifreeze.
Temperature Volume concentration
-10C 25%
-15C 33%
-32C 50%
The concentrations may vary from one product to the other. The aim of these values is to give a general idea of the quantities
of antifreeze required in relation to outdoor temperatures.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
224
G CALCULATION OF QUANTITY OF CONCRETE
The quantity of concrete to be used in a floor heating system depends of several factors, some of which are of little influence. The height
of the concrete layer over the pipe or the bosses on the panels is the element that, naturally, influences the quantity of concrete, as well as
the type of panel (V-ELLE or V-ESSE); other factors, such as pipe spacing and the diameter of the pipe have a smaller effect.
The determination of the quantity of concrete can be made thanks to the following tables that give the volume necessary to create a heating
system over a surface area of 100 m
2
.
Table G.1 Quantity of concrete for pipe De=16 mm and V-ESSE panel.
Quantity of concrete in m
3
/100 m
2
with external pipe diameter 16 mm and V-ESSE panel
Height of screed over
the bosses
Pipe spacing [cm]
[mm] 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45
30 4.8 4.9 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
35 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
40 5.8 5.9 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0
45 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5
50 6.8 6.9 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
55 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
60 7.8 7.9 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0
65 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5
70 8.8 8.9 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0
Table G.2 Quantity of concrete for pipe De=20 mm and V-ESSE panel.
3
/100 m
2
with external pipe diameter 20 mm and V-ESSE panel
the bosses
Pipe spacing [cm]
[mm] 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45
30 4.6 4.9 4.9 5.0 5.0 5.0
35 5.1 5.4 5.4 5.5 5.5 5.5
40 5.6 5.9 5.9 6.0 6.0 6.0
45 6.1 6.4 6.4 6.5 6.5 6.5
50 6.6 6.9 6.9 7.0 7.0 7.0
55 7.1 7.4 7.4 7.5 7.5 7.5
60 7.6 7.9 7.9 8.0 8.0 8.0
65 8.1 8.4 8.4 8.5 8.5 8.5
70 8.6 8.9 8.9 9.0 9.0 9.0
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
225
Table G.3 Quantity of concrete for pipe De=14 mm and V-ELLE panel.
3
/100 m
2
with external pipe diameter 14 mm and V-ELLE panel
the bosses
Pipe spacing [cm]
[mm] 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
30 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.4 4.4
35 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.9 4.9
40 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.4 5.4
45 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.8 5.8 5.8 5.9 5.9
50 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.4 6.4
55 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.9 6.9
60 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.4 7.4
65 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.8 7.8 7.8 7.9 7.9
70 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.4 8.4
75 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8 8.9 8.9
80 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.3 9.3 9.3 9.4 9.4
85 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.9 9.9
90 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.4 10.4
95 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.8 10.8 10.8 10.9 10.9
100 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.3 11.3 11.3 11.4 11.4
3
/100 m
2
the bosses
Pipe spacing [cm]
[mm] 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
30 4.2 4.4 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
35 4.7 4.9 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
40 5.2 5.4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
45 5.7 5.9 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0
50 6.2 6.4 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5
55 6.7 6.9 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
60 7.2 7.4 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
65 7.7 7.9 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0
70 8.2 8.4 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5
75 8.7 8.9 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0
80 9.2 9.4 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5
85 9.7 9.9 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
90 10.2 10.4 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
95 10.7 10.9 11.0 11.0 11.0 11.0 11.0 11.0
100 11.2 11.4 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
226
3
/100 m
2
the bosses
Pipe spacing [cm]
[mm] 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
30 4.4 4.7 4.8 4.8 4.9 4.9 4.9 4.9
35 4.9 5.2 5.3 5.3 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4
40 5.4 5.7 5.8 5.8 5.9 5.9 5.9 5.9
45 5.9 6.2 6.3 6.3 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4
50 6.4 6.7 6.8 6.8 6.9 6.9 6.9 6.9
55 6.9 7.2 7.3 7.3 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4
60 7.4 7.7 7.8 7.8 7.9 7.9 7.9 7.9
65 7.9 8.2 8.3 8.3 8.4 8.4 8.4 8.4
70 8.4 8.7 8.8 8.8 8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9
75 8.9 9.2 9.3 9.3 9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4
80 9.4 9.7 9.8 9.8 9.9 9.9 9.9 9.9
85 9.9 10.2 10.3 10.3 10.4 10.4 10.4 10.4
90 10.4 10.7 10.8 10.8 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9
95 10.9 11.2 11.3 11.3 11.4 11.4 11.4 11.4
100 11.4 11.7 11.8 11.8 11.9 11.9 11.9 11.9
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
227
H INSULATION PANELS IN FLOOR HEATING
Why install insulation panels in the floor? What influence do they have on system response times, on system efficiency and therefore on
energy saving? These are the questions that we will try to answer in this section of the handbook.
H.1 The influence of insulation panels on system performance
H.1.1 Mechanical function
One of the functions of the insulation panel, in floor heating systems, is to act as a support for the installation of the circuits. The panels can
be pocketed and therefore, equipped with grooves to house the pipe or in the form of flat sheets where the pipe is secured to the panels
with the use of anchor clips.
Insulation panels, therefore, are a fundamental part of the floor heating system and this part, although often overlooked, has an important
effect on the performance of the entire heating system. Actually, it is possible to install floor heating systems without the use of insulation
panels; it is sufficient to use metal reinforcement grids onto which the pipe is laid and secured with the use of suitable clips; in this case,
there would be no obstacle to downward thermal dispersion and, therefore, the performance of the floor heating systems would certainly
be compromised.
H.1.2 Reduction of thermal mass
Thermal mass refers to the a materials capacity to absorb thermal energy (heat). A rock has a greater thermal mass than a block of wood,
in fact, it remains hotter for longer than a block of wood. This is due to the fact that the rock is denser and therefore at equal volume it
contains more mass. When a heated thermal mass is exposed, for example, to a flow of cold air, it starts to dissipate thermal energy (heat)
with a velocity that is proportionate to the difference in temperature between the air and the thermal mass. The concept of floor heating is
to keep the thermal mass at a uniform and constant temperature in such a way as to release the necessary thermal energy into the room.
The presence of the insulation panels inside the floor structure reduces the thermal mass. The insulation panels, in separating the layer of
concrete in which the heating pipes are embedded, from the floor slab, reduce the thermal mass to be heated and this therefore, results in
systems that respond better and more rapidly to the fluctuations in room temperature or external temperature.
Let us consider a floor heating system for a residential building of about 100 m
2
, the floor structure complete with insulation panel as
indicated in Figure H.1.
Figure H.1 Layer composition of an insulated radiant floor.
concrete
s
a,1
= 10 mm
s
b,0
= 20 mm
s
b,1
= 0.2 mm
s
b,2
= 150 mm
s
isol
= 30 mm
s
u
= 50 mm
V-ESSE30 insulation
concrete
covering
ground
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
In this case the volume of concrete in direct contact with the pipe and that, therefore, influences the thermal mass effect is about
0.061 m
3
/m
2
(quantity of concrete per square meter of surface). If the same system were installed without insulation panels (see Figure
H.2), the volume of concrete in direct contact with the pipe would be 0.213 m
3
/m
2
(given by the volume of screed above the pipe and by
the layer of concrete). It is easy to verify that the ratio of the concrete volumes is 1 to 3.5 and therefore there is a significant increase in the
thermal mass if insulation panels are not used in the system. From what is written in the introduction it results that the greater the thermal
mass the longer the response time of the system to temperature fluctuations.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
228
Figure H.2 Layer composition of a radiant floor without insulation.
concrete
s
a,1
= 10 mm
s
b,1
= 0.2 mm
s
b,2
= 150 mm concrete
convering
s
u
= 50 mm
s
b,0
= 16 mm
ground
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
The energy produced by the loops is direct, both upwards and downwards, giving the necessary contribution to heating the room, and also
generating a loss in energy to the ground below.
The direct downward flow of energy depends on the temperature of the ground or on the temperature of the room below and the total
thermal resistance of the layers of material below the pipes. Naturally, the better the insulation the less thermal energy that will be lost
below the system. To reduce energy loss, the European Standard UNI EN 1264, that establishes the rules for the correct dimensioning of
floor heating systems, imposes minimum thermal resistance values for the layer of insulating material in relation to climatic conditions.
The minimum value required is 0.75 m
2
/KW for rooms that lie directly above constantly heated rooms. A panel in expanded polystirol that
ensures such a thermal resistance value must have a minimum thickness of at least 22-25 mm. In the following section, the difference
between a building with an insulated floor and a building without insulation will be analysed in detail.
H.2 Numerical analysis of insulation
H.2.1 Calculation basis
To evaluate the positive effect of insulation panels on the output of floor heating systems the project results of two systems will be
compared. Both systems have been installed in compliance with the standard UNI EN 1264: one with a V-ESSE30 panel and the other
without any type of insulation.
In accordance with the standard, and making reference to the Figure H.3, we must calculate the thermal resistances to the vertical
thermal flow inside the room R
o
and toward the room lying below R
u
as indicated in chapter 5. The percentage energy loss is calculated as:
q
b
/(q
a
+q
b
) between the upward thermal flow and the total thermal flow generated by the system.
Figure H.3 Energy flow of a radiant floor.
s
u
,
E
s
b,1
,
b,1
s
b,2
,
b,2
T
i
,
a
R
o
T
u
R
u
R
,B
R
,isol
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
229
H.2.2 Results
To evaluate the energy loss through the floor, systems were dimensioned with and without insulation panels keeping the floor structure and
changing some fundamental parameters: the temperature of the room below T
u
and the effective thermal flow q
a
. A residential building was
used, of about 100 m
2
and the system was created with the MIXAL 16x2 multilayer pipe.
Variation in external temperature at equal thermal flow
A thermal flow of 70 W/m
2
is considered and when the temperature of the room below varies, the downward energy loss is calculated for
a room with an insulated floor and for a room with no insulation in the floor. From Table H.1 and Figure H.4 the following is observed: going
from a temperature T
u
of -6C (room on terrace in cold climates) to a temperature of +4C (room on the ground) until reaching a temperature
of +16C (rooms over other heated rooms) there is an energy loss that goes from 26% and falls to 12% for systems with insulated panels
and that goes from 44% and falls to 24% for systems without insulation panels. Therefore, a building without insulation has significantly
higher energy losses that are on average double the losses with a building with floor insulation. Where temperature conditions are at their
worst, the energy loss in a system with no insulation in the floor reaches values of 44%.
Table H.1 Downward energy losses with varying temperatures in the room below.
Temperature of
room below
T
U
Downward
thermal flow with
insulation panel
q
a
Energy loss
Downward thermal
flow without
insulation panel
q
b
Energy loss
[C] [W/m
2
] [%] [W/m
2
] [%] [%]
-6 24.1 26% 56.1 44% +19%
-4 22.8 25% 53.0 43% +19%
-2 21.5 23% 49.9 42% +18%
2 18.8 21% 43.7 38% +17%
4 17.5 20% 40.6 37% +17%
6 16.1 19% 37.5 35% +16%
8 14.8 17% 34.5 33% +16%
10 13.5 16% 31.4 31% +15%
12 12.2 15% 28.3 29% +14%
14 10.8 13% 25.2 26% +13%
16 9.5 12% 22.1 24% +12%
Figure H.4 Progress of downward dispersion with varying temperatures in the room below.
44%
43%
42%
38%
37%
35%
33%
31%
29%
26%
24%
26%
25%
23%
21%
20%
19%
17%
16%
15%
13%
12%
0%
5%
10%
15%
20%
25%
30%
35%
40%
45%
50%
-6 -4 -2 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
P
e
r
c
e
n
t
a
g
e

e
n
e
r
g
y

l
o
s
s
Temperature of room below [C]
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
230
Variation in thermal flow with equal external temperature
A building is examined that lies over the ground with a temperature of +5C and when the thermal flow necessary for heating the rooms
varies, the downward energy loss is calculated for rooms with floor insulation and for rooms without floor insulation. From Table H.2 and
Figure H.5 the following is observed: going from a thermal flow qa of 50 W/m
2
to 95 W/m
2
there is an energy loss that goes from 23% and
falls to 17% for systems with insulation panels and that goes from 41% and falls to 32% for systems without insulation panels. Again in
this case it is revealed that the energy losses for systems without floor insulation are double the losses revealed in systems with insulated
floors. When thermal flow is low (50 W/m
2
) energy losses reach 41%.
Table H.2 Downward energy losses with changes in working thermal flow.
Upward thermal
flow
q
a
Downward
thermal flow with
insulation panels
q
a-
Energy loss
Downward thermal
flow without
insulation panels
q
b
Energy loss
[W/m
2
] [W/m
2
] [%] [W/m
2
] [%] [%]
50 14.9 23% 34.6 41% +18%
55 15.3 22% 35.7 39% +18%
60 15.8 21% 36.8 38% +17%
65 16.3 20% 38.0 37% +17%
70 16.8 19% 39.1 36% +16%
75 17.3 19% 40.2 35% +16%
80 17.8 18% 41.4 34% +16%
85 18.3 18% 42.5 33% +16%
90 18.8 17% 43.6 33% +15%
95 19.3 17% 44.8 32% +15%
Figure H.5 Progress of downward losses with variations in thermal flow.
41%
39%
38%
37%
36%
35%
34%
33%
33%
32%
23%
22%
21%
20%
19%
19%
18%
18%
17%
17%
0%
5%
10%
15%
20%
25%
30%
35%
40%
45%
50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95
Required upward thermal flow [W/m
2
]
P
e
r
c
e
n
t
a
g
e

e
n
e
r
g
y

l
o
s
s
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
231
Economical analysis
A simplified economical analysis is used to evaluate the difference in terms of heating expense between the two buildings, the first with floor
insulation (will be indicated as case A), the second without floor insulation (will be indicated as case B). Let us suppose that the building is over
the ground (T
u
= +4C) and heating output is 7000 W (70 W/m
2
for a surface area of 100 m
2
).
From the tables we can see that:
- downward energy loss in case A is 19%
- downward energy loss in case B is 36%
therefore:
- the heating energy required in case A is 8640 W
- the heating energy required in case B is 10937 W
If we consider a boiler efficiency of 90% and a calorific power of the methane of 8200 kcal/m
3
(34330 kJ/m
3
) we can determine the
flow of methane necessary in both cases and annual consumption, considering 130 days of heating per year and the cost of methane at
0.75 /m
3
. The result is therefore:
- a flow of methane in case A of 1.01 m
3
/h,
- a flow of methane in case B of 1.27 m
3
/h
and yearly consumption is:
- in case A of 3151 m
3
/year equal to about 2363 /year,
- in case B of 3962 m
3
/year equal to about 2972 /year with a yearly difference of about 609 /year.
H.3 Conclusion
From the results we can conclude that the absence of insulation panels has a large negative effect on the energy performance of the heating
system that can result in energy losses has high as 40%. The use of insulation panels is therefore always strongly recommended; they
allow, in fact, a significant reduction in yearly consumption, in the example, a saving of approximately 20% in the consumption of methane
gas was calculated. The considerations made for a floor heating system in a residential building can also be applied to a floor heating
system in an industrial application with the same results.
The employment of insulation panels not only influences consumption but it also influences the performance of the system. It was seen how
the presence of insulation panels reduces the thermal mass and therefore improves the response time of the system to the fluctuations in
temperature.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
232
I NOISE IN THE BUILDINGS
I.1 Introduction
Noise is one of the main causes of the reduction in the quality of life in cities today. In fact, although the tendency in individual environments
shows a fall in the highest levels of noise in areas at greater risk, there has been a parallel amplification of trouble areas that has resulted
in the increase of the population exposed. Noise pollution is the most widely debated argument today, however, the tendency is to analyse
the causes of external noise such as, for example, air and road traffic and to underestimate and overlook the causes of internal noise in
buildings caused by technological installations such as, lifts, heating and air-conditioning, and waste systems, which is the subject of this
document.
To overlook the problem of noise in waste systems means, however, to ignore the Standards and Regulations in force that establish the
project boundaries and the restrictions in noise levels. If we focus our attention on the Italian market, the reference document regarding
the limits in noise levels for technological installations is the Decree dated December 5 1997 published in the Official Paper No. 297 on
December 22 1997 that will be dealt with in the following chapters.
I.2 Sound
Sound is the propagation of mechanical energy in a medium (elastic solid, gas or liquid) through fluctuation waves (sonorous waves) that
propagate at a typical speed depending on the medium.
Table I.1 Sound propagation velocity.
Medium
Velocity c
[m/s]
Air 331
Helium (He) 970
Hydrogen (H) 1269
Oxygen (O) 317
Water 1441
Salt water (marine) 1504
Methyl alcohol 1240
Bricks 3700
Bricks 3100
Glass 6000
Lead 1200
Aluminium 5200
Marble 3800
Ice 3200
Cork 500
Mahogany 4000
Birch wood 3600
Hard rubber 1400
Soft rubber 70
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
233
The velocity in a gaseous medium is given by:
c = R T [I.1]
where is the ratio between the specific heat at a constant pressure and the specific heat at a constant volume (for air in standard
conditions it is equal to 1,4), R is the characteristic constant of the gas and T is the absolute temperature [K].
In particular, for air, the equation in relation to the temperature in degrees centigrade [C], becomes:
c=331.4 + 0.62 T [I.2]
The velocity in a liquid or in a solid is given by:
c = E/ [I.3]
where E is the elastic modulus and is the density.
A sound wave is characterised by a wave length (measured in m) and a frequency f (measured in Hz) that are connected to the velocity of
propagation in the medium c (measured in m/s).
C= f [I.4]
Not all sounds that exist in nature can be heard by the human ear. The field of sounds that can be heard by man is limited to a frequency
range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz approximately. We therefore define:
infrasounds as pressure oscillations with frequencies below 20 Hz, that therefore cannot be heard by the human ear;
sounds as pressure oscillations with frequencies between 20 Hz and 20 kHz,
ultrasounds as pressure oscillations with frequencies above 20 kHz, that therefore can be heard by the human ear.
The sound intensity is the quantity of power J transported by the sound wave per surface unit perpendicular to the propagation direction
and it is represented by the following relation:
J =
p
eff
2
c
[I.5]
where is the density of the medium in which the sound is propagated [kg/m
3
].
The absolute sound intensity is not easy to measure, it is therefore preferable to measure the relative intensity of a sound that is to
measure in Bell or in tenths of a Bell (dB). The dB is a value that denotes the logarithm on a base of 10 of the ratio between the intensity J
(or the pressure p or the power W) of a sound and the reference intensity J
0
(or the pressure p
0
or the power W
0
). The following are some
definitions.
The sound pressure level:
p
p
0
2
L
p
= 20 log
10
(p/p
0
) = 10 log
10
[I.6]
the sound intensity level:
L
J
= 10 log
10
(J/J
0
) [I.7]
the level of sound power:
L
W
= 10 log
10
(W/W
0
) [I.8]
where p
0
= 210
-5
Pa corresponds to the lowest pressure perceptible by the human ear at a frequency of 1000 Hz, J
0
= 10
-12
W/m
2

corresponds to the sound intensity of a sound wave the pressure of which is equal to the minimum threshold of hearing p
0
e W
0
= 10
-12
W
corresponds to the power of a source that produces on a spherical surface of 1 m
2
the pressure equal to the minimum hearing threshold p
0
.
The use of the dB as a measurement unit has some advantages:
the dB is the smallest difference of sound power that can be detected by the human ear;
the variability of acoustic pressures is very wide and the use of the logarithmic scale limits the scale thus simplifying it.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
234
I.3 Noise and its measurement
Noise can be defined in different ways:
from a physical point of view it is the irrational mixing of sounds with different frequencies and intensities;
from a psychological point of view it is any type of unwanted sound (ANSI definition) or an acoustic phenomena that produces a hearing
sensation considered unpleasant.
To measure noise levels phonometers are employed and with such instruments it is possible to determine the noise intensity in dB.
Since the sensitivity of the human ear depends on the noise frequency (a sound of 20 dB is below the hearing threshold if issued at 100 Hz
whereas it can be heard if issued at 2500 Hz), the measurement of the noise intensity must be contemplated to keep in consideration
the different response of the human ear.
For the this reason the level of noise is expressed as 10 times the decimal logarithm of the sum of the squares of the ratios between the
components pi of the noise pressure (measured at different frequencies) and the reference pressure p
0
:
p
i
p
0
2
L = 10 log
10
ki [I.9]
The weights K
i
assigned to each pressure component define the contemplation curve that can be of the A, B and C type. The A type curve
is the one that most commonly takes into consideration the response of the human ear and therefore such observations are indicated with
the symbol dB(A).
The following table gives an idea of the noise levels in relation to the source:
Table I.2 Noise levels.
Level in dB(A) Description
0 Hearing threshold
20 Whispered voice
40 Quiet office
60 Normal conversation
80 Car, orchestra
100 The inside of a car at 120 km/h
120 Pneumatic drill (pain threshold)
140 Plane
In the case of several noise sources, the total level is not given by the sum of the single levels expressed in dB but by expressing in dB the
sum of the squares of the noise pressures. To clarify this concept an example will be made.
Let us consider 2 sources of noise 80 dB each and we need to evacuate the total level of noise. The levels of noise pressure of the sources
are given by the following expression:

p
p
0
2
L = 10 log
10
= 80 dB
from which, by inverting it, we get:
p
p
0
2
L
10
= 10 = 10
8
The sum of the levels of pressure is given by the sum of the squares of the noise pressures and therefore:
p
p
0
2
p
p
0
2
+
L
tot
= 10 log10 = 10 log
10
(10
8
+ 10
8
) = 83 dB
This means that doubling the noise power (or intensity) is the same as increasing the noise levels by 3 dB or differences of 3 dB are equal to
noise sources with noise energies (or intensities) that are double compared to the other. Lets now suppose that we halve the noise power
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
235
(or intensity) and we want to evaluate the reduction in dB. If we consider the same noise pressure corresponding to 80 dB and we halve it,
we obtain:
1
2
p
p
0
2
L
tot
= 10 log
10
= 10 log
10
(0.5 10
8
) = 77 dB
This means that halving the noise power (or intensity) is the equivalent of reducing the levels of noise by 3 dB.
And what happens if we multiply the noise energy (or intensity) by a factor of ten?
10
p
p
0
2
L
tot
= 10 log
10
= 10 log
10
(10 10
8
) = 90 dB
the noise levels are increased by 10 dB!
The concepts just dealt with are clearly shown in the curve in Figure I.1 where we see that:
doubling the sound power is equivalent to increasing the noise levels by 3 dB,
multiplying the sound power by a factor of ten is equivalent to increasing the noise levels by 10 dB,
halving the sound power is the equivalent of reducing the noise levels by 3 dB.
Figure I.1 Difference in dB between two sound sources with sound energies of W
1
and W
2
(or intensity J
1
and J
2
).
5 10 15 20 25 30
0
5
10
-5
-10
15
dB
W
2
= 10 W
1
W
2
= 2 W
1
W
2
= 0,5 W
1
W
2
/W
1
+10 dB
+3 dB
-3 dB
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
236
I.4 Noise in buildings and Italian legislation
In recent years there has been an increase in the problems relating to noise emissions produced inside buildings that involve different
aspects from urban development to constructions techniques, from the distribution of rooms to the level of silence of plumbing systems.
Respect for the conditions of acoustic well-being in homes but also in the workplace has become an essential requirement in buildings.
Surroundings can be considered satisfactory from the point of view of acoustic comfort when the noise that the inhabitants have to support
is such as not to create damage to their health and to allow adequate conditions for relaxation and for work.
The sources of noise that influence life inside buildings are multiple:
external noises caused by automobile traffic, airplanes, etc.
noises caused by walking, by children playing or by particular lifestyles (diffusion of music or televisions at full volume, the use of
musical instruments), etc.
noises caused by installations such as air-conditioners, heating systems, pumps, drains, etc.
Figure I.2 Noises in households.

Walking
noise
Car
traffic
noise
External
noise
Installation
noise
Internal
sources
Children
playing
High volume
music
External
noise
Installation
noise

2008 Valsir S.p.A.
Air traffic noise
and their propagation mode can be:
by air, when the sound waves, either directly or through partition walls, are transmitted from the source to the listener;
structurally, when the sound waves that reach the listener, are generated by blows and vibrations produced on the structures of the
building in which the disturbed room is located..
Figure I.3 The propagation of noise in households.
2008 Valsir S.p.A.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
237
The legislative document that establishes the fundamental principles for the protection of the household surroundings from acoustic
pollution (according to and to the effect of article 117 of the Constitution) is the ordinary law of Parliament n. 447 dated 26/10/1995 also
known as The Law on acoustical pollution (published on the Ordinary Supplement of the Official Gazette n. 254 dated 30/10/1995).
The law, with the intent of systematically regulating the subject of noise in buildings, has seen to the diffusion of documents for:
the definition of the authorities and the control organs; a)
the determination of the detection and measurement techniques of acoustic pollution; b)
the definition of the criteria for the design, execution and the renovation of building constructions; c)
the determination of the passive acoustic requirements and their components with the aim of reducing the human exposure to noise. d)
Point d) of the abovementioned list was confronted by the Decree of the President of the Ministers dated 5 December 1997 (published in the
Official Gazette n. 297 dated 22 December 1997) which, with the objective of reducing the human exposure to noise, establishes that:
the acoustic requirements of the internal sources of noise (technological systems), 1)
the passive acoustic requirements of buildings and their working components (vertical and horizontal partitions). 2)
Noise measurements must be carried out in the room where noise levels are highest but not in the room where the noise originates.
The decree classifies the rooms in relation to the destined use according to the following table.
Table I.3 Classification of household rooms (D.P.C.M. 5/12/1997).
Category Destined use
A Residential buildings or similar
B Office buildings or similar
C Buildings for hotels, guesthouses or similar
D Buildings for hospitals, clinics, or similar
E School buildings or similar
F Buildings for recreation or worship, or similar
G Buildings for commercial activities, or similar
and for each type of room, establishes, not only the restrictions on the technological installations, but also the sizes that determine the
passive acoustical requirements of the building components and the internal sound sources. From the following table it can be seen that
the soundproofing power of walls, acoustical insulation of front walls and walking noise are taken into consideration.
Table I.4 Limits established for each type of building (D.P.C.M. 5/12/1997).
Category
Apparent sound
proofing power of
room separation
elements
R
w
Facade
standardised
acoustic
insulation
D
2m,nT,w
Normalised level
of walking noise
L
nT,w
Maximum level of
sound pressure
for technological
installations
L
ASmax
Equivalent
continuous level
of sound pressure
for technological
insulations
L
Aeq
Hospitals 55 45 58 35 25
Residences, hotels
and guesthouses
50 40 63 35 35
Schools 50 48 58 35 25
Offices, places of
worship,recreational
and shopping
activitiesi
50 42 55 35 35
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
238
I.5 Foot traffic noise
Noises generated by direct knocks on the building structure migrate through the building at an elevated speed. The most common
impact noise is the so-called foot traffic noise and is transmitted through the buildings floors; noises resulting from dropped objects or
people walking, applies force to the structure making it vibrate and transmitting noises that can reach elevated levels. There are different
construction techniques to attenuate the levels of foot traffic noise:
Line the disturbed room with a suspended ceiling, using anti-vibration hooks and adding sound absorbing material (See Figure I.4 - 1)
Solution A).
Place a resilient material between the body generating the noise and the floor slab, an example is the application of carpet floor covering 2)
that offers an elevated acoustic absorption (See Figure I.4 - Solution B).
Install a floating floor by incorporating an elastic material such as the V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat between the floor screed and the slab 3)
(See Figure I.4 - Solution C).
Clearly the first solution intervenes only in the disturbed rooms and does not prevent the development of noise in the rest of the building
structure, whereas, the other two solutions intervene directly at the source of the noise thus preventing it from spreading elsewhere.
Furthermore, if a carpet floor covering is not desirable or freedom of choice is important, it is evident that the solution to be adopted is the
third, and that is, the installation of a floating floor.
For further details on the performance of the V-ACUSTIC soundproof mat and an evaluation of foot-traffic insulation of the floor slab, refer
to chapter 3.
Figure I.4 Solutions to foot traffic noise.
Suspended ceiling
Floor slab
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

Solution A
Line the disturbed room with soundproof material.
Carpet
Floor slab
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

Solution B
Place a resilient material between the body generating the impact
and the slab.
Floor slab
V-ACUSTIC mat
2008 Valsir S.p.A.

Solution C
Install a floating floor and incorporate an elastic material.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
239
L HEAT OUTPUTS
The thermal outputs shown have been calculated by using the calculation procedures specified in the European Standard UNI EN 1264 and
are based on the values indicated in the table of general data. The thermal output values indicated in the tables are the result of specific
conditions, for the dimensioning of the systems we therefore suggest proceeding with the calculation methods specified in the standard,
analysing each case. The values shown are to be considered indicative.
General data
Supply temperature 37C
Return temperature 32C
Room temperature 20C
Pipe MIXAL 16x2
Concrete conductivity 1.28 W/mK
Thickness of concrete 5 cm
Ceramic tile covering 10 mm (R
,B
= 0.01 m
2
K/W)
Pipe spacing [cm] T 5 7.5 10 15 20 22.5 30 35
Specific heat output [W/m
2
] q 98 91 85 74 65 60 50 43
Surface temperature [C]
F,m
28.8 28.3 27.8 26.8 26.0 25.7 24.7 24.2
Cotto tile covering 15 mm (R
,B
= 0.0167 m
2
K/W)
Pipe spacing [cm] T 5 7.5 10 15 20 22.5 30 35
2
] q 94 87 81 71 62 58 48 42
F,m
28.5 27.9 27.4 26.6 25.8 25.5 24.6 24.1
Parquet covering 12 mm (R
,B
= 0.06 m
2
K/W)
Pipe spacing [cm] T 5 7.5 10 15 20 22.5 30 35
2
] q 72 68 64 57 51 48 40 36
F,m
26.6 26.3 26.0 25.4 24.8 24.6 23.9 23.6
Carpet covering 10 mm (R
,B
= 0.11 m
2
K/W)
Pipe spacing [cm] T 5 7.5 10 15 20 22.5 30 35
2
] q 57 54 51 46 42 40 35 32
F,m
25.4 25.1 24.9 24.5 24.1 23.9 23.4 23.2
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
240
M MEASUREMENT UNITS
Table M.1 Basic and additional measurement units.
Quantity Unit Symbol
Length metres m
Mass kilograms kg
Time seconds s
Electricity amps A
Temperature Kelvin K
Luminous intensity candela cd
Quantity of a substance mole mole
Plane angle radian rad
Solid angle steradian sr
Tabella M.2 Conversion factors.
Length
1 inch = 25.40 mm
1 ft (foot) = 0.3048 m
1 yd (yard) = 0.9144 m
1 mi (US mile) = 1.609 km
1 mi (marine mile) = 1.852 km
Area
1 inch
2
= 645.2 mm
2
1 ft
2
= 0.09290 m
2
Volume e capacity
1 l = 0.001 m
3
1 inch
3
= 16.39 cm
3
1 ft
3
= 0.02832 m
3
1 gal US (gallon) = 0.003785 m
3
1 gal US = 3.785 l
1 gal UK = 0.004546 m
3
1 gal UK = 4.546 l
Mass
1 kg = 2,204 lb
1 t (ton) = 1000 kg
1 oz (ounce) = 28.35 g
Density
1 lb/ft
3
= 16.02 kg/m
3
Force
1 N (Newton) = 0.102 kgf
1 kgf (kg force) = 9.81 N
1 lbf = 4.448 N
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
241
Pressure
1 Pa = 1 N/m
2
1 bar = 100000 Pa
1 bar = 1.019 kg/cm
2
1 bar = 14.48 psi
1 atm (physical atmosphere) = 101325 Pa
1 atm = 760 mm Hg
1 at (technical atmosphere) = 1 kg/cm
2
1 at = 736 mm Hg
1 at = 10 m H
2
O
1 atm = 1.033 at
1 lb/inch
2
= 6.895 kPa
1 inch H
2
O = 249.1 Pa
1 inch Hg = 3.386 kPa
1 mm H
2
O = 9.807 Pa
1 mm Hg = 133.3 Pa
1 torr = 133.3 Pa
1 mbar = 100 Pa
1 psi = 1 lb/inch
2
Energy - Heat - Work
1 Btu (British Thermal Unit) = 1.055 kJ
1 kWh = 3.6 MJ
1 kcal = 4.187 kJ
1 J (Joule) = 1 Nm
1 J = 0.102 kgfm
Potenza
1 kW (Watt) = 1.36 CV
1 kW = 1.34 HP
1 kW = 0.860 kcal/h
1 kcal/h = 1.162 W
1 CV = 0.986 HP
1 HP = 1.014 CV
1 Btu/h = 0.2931 W
1 J/s = 1 W
Flow
1 ft
3
/h = 7.866 ml/s
1 ft
3
/min = 471.9 ml/s
1 l/s = 60 l/min
1 l/s = 3600 l/h
1 l/s = 3.6 m
3
/h
Energy flow
1 Btu/ft
3
= 37.26 kJ/m
3
1 kcal/m
3
= 4.187 kJ/m
3
1 Btu/lb = 2.326 kJ/kg
1 kcal/kg = 4.187 kJ/kg
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
242
Heat flow
1 Btu/ft
2
h = 3.155 W/m
2
1 Btu/inch
2
h = 454.2 W/m
2
1 kcal/m
2
h = 1.162 W/m
2
Specific heat
1 Btu/lbF = 4.187 kJ/kgK
1 kcal/kgC = 4.187 kJ/kgK
1 Btu/ft
3
F = 67.07 kJ/mK
1 kcal/m
3
C = 4.187 kJ/m
3
K
Thermal conductivity
1 Btu/fthF = 1.731 W/mK
1 kcal/mhC = 1.162 W/mK
1 cal/cmsC = 418.7 W/mK
Thermal conductance
1 Btu/ft
2
hF = 5.678 W/m
2
K
1 kcal/m
2
hC = 1.162 W/m
2
K
1 cal/cm
2
sC = 41.87 W/m
2
K
Temperature scales
1 K (Kelvin) = 5/9R
1R (Rankine) = F + 459.67
1C (Celsius) = 5/9(F - 32)
1 K = 5/9(F + 459.67)
1 K = C + 273.15
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
243
N STANDARD AND LEGISLATIVE REFERENCES
Table N.1 Standard and legislative references.
UNI EN 1264-1:1999 Floor heating - Systems and components - Definitions and symbols.
UNI EN 1264-2:1999 Floor heating - Systems and components - Determination of the heat output.
UNI EN 1264-3:1999 Floor heating - Systems ad components - Dimensioning
UNI EN 1264-4:2003 Floor heating - Systems and components - Installation.
UNI EN ISO 7730:2006
Ergonomics of thermal rooms - Analytical determination and interpretation of thermal well-being
using the calculation of the PMV and PPD indexes and local thermal well-being criteria.
UNI EN 13163:2003
Thermal insulation for construction - Products in expanded polystyrene obtained in the factory -
Specification.
UNI EN ISO 845:1997
Plastic materials and cellular rubbers.
Determination of the apparent mass per unit volume.
EN 13501-1:2002
Fire classification of construction products and building elements
Part 1: Classification using test data from reaction to fire tests.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
244
O TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PEXAL pipe
Pexal multilayer pipe in PEXb-Al-PEXb guaranteed for 50 years operating continuously at 10 bar 95C; with IIP, DVGW and KIWA product
certification with TIG butt-welding of the metal layer along the entire length of the pipe with welding process certification issued by IIS
(Italian Welding Institute) and crosslinking of the internal and external layers using the silane technology. Pipe suitable for transporting fluids
(in compliance with ISO TR 10358 standard) at a maximum continuous operating temperature of 95C and a maximum pressure of 10 bar.
System with product certification issued by accredited testing centres and in compliance with the provisions regarding potability.
MIXAL pipe
MIXAL multilayer pipe in HDPE-Al-PEXb guaranteed for 50 years operating continuously at 10 bar 95C; with IIP, AENOR product certification
with TIG butt-welding of the metal layer along the entire length of the pipe with welding process certification issued by IIS (Italian Welding
Institute) and crosslinking of the internal and external layers using the silane technology. Pipe suitable for transporting fluids (in compliance
with ISO TR 10358 standard) at a maximum continuous operating temperature of 95C and a maximum pressure of 10 bar. System with
product certification issued by accredited testing centres and in compliance with the provisions regarding potability.
V-ESSE20 insulating panel
Code VS0109000.
Pocketed panel in expanded closed cell polystyrene of Valsir V-ESSE20 type, supplied with bosses for anchoring the pipe and side junctions
for blocking the panels. The panel is attached to a surface film in blue EPS that gives it a good surface resistance to stamping. Panel density is
30 kg/m
3
and compressive strength is 150 kPa. The panel meets the European Standard UNI EN ISO 13163 and carries the CE mark, fire
resistance class is EUROCLASS E. Dimensions: 1350x750 mm. Base thickness of 20 mm with a total of 50 mm and a pipe spacing of 75 mm.
V-ESSE30 insulating panel
Code VS0109001.
Pocketed panel in expanded closed cell polystyrene of Valsir V-ESSE30 type, supplied with bosses for anchoring the pipe and side junctions
for blocking the panels. The panel is attached to a surface film in blue EPS that gives it a good surface resistance to stamping. Panel density
is 30 kg/m
3
and compressive strength is 150 kPa. The panel meets the European Standard UNI EN ISO 13163 and carries the CE mark, fire
resistance class is EUROCLASS E. Dimensions: 1350x750 mm. Base thickness of 30 mm with a total of 60 mm and pipe spacing of 75 mm.
V-ZETA20 insulating panel
Code VS0109016.
Pocketed panel in expanded closed cell polystyrene of Valsir V-ZETA20 type, supplied with bosses for anchoring the pipe and side junctions
for blocking the panels. Panel density is 30 kg/m
3
and compressive strength is 200 kPa. The panel meets the European Standard UNI EN
ISO 13163 and carries the CE mark, fire resistance class is EUROCLASS E. Dimensions: 1200x750 mm. Base thickness of 20 mm with a
total of 50 mm and pipe spacing of 75 mm.
V-ERRE10 insulating panel
Code VS0109017.
Pocketed panel in expanded closed cell polystyrene with a rigid film in black, compact, impact resistant PS of Valsir V-ERRE10 type,
supplied with bosses for anchoring the pipe and side junctions for blocking the panels. Panel density is 30 kg/m
3
and compressive strength
is 200 kPa. The panel meets the European Standard UNI EN ISO 13163 and carries the CE mark, fire resistance class is EUROCLASS E.
Dimension: 1000x500 mm. Base thickness of 10 mm with a total of 32 mm and pipe spacing of 50 mm.
V-ELLE20/200 insulating panel
Code VS0109018.
Smooth panel in coils of expanded polystyrene of Valsir V-ELLE20/200 type, with grey film in polystyrene with aluminium foil onto which
blue squares have been marked with a pipe spacing of 50 mm to facilitate laying of the pipe. Panel density is 30 kg/m
3
and compressive
strength is 200 kPa. The panel meets the European Standard UNI EN ISO 13163 and carries the CE mark, fire resistance class of the
insulating layer is EUROCLASS E. Dimensions: 1000x12000 mm, total thickness of 20 mm.
V-ELLE30/250 insulating panel
Code VS0109019.
Smooth panel in coils of expanded polystyrene of Valsir V-ELLE30/250 type, with grey film in polystyrene with aluminium foil onto which
blue squares have been marked with a pipe spacing of 50 mm to facilitate laying of the pipe. Panel density is 40 kg/m
3
and compressive
strength is 250 kPa. The panel meets the European Standard UNI EN ISO 13163 and carries the CE mark, fire resistance class of the
insulating layer is EUROCLASSE E. Dimensions: 1000x12000 mm, total thickness of 30 mm.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
245
V-BAND edging strip
Code VS0109200.
Valsir V-BAND edging strip with adhesive on the entire surface with protective film divided in two parts. Strip coupled to transparent film
in polyethylene with 40 m thickness to prevent cement from filtering in between the edging strip and the insulation panel. The strip is 7
mm thick and 200 mm high.
Strip for V-JOINT expansion joints
Code VS0109201.
Strip for expansion/settlement joints in expanded polyethylene with a 20 mm band of adhesive on one end, to be coupled with the V-JOINT/T
support or to be stuck to the pocketed panels on the side with the bosses.
V-JOINT/T profile for expansion joints
Code VS0109203.
T-profile, self-adhesive for fixing the band for V-JOINT expansion joints. Profile length of 1.20 m.
Code VS0109600.
Valsir V-FOIL anti-humidity polyethylene film, with lateral adhesive band for sticking one sheet to another thus avoiding humidity at the
joints. Film with reference lines traced on the entire length to facilitate overlapping of the sheets. Thickness of 0.2 mm and dimensions
1.2x100 m.
Code VS0109601.
Multi-layer soundproof mat for reducing the foot-traffic noise of Valsir V-ACUSTIC type, composed of resistant and elastic synthetic fibres.
Thickness of 8 mm that drops to 6 mm following installation. Perfect barrier to humidity. Acoustic performance: L
w
> 28 dB (with screed
of 100 kg/m
2
).
V-CLIP01 pipe anchor clip
Code VS0109400.
Anchor clip for PEXAL and MIXAL multi-layer pipes on V-ELLE smooth panel. Clip for pipes diameter 14, 16 and 20 mm to be fixed through
clip fastener.
Code VS0109403.
Anchor clip for fixing PEXAL and MIXAL multi-layer pipes to a mounting metal grid. Clip for pipes with diameter 16 and 20 mm for fixing to
metal grid with net thread from 3 up to 5 mm.
Code VS0109405.
Anchor clip for fixing PEXAL and MIXAL multi-layer pipes to a mounting metal grid. Clip for pipes with diameter 26 mm for fixing to metal
grid with net thread from 3 up to 5 mm.
V-CLIP04 grid anchor clip
Code VS0109406.
Anchor clip for fixing metal anti-shrinkage grid to insulating panel. Length cm 8.
V-RAIL01 anchor bar
Code VS0109410.
Anchor bar for D.16 PEXAL and MIXAL multi-layer pipes with adhesive strip for attachment to insulating panel.
V-RAIL02 anchor bar
Code VS0109411.
Anchor bar for D.20 PEXAL and MIXAL multi-layer pipes with adhesive strip for attachment to insulating panel.
V-FLUID concrete fluidiser
Code VS0109800.
Additive for V-FLUID concrete to manufacture more malleable concretes and to reduce the water content of the mixture.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
246
V-MIX01/PF mixing kit
Code VS0110301.
Mixing kit of Valsir V-MIX01/PF type, with 3 speed pump and head of 4, 5 and 6 m complete with safety thermostat, pocket for temperature
probe and pockets for immersion of thermometers. Inlet boiler side 1 and manifold attachments 1. Mixing is achieved with a three-
way thermostatic adaptable valve and a thermostatic head with a liquid sensor with capillary sensor (temperature control range 20-50C).
Equipped with thermometers on the supply and return (full scale at 60C) and by-pass circuit on the pump with adjustable differential valve
(0-0.8 bar). A no-return valve is inserted on the circulation system to avoid pressure losses in the distribution manifold. The mixing kit can
be mounted with manifold attachments both on the right and on the left.
V-MIX01/PV mixing kit
Code VS0110302.
Mixing kit of Valsir V-MIX01/PV type, with 3 speed pump and head of 4, 5 and 6 m complete with safety thermostat, pocket for temperature
probe and pockets for immersion of thermometers. Inlet boiler side 1 and manifold attachments 1. Mixing is achieved with a
three-way valve and a 220 V motor that can be used with electronic control systems for supply temperature management. Equipped with
thermometers on the supply and return (full scale at 60C) and by-pass circuit on the pump with adjustable differential valve (0-0.8 bar).
A no-return valve is inserted on the circulation system to avoid pressure losses in the distribution manifold. The mixing kit can be mounted
with manifold attachments both on the right and on the left.
V-MIX02 mixing kit
Code VS0110303.
Mixing kit of Valsir V-MIX02 type, with 3 speed pump and head of 4, 5 and 6 m complete with pocket for temperature probe and pockets
for immersion of thermometers. Inlet boiler side 1 and manifold attachments 1. Mixing is achieved with a thermostatic adaptable
valve and a thermostatic head with a liquid sensor and a capillary sensor (temperature control range 20-50C). Equipped with a supply
thermometer (full scale at 60C) and by-pass circuit on the pump that guarantees a minimum passage of 400 l/h. A no-return valve
is inserted on the circulation system to avoid pressure loss in the distribution manifold. The mixing kit can be mounted with manifold
attachments both on the right and on the left.
V-BOX fixed point recessed distribution and mixing modules
Code VS0110311, Code VS0110331.
Valsir V-BOX compact distribution module, in recessed version for high and low temperature circuits with fixed point mixing valve. They are
available for supplying two or three zones one of which is high temperature for feeding the radiators. They are supplied with painted steel
cabinet, insulation in polypropylene foam, manifold with hydraulic compensator incorporated, three-speed pumps with head of up to 5 m,
compact interception valves, adjustment thermostatic heads and safety thermostat. The module can be connected to the boiler in three
different ways.
V-BOX variable point recessed distribution and mixing modules
Code VS0110321, Code VS0110341.
Valsir V-BOX compact distribution module, in the recessed version for high and low temperature circuits, variable point valve with motor
option*. They are available for supplying two or three zones, one of which is high temperature for feeding the radiators. They are supplied
with painted steel cabinet, insulation in polypropylene foam, manifold with hydraulic compensator incorporated, three-speed pumps with
head of up to 5 m, compact interception valves, adjustment thermostatic heads and safety thermostat. The module can be connected to
the boiler in three different ways.
* The motor to be applied to the mixing valve (not included) is code VS0110701.
V-BOX fixed point wall-hung distribution and mixing modules
Code VS0110312, Code VS0110332.
Valsir V-BOX compact distribution module, in wall-hung version for high and low temperature fixed point circuits. They are available for
supplying two or three zones one of which is high temperature for feeding the radiators. They are supplied with painted steel cabinet,
insulation in polypropylene foam, manifold with hydraulic compensator incorporated, three-speed pumps with head of up to 5 m, compact
interception valves, adjustment thermostatic heads and safety thermostat. Complete with protective cover in painted steel.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
247
V-BOX variable point wall-hung distribution and mixing modules
Code VS0110322, Code VS0110342.
Valsir V-BOX compact distribution module, wall-hung version for high and low temperature circuits with variable point mixing valve*.
They are available for supplying two or three zones one of which is high temperature for feeding the radiators. They are complete with painted
steel cabinet, insulation in polypropylene foam, manifold with hydraulic compensator incorporated, three-speed pump with head of up to 5 m,
compact interception valves, adjustment thermostatic heads and safety thermostat. Complete with protective cover in painted steel.
* The motor to be applied to the mixing valve (not included) is code VS0110701.
Fixed-point mixing groups for central heating systems DN 25
Code VS0110802.
Fixed point group with mixing valve of Valsir DN 25 type with thermostat option* with by-pass on the secondary and primary circuit.
The group is complete with three-speed pump with maximum head of 6 m, insulation in expanded polypropylene and interception valves with
thermometer on supply and return. Inversion option of supply from right to left with option of installation of a pressure differential group.
* The thermostatic head to be applied to the mixing valve (not included) is code VS0110405.
Thermal power plants mixing groups with variable temperature
Code VS0110803, code VS0110809, code VS0110815.
Valsir type group DN 25, DN 32, DN 40 with variable point mixing valve with motor capacity* with a by-pass on the secondary and primary.
The group is complete with three speed circulator with maximum predominance 6 m, insulation in expanded polypropylene, interception
valves with thermometer integrated on the supply and return. Possibility of changing supply from right to left with possibility of installing a
differential pressure group.
* The motor to be applied to the mixing valve (not included) is code number VS0110701.
Thermal power plants high temperature groups
Valsir type group DN 25, DN 32, DN 40 for high temperature circuits complete with three speed circulator with maximum predominance 6 m,
insulation in expanded polypropylene, interception valves wit thermometer integrated on the supply and return.
Distribution manifolds for heating plants
Code VS0110821, Code VS0110823, Code VS0110824, Code VS0110825, Code VS0110831, Code VS0110833, Code VS0110834,
Code VS0110835, Code VS0110843, Code VS0110845.
Valsir distribution manifold for heating plants DN 25 (with 2, 3, 4, 5 outlets), DN 32 (with 2, 3, 4, 5 outlets) and DN 40 (with 3, 4 outlets)
complete with insulation in polypropylene foam with compact interception valves on the supply and return connections to the mixing and
distribution groups.
Hydraulic separator for distribution manifold
Hydraulic separator DN 25, DN 32, DN 40 complete with insulation in expanded polypropylene with threaded attachments for air vent groups
and for system drainage.
Manifold/hydraulic separator connection kit
Code VS0110871, code VS0110873, code VS0110874, code VS0110875, code VS0110881, code VS0110883, code VS0110884,
code VS0110885, code VS0110891.
Supply/return pipes insulated for connection of the distribution manifold to the vertical hydraulic separator for DN 25, DN 32, DN 40.
Support kit for manifold DN 25 and DN 32
Code VS0112021.
The kit contains a pair of supports for fixing the manifold to the wall for DN 25 and DN 32.
Support kit for DN 40 manifold
Code VS0112023.
The DN 40 kit is made up of support feet, adjustable in height for supporting the DN 40 distribution manifold.
Differential group
Code VS0112861, code VS0110863.
Differential group composed of 3/4 valve with measurement field of 2 to 6.5 m.w.c. (maximum operating pressure 8 bar), fittings and
seals.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
248
Preassembled distribution manifold
code VS0110109, code VS0110110, code VS0110111, code VS0110112.
Completely preassembled manifold kit composed of: 1) 1 manifold of Valsir type, obtained from a brass alloy drawn bar equipped with
eurocono connections Gx18, equipped with lockshield valves on the supply manifold and thermostatic adaptable valves on return,
complete with stainless steel fixing brackets and lockshield valves on the supply manifold and equipped with locking device of maximum
opening to prevent accidental variations of balancing settings of the circuits. 2) Tailpiece kit 1 (Code VS0110041). 3) Flow meters (Code
VS0110049). 4) Compact terminal groups with thermometer (Code VS0110026). 5) Hexagonal spanner.
Kit for increasing manifold outlets
Code VS0110022.
Kit for adding 2 extra outlets to the manifold, composed of: 1) 1 tailpiece (Code VS0110041). 2) Adaptor kit for manifold connections
(Code VS0110042). 3) Supply and return manifold 1. 3) Flow meters (Code VS0110049), 2 pieces.
Manifold for civil distribution
code VS0110011, code VS0110012.
Valsir type manifold 1, obtained from a brass alloy drawn bar equipped with euroconus connections Gx18, balancing valves on supply
manifold and return valves with thermostatic capacity, complete with stainless steel fixing brackets. The balancing valves on the supply
manifold are provided with locking device in case of maximum opening, in order to avoid accidental variations of the balance settings of
the circuits.
Manifold for industrial distribution
Valsir type manifold 1 obtained from a brass alloy drawn bar equipped with euroconus connections Gx18. Supplied with stainless
steel fixing brackets.
End kit for distribution manifold
Code VS0110026.
End kit 1 including a pair of outlet valves with insert for system drainage, with embedded thermometer.
Compact elbow interception valves kit for distribution manifolds
Code VS0110033.
Couple of 1 elbow interception valves without tailpiece.
Compact straight interception valves kit for distribution manifolds
Code VS0110034.
Couple of 1 straight interception valves without tailpiece.
Flow meter for distribution manifolds
Code VS0110049.
Flow meter with euroconus Gx18 attachment, to be installed on the return side of the distribution manifold. Measuring range from 0,5
up to 3 l/min.
Servo motor for mixing valve 220 V AC
Code VS0110701.
Servo motors with 3 point regulation system and 220 V power supply. It is complete with graded scale for the identification of the position
and selector for changing the automatic/manual function. It is mounted by means of a blocking screw and a anti-rotation reference rod.
Servo motor for mixing valve 24 V DC
Code VS0110703.
Servo motors 0-10 V regulations system. It is complete with graded scale for the identification of the position and selector for changing the
automatic/manual function. It is mounted by means of a blocking screw and a anti-rotation reference rod.
Thermo-electric head 24 V
Code VS0110430.
Thermo-electric head normally closed (NC) for connection to the manifolds for the circuits control. Equipped with visual open/closed
indication. Working voltage of 24 V at 50/60 Hz.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
249
Thermo-electric head 220 V
Code VS0110432.
Thermo-electric head normally closed (NC) for connection to the manifolds for the circuits control. Equipped with visual open/closed
indication. Working voltage of 220 V at 50/60 Hz.
Single zone control unit
Code VS0110600.
Valsir circuit control unit, for floor systems with transformer integrated 230/24 V at 50/60 Hz for control with 1 thermostat (1 zone) of a
maximum of 4 thermoelectric heads. The control unit is provided with LEDs to indicate the state of the actuators, of the supply and the
state of the protection fuse. Can be fixed to the wall or to a DIN type bar.
6 zone control unit
Code VS0110605.
Valsir control unit, for floor systems with transformer integrated 230/24 V at 50/60 Hz, by means of 6 thermostats (6 zones) it controls a
maximum of 14 thermoelectric heads. The control unit is provided with LEDs to indicate the state of the actuators, of the supply and the
state of the protection fuse. Can be fixed to the wall or to a DIN type bar.
Expansion module for 2 zones
Code VS0110610.
Valsir expansion module for single and six zone control units, for increasing the number of zones managed. Power supply 24 V at 50/60 Hz.
The expansion module is connected to the control units with a backplane connector. Can be connected to 2 thermostats (2 zones) for the
control of maximum 8 thermoelectric heads.
Code VS0110620.
Valsir module for controlling the pump of the mixing kit and the boiler. Allows both pumps to be interrupted when all the circuits are closed
and to regulate the ignition delay by 5, 10 or 15 min. Power supply 24 V at 50/60 Hz.
Regulator for mixing groups for central heating systems
Code VS0111101.
Electronic control programmer for central heating mixing groups of Valsir type, can be installed according to DIN. The system manages a
three-way valve and can actuate 220 V three-point motors. The regulator keeps the supply temperature of the mixer constant according to
the temperature set. The supply temperature is measured with a regulator with a NTC probe connected to the regulator.
V-CLIMA regulation kit for heating and cooling systems
Code VS0111001, code VS0111011.
Climatic regulation system for the management of heating and cooling floor radiant systems of Valsir type. The system is composed of a
master unit for the regulation of a mixing valve, an external probe with NTC temperature probe with IP68 protection class and temperature
range of -30 to +50C; an NTC type supply probe with IP68 protection class, 6m cable length, bulb dimensions 6x40 mm and temperature
detection range -50 to +105C; also composed of a room temperature probe (for heating only kit) or temperature/humidity (for heating/
cooling kit) with IP30 protection class and temperature range of 0 to +50C and humidity range of 0 to 100% RH with room temperature
control range of -20C to +70C and max 90% non-condensation RH. The system is capable of regulating additional mixing valves (up
to a maximum of 6) by connecting the master unit to expanders to manage additional climatic zones. The system measures the external
temperature, the temperatures and the humidity of the single zones by directly actuating the mixing valve and modifying the supply
temperature of the system to each zone. The supply temperature to the circuits depends directly on the climatic conditions; in the heating
mode, the lower the external temperature the higher the supply temperature to the circuits. In the cooling mode, the system is capable of
identifying the risk of the formation of condensation and consequently actuates the dehumidifiers. The system can be equipped with a Web
interface in order to communicate with a remote personal computer. By means of an additional card it is possible to control the heating
system by means of cell phone texts.
Expansion kit for V-CLIMA climatic regulation for heating and cooling systems
Code VS0111003, code VS0111013.
Expansion kit for climatic regulation unit of Valsir type, capable of managing an extra mixing valve besides the one controlled by the master
module, for the regulation of a radiant floor heating and cooling system. The system is composed of an expansion unit for the regulation of
a mixing valve, an NTC supply probe with IP68 protection class and 6m cable length, bulb dimensions 6x40 mm and temperature detection
range of -50 to +105C; also composed of a room temperature probe (for heating only kit) or temperature/humidity (for heating/cooling kit)
with IP30 protection class and a temperature measurement range of 0 to +50C and humidity measurement range of 0 to 100% UR, with
room conditions of -20C to +70C and max 90% non-condensation RH.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
250
Supply probe for V-CLIMA system and fixed point Regulator
Code VS0111057.
NTC temperature probe with IP68 protection class, 6 m cable length, bulb dimensions 6x40 mm and temperature detection range of -50
to 105C.
V-DRYAIR 250V
Code VS0110901.
V-DRYAIR 250V VALSIR isotherm dehumidifier for vertical recessed installation equipped with centrifugal ventilator and a motor with
three speed options. It is used for reducing the relative humidity in rooms and it is dimensioned to treat a nominal flow of air of 260 m
3
/h.
It is made up of a refrigerating unit made of copper tubes and aluminium fins, an alternative compressor mounted on anti-vibration supports,
expansion capillary and dehydrator filter; the refrigerating cycle is fed with gas R134a. The dehumidifier is equipped with pre and post-
treatment batteries and fed with refrigerated water coming from the radiant panel circuits at a temperature of 15-18C, a total flow of 175
l/h and a nominal power of 830 W. The housing cabinet is in galvanized sheet metal with dimensions of 729x212x705 mm and is provided
with two 3/8 female attachments for feeding the batteries and a rubber tube for draining the condensation with an internal diameter of 15
mm. The unit weighs 36 kg and the sound pressure measured at a distance of one meter is 36.6 dB(A) measured with the ventilator running
at maximum speed and the compressor functioning in a reverberation room in compliance with the standard ISO 3741:1998.
Casing in wood and cover panel for V-DRYAIR 250V
Code VS0110911.
Casing in wood for housing the V-DRYAIR 250V VALSIR isotherm dehumidifier with dimensions of 740x230x750 mm, perforated for the
passage of condensation supply and drainage tubes. The casing is provided with a front panel in white painted wood with dimensions of
800x785 mm with air removal and delivery fans.
V-DRYAIR 250H
Code VS0110903.
V-DRYAIR 250H VALSIR isotherm dehumidifier for horizontal installation in suspended ceiling with centrifugal ventilator and a motor with
3
/h.
expansion capillary and dehydrator filter; the refrigerating cycle is fed with gas R134a. The dehumidifier is equipped with pre- and post-
with two 1/2 female attachments for feeding the batteries and a rubber tube for draining the condensation with an internal diameter 15
mm. The unit weighs 39 kg and the sound pressure measured at a distance of one meter is 39.5 dB(A) measured with the ventilator running
at maximum speed and the compressor functioning in a reverberation room in compliance with the standard ISO 3741:1998.
V-DRYAIR 450H
Code VS0110905.
3
/h.
It is made up of a refrigerating unit made of copper tubes and aluminium fins, an alternative compressor mounted on anti-vibration
supports, expansion capillary and dehydrator filter; the refrigerating cycle is fed with gas R134a. The dehumidifier is equipped with pre- and
post-treatment batteries and fed with refrigerated water coming from the radiant panel circuits at a temperature of 15-18C, a total flow of
350 l/h and a nominal power of 2800 W.
The housing cabinet is in galvanized sheet metal with dimensions of 875x655x405 mm and is provided with two 1/2 female attachments
for feeding the batteries and a rubber tube for draining the condensation with an internal diameter 15 mm. The unit weighs 72 kg and
the sound pressure measured at a distance of one meter is 67.7 dB(A) measured with the ventilator running at maximum speed and the
compressor functioning in a reverberation room in compliance with the standard ISO 3741:1998.
The dehumidifier is equipped with an optional module for renewing and recovering the air that guarantees the delivery of air at space
neutral temperature and that can be managed with an independent timer. With the use of appropriate dampers for the air ducts it is
possible to choose between a functioning mode in complete recirculation (dehumidification) or renewal or else to mix these two functions
by dehumidifying and renewing the room air contemporarily. The energy recovery device can preheat/pre-cool the process air, intersecting
the flow with the room emission air thus increasing the efficiency of the unit and reducing energy consumption.
A
P
P
E
N
D
I
X
8
251
V-DRYAIR 900H
Code VS0110907.
3
/h.
expansion capillary and dehydrator filter; the refrigerating cycle is fed with gas R134a. The dehumidifier is equipped with pre and post-
with two 1/2 female attachments for feeding the batteries and a rubber tube for draining the condensation with an internal diameter 12
mm. The dehumidifier is complete with brackets and screws for securing to the ceiling and a flow meter to be inserted on the flow to the
pre-treatment batteries. The unit weighs 95 kg and the sound pressure measured at a distance of one meter is 67.6 dB(A) measured with
the ventilator running at maximum speed and the compressor functioning in a reverberation room in compliance with the standard ISO
3741:1998. The dehumidifier is equipped with an optional module for renewing and recovering the air that guarantees the delivery of air at
space neutral temperature and that can be managed with an independent timer. With the use of appropriate dampers for the air ducts it is
possible to choose between a functioning mode in complete recirculation (dehumidification) or renewal or else to mix these two functions
by dehumidifying and renewing the room air contemporarily. The energy recovery device can preheat/pre-cool the process air, intersecting
the flow with the room emission air thus increasing the efficiency of the unit and reducing energy consumption.
Plenum chamber for V-DRYAIR 450H
Code VS0110915.
Plenum chamber for V-DRYAIR 450H VALSIR isotherm dehumidifier made of galvanised sheet metal with dimensions of 220x655x405
mm and weighs 7 kg. The plenum allows more ducts to be connected to the dehumidifier so that the air in several rooms can be treated
contemporarily. The use of the plenum chamber allows the ducts to be configured in different ways: all the cover panels of the ducts can
in fact be dismounted to allow multiple system configurations in relation to the type of installation. The plenum is complete with support
brackets and fixing screws and anti-vibration adhesive neoprene seal.
Plenum chamber for V-DRYAIR 900H
Code VS0110919.
Plenum chamber for V-DRYAIR 900H VALSIR isotherm dehumidifier, made of galvanised sheet metal with dimensions of 320x805x405
mm and weighs 10 kg. The plenum allows more ducts to be connected to the dehumidifier so that the air in several rooms can be treated
contemporarily. The use of the plenum chamber allows the ducts to be configured in different ways: all the cover panels of the ducts can
in fact be dismounted to allow multiple system configurations in relation to the type of installation. The plenum is complete with support
brackets and fixing screws and anti-vibration adhesive neoprene seal.
Code VS0110913.
Renewal and recovery module for V-DRYAIR 450H VALSIR isotherm dehumidifier for the renewal of air at neutral temperature both in
summer and in winter months. It is equipped with an energy recovery device made up of an exchanger with a filter on the inlet on the
outdoor air side. The exchanger intersects the flows of renewal air with the room air, pre-heating or pre-cooling in relation to the period
of the year thus increasing efficiency of the unit and reducing energy consumption. Outdoor air is inhaled by means of an independent
centrifugal ventilator. With the use of appropriate dampers for the air ducts it is possible to choose between a functioning mode in complete
recirculation (dehumidification) or renewal or else to mix these two functions by dehumidifying and renewing the room air contemporarily;
the process can be managed with an independent timer on the duct opening dampers. The recovery unit is made of galvanised sheet metal
with dimensions of 750x655x405 mm and weighs 35 kg and it is complete with support brackets and fixing screws and anti-vibration
adhesive neoprene seal.
Code VS0110917.
Renewal and recovery module for V-DRYAIR 450H VALSIR isotherm dehumidifier for the renewal of air at neutral temperature both in
summer and in winter months. It is equipped with an energy recovery device made up of an exchanger with a filter on the inlet on the
outdoor air side. The exchanger intersects the flows of renewal air with the room air, pre-heating or pre-cooling in relation to the period
of the year thus increasing efficiency of the unit and reducing energy consumption. Outdoor air is inhaled by means of an independent
centrifugal ventilator. With the use of appropriate dampers for the air ducts it is possible to choose between a functioning mode in complete
recirculation (dehumidification) or renewal or else to mix these two functions by dehumidifying and renewing room air contemporarily; the
process can be managed with an independent timer on the duct opening dampers. The recovery unit is made of galvanised sheet metal
with dimensions of 1050x805x405 mm and weighs 55 kg and it is complete with support brackets and fixing screws and anti-vibration
adhesive neoprene seal.
Valsir S.p.A.
Localit Merlaro, 2
25078 Vestone (Brescia) Italia
Tel. +39 0365 877.011 - Fax +39 0365 820.261
valsir@valsir.it - commerciale.italia@valsir.it
assistenza@valsir.it - impianti@valsir.it
export@valsir.it
Among the first companies in the world to obtain the UNI EN ISO 9001:2000
certificate from DNV Certification Institut.
Against a background of continuous improvement of our service, you can now communicate with Valsir, by telling us your level of satisfaction, by
means an appropriate form. It is very simple. All you have to do is visit the web site www.valsir.it, enter the section Services and click under
We are waiting for your opinion too.
www.valsir.it
U
f
f
.
P
u
b
.

V
a
l
s
i
r

-

L
0
2
-
2
4
2
/
1

M
a
r
z
o

2
0
0
9
Technical manual
L02-242/1

Floor Heating Valsir PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Floor Heating Valsir PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

QUALITY FOR PLUMBING

The dimensional characteristics are indicated in the following table.

2008 Valsir S.p.A.

2008 Valsir S.p.A.

2008 Valsir S.p.A.

The main components that make up this system are:

The main components that make up this system are:

The main components that make up this system are:

The main components that make up this system are:

2008 Valsir S.p.A.

The main components that make up the system are:

The main components that make up this system are:

The main components that make up this system are:

MIXAL 20x2 pipe

MIXAL 20x2 pipe

S-ar putea să vă placă și